www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?
www.carburetor-manual.com
Would you like some Free Manuals?
http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html
Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com for more Free Manuals
Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting
with this one.
"The ABC's of Carburetion"
Click Here Now
file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]
File:01unpix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:03:21 1996
[PI00700( X)05/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090102-B
File:01unpix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:03:21 1996
*[PI00800(ALL)03/95]
thirty-six pica chart:
File:01unpix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:03:21 1996
*[PI02300(ALL)05/95]
Table of Contents
Introductory Information
Safety Restraints
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Starting Your Explorer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Warning Lights and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Instrument Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
Electronic Sound Systems
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
Driving Your Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
Roadside Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
295
Customer Assistance
317
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
Servicing Your Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
333
Quick Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
421
Service Station Information
444
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN00300(ALL)04/95]
*[IN00400(ALL)04/95]
Ford’s Commitment to You
*[IN00500(ALL)04/95]
*[IN00600(ALL)04/95]
Our Guiding Principles
*[IN00700(ALL)04/95]
■ You are the focus of everything we do. Our work must be
*[IN00750(ALL)04/95]
■ Continuous improvement is essential to our success. We
*[IN00800(ALL)04/95]
■ Employee involvement is our way of life. We are a team.
*[IN00900(ALL)04/95]
■ Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We must maintain
*[IN01000(ALL)04/95]
■ Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct worldwide
At Ford Motor Company, excellence is the continuous
commitment to achieve the best result possible. It is dedication
to learning what you want, determination to develop the right
concept, and execution of that concept with care, precision, and
attention to detail. In short, excellence means being the standard
by which others are judged.
■ Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the quality of our
products and services must be our number one priority.
done with you in mind, providing better products and
services than our competition.
must strive for excellence in everything we do: in our
products — in their safety and value — and in our services,
our human relations, our competitiveness, and our
profitability.
We must treat one another with trust and respect.
mutually beneficial relationships with dealers, suppliers, and
our other business associates.
must be pursued in a manner that is socially responsible and
commands respect for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
1
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
*[IN01010(ALL)08/95]
*[IN01020(ALL)08/95]
Things to Know About Using This Guide
*[IN01030(ALL)08/95]
This guide describes equipment and gives specifications for
equipment that was in effect when this guide was approved for
printing. Ford may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without incurring obligation.
*[IN01040(ALL)07/95]
*[IN01042(ALL)05/95]
NOTES and WARNINGS
*[IN01044(ALL)05/95]
WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful in those areas
where carelessness can cause damage to your vehicle or
personal injury to yourself, your passengers or other people.
Please read all WARNINGS carefully.
Congratulations on the purchase of your new vehicle. This
guide has information about the equipment and the options for
your new vehicle. You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which information applies
to your vehicle, talk to your dealer.
NOTES give you additional information about the subject
matter you are referencing.
*[IN01046(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
*[IN01050(ALL)08/95]
*[IN01060(ALL)08/95]
Finding Information in This Guide
*[IN01070(ALL)08/95]
The Quick Index at the end of the book provides a page
number following each item which indicates where detailed
information can be found.
After you have read this guide once, you will probably return
to it when you have a specific question or need additional
information. To help you find specific information quickly, you
can use the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or the Index.
2
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN01080(ALL)08/95]
To use the Index, turn to the back of the book and search in the
alphabetical listing for the word that best describes the
information you need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We have designed the
Index so that you can find information under a technical term.
*[IN01090(ALL)08/95]
*[IN01100(ALL)08/95]
Canadian Owners — French Version
%
%
*[IN02400(ALL)04/95]
French Owner Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by
writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service
Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y
4G3.
Your Maintenance Schedule and Record
Booklet
*[IN02500(ALL)03/95]
The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists the services
that are most important for keeping your vehicle in good
condition. A record log is also provided to help you keep track
of all services performed.
*[IN02600(ALL)01/95]
*[IN02700(ALL)04/95]
About the Warranties
%
%
*[IN03100(ALL)03/95]
*[IN03250(ALL)03/95]
Your vehicle is covered by three types of warranties: Basic
Vehicle Warranty, Extended Warranties on certain parts, and
Emissions Warranties.
Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully to find out
about your vehicle’s warranties and your basic rights and
responsibilities.
If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you can get a new
one free of charge. Contact any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer,
or refer to the addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
3
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
*[IN04000(ALL)01/95]
*[IN04100(ALL)01/94]
Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan
*[IN04200(ALL)01/95]
You do not have to buy this option when you buy your vehicle.
However, your option to purchase the Ford Extended Service
Plan runs out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your dealer
for more details about the Ford Extended Service Plan.
*[IN04250(ALL)01/95]
If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not take
advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of
purchase, you may still be eligible. See your dealer for the
details.
*[IN04650(ALL)06/92]
% [IN04700( X)11/89]
*
Special Notice
NOTICE TO OWNERS OF UTILITY-TYPE
VEHICLES
%
%
%
*[IN04810( X)11/89]
[IN04815( X)12/95]
If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can buy a Ford
Extended Service Plan for your vehicle. This optional contract
provides service protection for a longer period of time than the
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be
sure to read the Additional Special Driving Instructions for Utility
Vehicles in this book and the special supplement included with
four-wheel drive vehicles entitled 4-Wheeling with Ford.
Although this special supplement is primarily directed to
four-wheel drive vehicle operators, these principles of safe
driving also apply to operators of the two-wheel drive Explorer.
Even though you may not select a 4WD or AWD option for
your Explorer, many of its operating characteristics are similar
to those of a four-wheel drive vehicle. For this reason, Ford
urges you to read and understand the contents of the 4-Wheeling
with Ford supplement.
4
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN04850( X)03/95]
*[IN04875( X)03/95]
%
AMBULANCE PACKAGES
RWARNING
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
*[IN06000(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06100(ALL)03/95]
%
%
*[IN06300(ALL)01/95]
Breaking Your Vehicle In
Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or break-in
period during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) that you drive it.
During the break-in period, you need to pay careful attention to
how you drive your vehicle.
■ Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle has new brake
linings, you should take these steps:
*[IN06400(ALL)01/95]
— Watch traffic carefully so that you can anticipate when to
stop.
*[IN06500(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06600(ALL)01/95]
*[IN06700(ALL)01/95]
— Begin braking well in advance.
*[IN06750(ALL)12/93]
%
*[IN06800(ALL)01/95]
— Apply the brakes gradually.
The break-in period for new brake linings lasts for 100 miles
(160 km) of city driving or 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
highway driving.
■ Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to proper torque
specifications at 500 miles/800 km of new vehicle operation.
Proper torque specifications are provided in this guide. Also
retighten to proper torque specification at 500 miles/800 km
after any wheel change or any other time the wheel lug nuts
have been loosened.
■ Use only the type of engine oil that Ford recommends. See
Engine oil recommendations in the Index. Do not use special
“break-in” oils.
5
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
*[IN07000(ALL)03/95]
Some vehicles are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module
that limits engine speeds with a cut-out mode to promote
durability.
*[IN07100(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07110(ALL)07/95]
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
*[IN07120(ALL)07/95]
Take similar precautions if your vehicle is exposed to chemical
industrial fallout.
*[IN07130(ALL)07/95]
Paint damage resulting from fallout is not related to a defect in
paint materials or workmanship and therefore is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual improvement
in customer satisfaction is a high priority. For this reason, Ford
has authorized its dealers to repair, at no charge to the owner,
the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by environmental fallout
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) of purchase,
whichever comes first. Customers may be required to bring their
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford representative.
*[IN07200(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07300(ALL)04/95]
Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
*[IN07400(ALL)06/95]
*[IN07500(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07600(ALL)04/95]
*[IN07700(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08100(ALL)04/95]
DO NOT:
%
%
Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage the paint,
especially in hot weather. Wash your vehicle as often as
necessary to keep it clean.
Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the underside, with
a mild detergent.
■ Wash your vehicle with hot water
■ Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct sunlight
■ Wash your vehicle while the body is hot
Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits and protect the
finish.
6
File:02uninx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 08:58:20 1996
Introductory Information
*[IN08200(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08300(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
*[IN08400(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08500(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning Plastic Parts
*[IN08600(ALL)04/95]
Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents or
petroleum-based cleaners.
%
%
%
*[IN08700(ALL)04/95]
*[IN08725(ALL)04/95]
Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild detergent. Do
not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, fuel or strong detergents.
Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are plastic. Clean with
a tar and road oil remover if necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for
routine cleaning.
If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove oversprayed
rustproofing with a tar and road oil remover. If rustproofing is
not removed from plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
Because your vehicle’s side mouldings are painted in lacquer, do
not use thinners or solvents to clean them.
7
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR00500(ALL)04/95]
*[SR00600(ALL)03/95]
Important Safety Belt Information
*[SR00700(ALL)08/95]
*[SR00800(ALL)08/95]
*[SR00900(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01000(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01100(ALL)08/95]
*[SR01200(ALL)08/95]
*[SR02050(ALL)07/95]
Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*[SR02100(ALL)07/95]
See the following sections in this chapter for directions on how
to properly use these safety belts. Also see Safety Restraints for
Children in this chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
%
%
*[SR02200(ALL)05/95]
The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and your
passengers in case of a collision. In most states and in Canada
the law requires their use.
■ the seatback is upright
■ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
■ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
■ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
■ the knees are straight forward
To help you remember to fasten your safety belt, a warning
light may come on and a chime may sound. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Chime in the Warning Lights and Gauges
chapter.
RWARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers wear safety
belts. Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
*[SR02500(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision.
9
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR02550(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Ford recommends that all safety belt assemblies and
attaching hardware should be inspected by a qualified
technician after any collision. Safety belt assemblies not
in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
*[SR02600(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,
children should always ride with the seatback upright.
*[SR02800(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never
swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never
use a single belt for more than one person or across more
than one seating position. Each seating position in your
vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made
up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be
used as a pair. Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury in a collision.
*[SR02900(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to lessen
the risk of the door coming open in a collision.
10
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR03000(ALL)05/95]
*[SR03200(ALL)12/95]
Combination Lap and Shoulder Belts
*[SR03400(ALL)05/95]
After you get into your vehicle, close the door and lock it. Then
adjust the seat to the position that suits you best.
*[SR03500(ALL)05/95]
Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from the retractor so
that the shoulder portion of the belt crosses your shoulder and
chest. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened
to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
%
While your vehicle is in motion, the combination lap and
shoulder belt adjusts to your movement. However, if you brake
hard, turn hard, or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locks and helps reduce
your forward movement.
[SR03510(ALL)02/96]
one third page
Fastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts
art:0001196-A
*[SR03511(ALL)07/95]
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Important Safety Belt
Information at the beginning of this chapter.
11
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR03512(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
Unfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts
art:0021301-A
*[SR03513(ALL)07/95]
While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its original position
to prevent it from striking you or the vehicle.
[SR03515( X)08/95]
Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passenger and Rear
Outboard Seating Positions
[SR03517( X)08/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking mode retractor on
the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front seat outboard passenger and rear outboard
passengers.
*[SR03518(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03519(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03520(ALL)10/95]
Dual locking mode retractors operate in two ways:
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will allow the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard
braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also be made to lock by
pulling the belt out quickly.
12
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR03521(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03522(ALL)08/95]
Automatic locking mode
*[SR03523(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03524(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03526( X)08/95]
■ A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.
%
In this operating mode, the shoulder belt retractor will be
automatically locked and will remain locked when the
combination lap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does not
allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides
the following:
■ Child safety seat installation.
RWARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be placed in the
front seats.
[SR03527( X)09/95]
RWARNING
This mode must be used when installing a child safety
seat on the front passenger seat and rear outboard seats
where dual locking retractors are provided.
*[SR03529(ALL)08/95]
To switch the retractor from the emergency locking mode to the
automatic locking mode, perform the following steps:
*[SR03530(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03531(ALL)09/95]
1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
*[SR03532(ALL)08/95]
3. A clicking sound will continue to be heard as the belt is
2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is extracted and, when allowed to retract,
a clicking sound is heard. At this time, the belt retractor is in
the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode).
allowed to retract. This indicates that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
13
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR03533(ALL)08/95]
NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled
and allowed to retract completely, the retractor will
switch to the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking
mode. See the detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
*[SR03534(ALL)08/95]
*[SR03535(ALL)08/95]
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
[SR03538( X)08/95]
The driver and right front passenger shoulder belt height is
adjustable to one of five (5) positions.
[SR03539( X)08/95]
To adjust the belt down, push the release button on the adjuster
down and slide the adjuster down. Then release the button and
make sure the adjuster is firmly in one of the five (5) positions.
To adjust the belt up, slide the adjuster up. (You do not have to
push the release button.) Slide it up or down until the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder.
%
Driver and right front passenger
*[SR03540(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Position the shoulder belt height adjuster so that the belt
rests across the middle of your shoulder. Be sure the
shoulder belt is properly positioned on your shoulder
each time you use the belt. If the shoulder belt is off
your shoulder, on your upper arm or neck, there is a
greater risk of severe injury in a collision.
[SR03550(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Be sure the belt is properly positioned on your
shoulder each time you use the belt.
14
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR03564( X)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
Adjusting shoulder belt height (2 door models)
art:0021248-B
[SR03566( X)11/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021249-C
Shoulder belt height adjuster — full down position (2 door models)
15
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR03568( X)07/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090168-B
Shoulder belt height adjuster — full up position
16
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR03570( X)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021283-A
*[SR03600(ALL)05/95]
Shoulder belt height adjuster — mid-way position (4 door models)
RWARNING
Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only.
Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never
swing it around the neck over the inside shoulder. Never
use a single belt for more than one person. Failure to
follow these precautions could increase the risk and/or
severity of injury in a collision.
*[SR03700(ALL)05/95]
To tighten the lap portion of the belt, pull up on the shoulder
belt until it fits you snugly. The belt should rest as low on your
hips as possible.
17
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR03800(ALL)06/95]
10-1/2 pica
Unfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts
art:0021301-A
[SR03900( X)05/91]
The rear seat shoulder safety belts have a feature which allows
the seat belt webbing to be stowed out of the way when the
rear seats are folded down (2 door only). To stow the belt while
the seat is folded, attach the plastic snap on the seat belt to the
metal mating part on the plastic trim panel. This will keep the
belt out of the way while the seats are folded. Once the rear
seats have been returned to their upright position, unsnap the
belt from the trim panel.
[SR04000( X)05/95]
RWARNING
The rear seat belt snap must be detached from the trim
panel prior to wearing the belt.
18
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR04100( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Rear combination lap and shoulder belts (2 door model)
art:0020663-C
[SR05800(ALL)08/94]
Center Front Lap Belt (If equipped)
[SR05900(ALL)10/90]
The lap belt in the center of the front seat does not adjust
automatically. You must adjust it to fit snugly around your
hips. Do not wear it around your waist.
*[SR05950(ALL)06/95]
To fasten the belt, pull the belt across your hips and insert the
tongue into the correct buckle on your seat until you hear a
snap and feel it lock. Make sure the buckle is securely fastened.
%
*[SR06100(ALL)06/95]
*[SR06400(ALL)06/95]
If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and tip the belt
tongue at a right angle to the belt. Pull the belt tongue over
your lap until it reaches the buckle.
If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose end of the
webbing until the belt fits snugly.
19
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR06500(ALL)10/90]
To unfasten the belt, push the release button on the buckle. This
allows the tongue to unlatch from the buckle.
[SR06600(ALL)06/95]
Because the center front lap belt does not have a retractor, it
should be shortened and fastened when not in use.
[SR06700(ALL)05/94]
10-1/2 pica
Fastening and unfastening the front center safety belt
art:0021123-A
*[SR06800(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible
around the hips, not around the waist.
20
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR07900(ALL)10/90]
Rear Lap Belt with Retractor
[SR08000(ALL)12/89]
Pull the belt out of the retractor with a steady motion and insert
the tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage.
[SR08100( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Fastening and unfastening the rear center safety belts (4-door model)
art:0020640-D
*[SR08500(ALL)05/95]
*[SR08600(ALL)08/95]
*[SR08700(ALL)03/95]
*[SR09600(ALL)08/95]
*[SR09700(ALL)07/95]
%
To Unfasten the Safety Belts with Retractors:
1. Push the release button on the buckle. This allows the
tongue to unlatch from the buckle.
2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to its stowed
position. If you do not guide the tongue, it may strike you
or part of the vehicle.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
For some people, the safety belt may be too short even when it
is fully extended. You can add about eight inches (20 cm) to the
belt length with a safety belt extension assembly (part number
611C22). Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from
your dealer.
21
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR09790(ALL)08/95]
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the
safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of
the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension
only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
*[SR09800(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow these instructions will affect the
performance of the safety belts and increase the risk of
personal injury.
*[SR09900(ALL)08/95]
*[SR10000(ALL)09/95]
Safety Belt Maintenance
[SR10020( X)06/95]
The short plastic boot on the front safety belt at the passenger
outboard anchor location covers an energy absorbing sew
pattern on the safety belt. In the event of an accident, the sew
pattern may release, and the colored label (REPLACE BELT)
may become visible. If this occurs, the safety belt must be
replaced.
%
Check the safety belt systems periodically to make sure that
they work properly and are not damaged.
22
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR10035(ALL)06/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0021286-B
Energy absorbing sew pattern
23
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR10040(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
FAILURE TO REPLACE THE SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLY
UNDER THE ABOVE CONDITIONS COULD RESULT
IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURIES IN THE EVENT OF
A COLLISION.
%
*[SR10200(ALL)10/95]
*[SR10250(ALL)06/95]
*[SR10275(ALL)06/95]
%
%
*[SR10300(ALL)06/95]
*[SR10800(ALL)05/95]
All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front
seat belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped),
child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and
attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. Ford
recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was
minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not
show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Cleaning the Safety Belts
Clean the safety belts with any mild soap solution that is
recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach
or dye the belt webbing because this may weaken it.
Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)
The driver and right front passenger air bags are Supplemental
Restraint Systems (SRS), provided at these seating positions in
addition to the lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly belted
occupants in moderate to severe frontal collisions. The
supplemental air bag system does not provide restraint to the
lower body.
24
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR10900(ALL)05/95]
*[SR11000(ALL)06/95]
%
The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts
RWARNING
Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle occupants to be
properly restrained and help reduce the risk of injury in
a collision.
*[SR11050(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should
always wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
Supplemental Restraint System is provided.
*[SR11100(ALL)01/95]
There are four very important reasons to use safety belts even
with an air bag system. Use your safety belts to:
*[SR11200(ALL)01/95]
■ help keep you in the proper position (away from the air bag)
*[SR11300(ALL)01/95]
■ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or rear impact
*[SR11350(ALL)01/95]
■ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions that are not
*[SR11400(ALL)01/95]
■ reduce the risk of being thrown from your vehicle
[SR11500(ALL)06/95]
when it inflates
collisions, because an air bag is not designed to inflate in
such situations
severe enough to activate the supplemental air bag
RWARNING
The right front passenger air bag is not designed to
restrain occupants in the center front seating position.
25
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR11600(ALL)01/95]
*[SR11700(ALL)05/95]
The Importance of Being Properly Seated
% [SR11800( X)05/95]
Important Information About the Right Front Passenger
Air Bag
[SR11900(ALL)05/95]
It is important for the front seat passengers’ safety that they
remain properly seated whenever the vehicle is moving. This
means that small children should be secured in appropriate
child safety seats or infant seats, and all other occupants should
sit upright, with their backs against the seatback, and restrained
by lap and shoulder belts. No passenger should sit toward the
front edge of the seat, or stand or lean near the air bag cover
(which is near the glove box).
*[SR12000( X)08/95]
RWARNING
%
In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely fast to help
provide additional protection for you. In order to do this, the
air bag must inflate with considerable force. If you are not
seated in a normal riding position with your back against the
seatback, the air bag may not protect you properly and could
possibly hurt you as it inflates.
If a passenger is not properly seated and restrained, an
inflating air bag could cause serious injury.
*[SR12100( X)07/95]
In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is closer to the air
bag. The force of the rapidly inflating air bag could push the
top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback or center
armrests (if so equipped), or center console (if so equipped).
REAR-FACING INFANT CARRIERS MUST ALWAYS BE
SECURED IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety seats
and infant seats should be secured in the rear seat whenever
possible.
26
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR12290( X)07/95]
%
*[SR12300( X)07/95]
Your vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger air bag.
Air bags deploy with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
Front passengers, especially children and small adults, must
never sit on the front edge of the seat, stand near the glove
compartment of the instrument panel, or lean over near the air
bag cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants should sit
with their backs against the seatback, move the seat to the most
rearward position if possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should use child or
infant seats.
RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats move the
passenger seat as far back from the instrument panel as
possible. NEVER SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT
SEATS IN THE FRONT SEAT.
*[SR12310( X)11/95]
*[SR12400( X)07/95]
The force of the rapidly inflating passenger air bag could push
the top of the rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,
armrests or console. Rear-facing infant seats must always be
secured in the rear seat.
RWARNING
Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the
air bag cover on the steering wheel or in front seat areas
that may come in contact with a deploying air bag.
Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
*[SR12500( X)08/95]
For additional important safety information on the proper use of
seat belts, child seats, and infant seats, please read the other
sections of this chapter of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats for Children.
27
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR12600( X)07/95]
%
*[SR12700(ALL)01/95]
For further information about the proper mounting of
equipment in the front seat of this vehicle, please refer to Ford’s
brochure entitled Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be obtained by calling
Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356. Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System
Operates
*[SR12800( X)06/95]
The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System consists of the
driver and passenger air bags, impact sensors, a system
diagnostic module, a readiness light and tone, and the electrical
wiring which connects the components.
[SR12900(ALL)06/95]
The driver air bag is in the center of the steering wheel. The
right front passenger seat air bag (if equipped) is in the upper
right hand section of the instrument panel ledge above the
glove compartment.
28
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR13000( X)08/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021130-B
The location of the air bag and warning labels
*[SR13010(ALL)07/95]
If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the severity of the impact
and activate the air bags if necessary. The air bag system is
designed to deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions more
severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of similar size and weight)
head-on at about 28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed, some frontal
collisions at speeds above 28 mph (45 km/h) will not inflate the
air bag.
*[SR13020(ALL)12/95]
When the sensors activate the system, the air bags inflate
rapidly, filling with non-toxic nitrogen gas in a fraction of a
second. Immediately after inflation, the air bags deflate by
releasing the nitrogen gas through vent holes. The whole
process takes place in a matter of seconds.
29
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR13030(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do
not touch them after inflation.
%
*[SR13050(ALL)05/95]
The air bag system uses a readiness light on the instrument
cluster and a tone to indicate the condition of the system. When
you turn the ignition key to the ON position, this light will
illuminate for approximately six (6) seconds and then turn off.
This indicates that the system is operating normally. NOTE:
Maintenance of the air bag system is not required.
*[SR13060(ALL)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0050087-A
Inflated driver-side air bag
30
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR13070(ALL)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0050088-A
*[SR13080(ALL)07/95]
Inflated passenger-side air bag
RWARNING
If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOT
FUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BE REPLACED
IMMEDIATELY. If the air bag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR13090(ALL)07/95]
To ensure that the air bag system will operate as intended in a
crash, the system is equipped with a diagnostic module, which
controls a readiness lamp and a warning tone. The diagnostic
module monitors its own circuits, the air bag electrical system,
the air bag readiness light, the air bag power, and the air bag
inflators.
31
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
%
*[SR13100(ALL)06/95]
A problem with the system is indicated by one or more of the
following:
*[SR13125(ALL)06/95]
*[SR13150(ALL)06/95]
*[SR13175(ALL)06/95]
■ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
[SR13225(ALL)08/95]
If any of these things happen, have the air bag system serviced
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the air bag supplemental restraint system may not
function properly in the event of a collision.
■ or it will not light immediately after ignition is turned on,
■ or a group of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will
repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
*[SR13300(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SR13680(ALL)07/95]
*[SR13700(ALL)06/95]
Disposal of supplemental air bag equipped vehicles
*[SR14300(ALL)05/95]
*[SR14400(ALL)02/95]
Safety Restraints for Children
%
%
For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped vehicles, see your
local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. Air bags MUST be
disposed of by qualified personnel.
In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law to use safety
restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle —
this generally includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less — you must
put them in safety seats that are made specially for children.
Safety belts alone do not provide maximum protection for these
children. Check your local and state laws for specific
requirements.
32
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR14500(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a collision.
*[SR14550(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
To prevent the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
*[SR14625( X)12/95]
RWARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
*[SR14630( X)09/95]
RWARNING
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
*[SR14635( X)09/95]
RWARNING
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
33
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR15000(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
*[SR15025(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.
%
*[SR15040( X)08/95]
Built-In Child Seat (If equipped)
[SR15045( X)07/95]
The rear seat may include an optional built-in child safety seat
(passenger side). Refer to Figures 1 and 2. This child restraint is
to be used only by children who are at least one year old,
weight between 20 and 60 pounds (9 and 27 kilograms) and
whose shoulders (top) are below the bottom of the headrest in
the full up position. If your child is less than one year old or
weighs less than 20 pounds (9 kilograms), always use a rear or
facing infant or child seat because a child of that size is not
sufficiently developed to withstand crash forces in a front facing
position.
[SR15050( X)10/94]
If your child is less than one year old but is too big for an
infant seat, use a convertible child safety seat placed in the rear
facing mode.
34
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15060( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090171-B
Figure 1: Built-in child safety seat in the closed position
35
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15065( X)05/95]
24 pica art:0090172-A
Figure 2: Built-in child safety seat in the open position
*[SR15070( X)08/95]
Children must be properly buckled before riding in the vehicle.
It is the law in every state and province. This child seat
conforms to all Federal/Canadian motor vehicle safety
standards.
[SR15075( X)10/94]
Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness belts
for correct placement and tightness. Use only if the harness belts
can be pulled snug and will stay snug. If belts do not stay snug,
return to dealer for repair.
36
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR15080( X)12/95]
Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided with
this child seat snugly around your child.
*[SR15085( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.
*[SR15090( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
*[SR15095( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of this
child restraint system can result in your child striking the
vehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.
[SR15100( X)08/94]
How to Use Built-In Child Safety Seat
[SR15105( X)08/94]
Read the following procedures and all of the labels on the
Built-In Child Seat before using the seat. Refer to Figures 1
through 14.
[SR15110( X)06/95]
RWARNING
Never use the Built-In Child Seat as a booster cushion
with the adult lap belt. The five-point belt harness of the
Built-In Seat provides much more secure restraint than a
lap belt. Children who are the proper size to use the
Built-In Child Seat should use the five-point belts.
Children who sit in the right rear seat but are too large
to use the Built-In Child Seat should use the lap/shoulder
belt, but should sit on the seat cushion rather than on the
built-in seat.
37
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15120( X)10/94]
1. To release the head restraint, grasp the pull strap and pull
toward you (approximately one inch), which will allow you
to insert your hand at the bottom of the head restraint, as
shown in Figure 3.
[SR15125( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090173-A
Figure 3: Releasing the child safety seat head restraint
38
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15130( X)08/94]
2. Release strap and slide the head restraint to the full up
position. Refer to Figure 4.
[SR15135( X)05/95]
24 pica art:0090174-A
Figure 4: Positioning child safety seat head restraint and release of child seat
cushion
[SR15140( X)08/94]
3. Pull both velcro straps to release the child seat cushion.
Refer to Figure 4.
39
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15145( X)06/95]
4. Lower the child seat cushion onto the adult seat cushion.
Read the information and warnings carefully on the child
seat cushion protector flap and shoulder safety belt. Check
the child’s size, weight and age to be sure that the child is
not too small or too large for the seat. Refer to Figure 5.
[SR15150( X)10/94]
24 pica art:0021291-A
Figure 5: Child seat information and warnings
40
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15160( X)08/94]
5. Unfold cushion protector flap onto adult seat cushion. Refer
to Figures 5 and 6.
[SR15165( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090175-A
Figure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child
41
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15170( X)06/95]
6. Place child on the child seat cushion. Then position the right
shoulder belt over the child’s shoulder as shown in Figure 6.
Insert the right safety belt tongue into the single opening of
the crotch safety belt buckle as shown in Figure 7.
[SR15175( X)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090177-A
[SR15180( X)09/95]
Figure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt
NOTE: Read the following steps carefully to become familiar
with the color indicator windows located on each
safety belt tongue and the chest clip. When either of
the tongues or the chest clip is unfastened, the color
red appears. When the tongues and/or the chest clips
are properly fastened, the color green appears.
42
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15185( X)06/95]
7. Position the left shoulder belt over the child’s shoulder and
insert the left tongue into the buckle as shown in Figure 8.
The color green must appear in the color indicator window
on each buckled tongue.
[SR15187( X)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090176-A
Figure 8: Fastening the crotch safety belt
43
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15189( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090178-A
[SR15190( X)08/94]
Figure 9: Fastening the chest clip
8. Pull on both safety belt tongues to be sure that both tongues
are latched.
*[SR15195( X)08/95]
RWARNING
If both tongues do not latch in the buckle, do not use the
child seat. See your dealer for repairs.
44
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15200( X)10/94]
9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip below the child’s
shoulders and adjust the clip (up or down) to comfortably
hold the shoulder belts in place on the child’s chest. The
indicator on the chest clip will show green when the clip is
latched. (The purpose of this clip is to position the shoulder
belts correctly on the child’s shoulders.) The clip can be
easily pulled apart and is designed to pull apart during a
collision. The clip will help keep the shoulder belts on the
shoulders of a sleeping or squirming child. Refer to Figures
10 and 11.
[SR15205( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090179-A
Figure 10
45
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15210( X)05/95]
24 pica art:0090180-A
Figure 11: Fastening the chest clip
46
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15220( X)10/94]
10. Tug on the crotch safety belt buckle and the chest clip to
ensure they are properly fastened. Refer to Figure 12.
[SR15225( X)06/95]
24 pica art:0090183-B
Figure 12: Securing the chest clip
47
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR15230( X)06/95]
11. If the child is sleeping or tries to get out of the child seat,
pull shoulder belts fully out to put the retractor into the lock
mode. At this time, the shoulder belts are in an automatic
lock mode. Allow belts to tighten snugly against the child’s
shoulders. The belt will automatically lock and cannot be
pulled out. Refer to Figure 13.
[SR15232( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090181-A
Figure 13: Checking for properly fastened chest clip and safety belts
48
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR15240( X)08/94]
12. When properly used, the child safety seat should look like
Figure 14.
[SR15245( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090182-A
Figure 14: Built-in child seat properly being used
[SR15246( X)08/95]
Built-In Child Seat Belt Retractors
[SR15247( X)10/94]
The belts on the Built-In Child Seat are equipped with a dual
locking mode retractor. The child seat belts can be used with
the retractor in either the emergency locking mode or the
automatic mode. In the emergency locking mode, the retractor
allows freedom of movement, locking only on hard braking,
hard cornering, or collisions. In the automatic locking mode, the
retractor will remain locked and does not allow the child
freedom of movement.
*[SR15248( X)06/95]
The retractor will switch from the emergency locking mode to
the automatic locking mode when the shoulder belts are pulled
all the way out. The retractor will switch back to emergency
49
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
locking mode when the belts are unbuckled and the shoulder
belts retract completely.
*[SR15249( X)04/95]
The automatic locking mode must be used to hold small
children in position, particularly sleeping children and those
who may try to squirm out of the belts. The emergency locking
mode is also used while buckling the belts.
[SR15250( X)10/94]
Frequently check the child seat’s lap and shoulder harness belts
for correct placement and tightness. Use the child seat only if
the harness belts will stay snug when belts are placed into the
lock mode with a child in the seat. If not, take the child seat to
the dealer for repair.
*[SR15251( X)12/95]
Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness belts provided with
this child seat snugly around your child.
*[SR15252( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your vehicle.
*[SR15253( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
*[SR15254( X)08/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow all of the instructions on the use of this
child restraint system can result in your child striking the
vehicle’s interior during a sudden stop or crash.
50
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR15257( X)08/95]
To remove the child from the built-in child seat:
[SR15258( X)10/94]
1. Open the chest clip. Refer back to Figure 9.
[SR15260( X)08/94]
2. Press release button on the crotch safety buckle. Refer back
to Figure 8.
[SR15265( X)08/94]
3. Slide the shoulder safety belts off the child’s shoulders and
remove the child from the seat. Refer to Figure 6.
[SR15270( X)01/95]
To fold up the built-in child safety seat:
[SR15271( X)06/95]
Make sure belts have fully retracted to the stowed position
before stowing the child safety seat.
[SR15273( X)02/96]
NOTE: The seatback cannot be folded down unless the child
safety seat is fully stowed.
[SR15275( X)08/94]
1. Fold the protector flap over the child’s seat cushion. Refer to
Figure 5.
[SR15280( X)08/94]
2. Rotate the child seat cushion upward, securing both velcro
straps. Refer to Figure 4.
[SR15285( X)08/94]
3. Slide the head restraint down until it is flush with the top of
the adult seatback. Refer to Figure 4.
[SR15290( X)09/95]
NOTE: When the child’s safety seat is not in use, it may be
folded up so that an adult may use the vehicle’s rear
seat. Refer to Figure 1.
51
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR15295( X)08/95]
Inspection after a collision
[SR15297( X)10/94]
RWARNING
All built-in child restraints, including seats, buckles,
retractors, seat latches, interlocks, and attaching hardware
should be inspected by a qualified dealer technician after
any collision. If the child seat was in use during a
collision, Ford recommends replacing it. However, if the
collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the child restraints do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Built-In Child Seats not in use during a collision should
also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
%
*[SR15300( X)08/95]
Cleaning
[SR15302( X)01/95]
Your built-in child seat may be cleaned with mild soap and
water. Do not use household cleaners as they may weaken the
webbing or damage the plastic parts. For your convenience, the
liner is made to be machine washable and air dried (do not use
heat).
*[SR15305( X)08/95]
*[SR15307( X)05/95]
Built-in child seat maintenance
*[SR15900(ALL)01/95]
*[SR16000(ALL)05/95]
Safety Seats for Children
*[SR16015(ALL)08/95]
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top
tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position
which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more
%
Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder belts system of your
child seat. See your Ford Dealer if the shoulder belt webbing is
frayed, or if the buckle and tongue are damaged and/or do not
function properly.
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight
of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s
instructions when installing and using the safety seat.
52
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
information on top tether straps see Attaching Safety Seats With
Tether Straps in this chapter.
*[SR16025(ALL)08/95]
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct
safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap
belt combination with a sliding tongue, make sure the retractor
is in the automatic locking mode.
*[SR16090(ALL)07/95]
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
*[SR16100(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child
occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or
sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
*[SR16140( X)06/95]
%
*[SR16150( X)05/95]
Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) should use child or
infant seats. Forward facing child seats must have the passenger
seat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible.
RWARNING
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE
USED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACING INFANT
SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR
SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
serious injury.
*[SR16200(ALL)02/96]
RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If
you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the
child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
53
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR16250(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Seatbacks should be upright for use with child safety
seats.
*[SR16275(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward
and away from the child seat, with the tongue between
the child seat and the release button as shown in the
following illustration.
[SR16280(ALL)06/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011286-A
54
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR16290( X)02/96]
Safety Seats for Children
[SR16300( X)02/96]
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight
of the child. Always follow the safety seat manufacturer’s
instructions when installing and using a safety seat.
*[SR16310(ALL)02/96]
When possible, put children in the rear seat of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions.
[SR16320( X)02/96]
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top
tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position
which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SR16330( X)02/93]
When installing a child safety seat, be sure to use the correct
safety belt buckle for that seating position, and make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
[SR16340( X)02/96]
Children weighing less than 40 lb. (18 kg) should use child or
infant seats. Forward facing child seats must have the passenger
seat moved as far back from the instrument panel as possible.
[SR16350( X)02/96]
RWARNING
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE
PLACED IN THE FRONT SEAT. REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE
REAR SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in serious injury.
[SR16360( X)02/96]
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or by the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
55
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR16370( X)02/96]
RWARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety seat, the child
occupying the seat may be injured during a collision or
sudden stop. An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
[SR16380( X)02/09]
RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions
included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If
you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the
child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
[SR16390( X)02/96]
RWARNING
Always keep the buckle release button pointing upward
and away from the child seat, with the tongue button
between the child seat and the release button as shown
in the following illustration.
56
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR16400( X)02/96]
[SR16410( X)02/96]
Installing Safety Seats in Combination Lap and
Shoulder Belt Seating Positions
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination
lap and shoulder belt.
[SR16420( X)02/96]
[SR16430( X)02/96]
If you choose to install a child safety seat in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder
belt and lap belt together.
[SR16440( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011238-B
Pulling out belt webbing
57
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together,
route the tongue through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt
webbing is not twisted.
[SR16450( X)02/96]
[SR16460( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011239-B
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
58
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR16470( X)02/96]
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for that seating
position until you hear and feel the latch engage. Make sure
the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.
[SR16480( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011240-B
Buckling the belt
59
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR16490( X)02/96]
5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard to put
the retractor in the automatic locking mode.
[SR16500( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011241-A
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
60
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR16510( X)02/96]
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
[SR16520( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011242-A
Allowing shoulder belt to retract
61
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
[SR16530( X)02/96]
7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the
buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down
on the child seat.
[SR16540( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011243-A
[SR16550( X)02/96]
Removing slack from the belt
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the
belt.
[SR16560( X)02/96]
9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat
forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in
place.
62
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
[SR16570( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0011244-A
[SR16580( X)02/96]
Checking that the seat is secure
10. Try to pull belt out of the retractor to make sure the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked,
unbuckle the belt and repeat steps 2 through 9.
[SR16590( X)02/96]
To remove the retractor from automatic locking mode, allow
webbing to retract fully to its stowed position and the
retractor will automatically switch back to the vehicle
sensitive locking mode for normal adult usage.
63
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
*[SR18400(ALL)06/95]
*[SR18410(ALL)06/95]
*[SR18413(ALL)06/95]
Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps
*[SR18417( X)06/95]
You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket to the rear floor by
using a tether anchor kit (613D74), available at no charge from
any Ford dealership.
[SR18420(ALL)09/95]
Read and follow the instructions provided with the kit carefully,
for installation of the child tether strap anchor.
[SR18501(ALL)09/95]
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to attach the
tether strap to the tether bracket.
*[SR18700( X)06/95]
Ford recommends placement of tethered safety seats in a rear
seating position with the tether strap installed to the tether
anchoring point as shown in the instructions provided with the
child tether strap anchor kit.
%
General Instructions
Some manufacturers make safety seats that include a tether
strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to
an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap
as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of your child safety
seat for information about ordering a tether strap.
*[SR18950(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Only use the tether attachment hole locations shown in
the illustrations. The tether anchor may not perform
properly if the wrong mounting location is used.
*[SR19400( X)06/95]
The rear lap/shoulder safety belts should not be used to secure
the tether strap of a safety seat located in the front seat.
64
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
Safety Restraints
*[SR19700(ALL)07/95]
*[SR19800(ALL)07/95]
%
*[SR19900(ALL)07/95]
Safety Belts for Children
Children who are too large for child safety seats should always
wear safety belts. (See instructions with your child seat, or
contact its manufacturer, to determine maximum size of child
that will safely fit in the seat.)
RWARNING
If safety belts are not properly worn and adjusted as
described, the risk of serious injury to the child in a
collision will be much greater.
*[SR20000(ALL)12/95]
If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap and shoulder belts
can be positioned so that it does not cross or rest in front of the
child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder
belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may
help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
*[SR20050(ALL)07/95]
To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford recommends use of a
belt-positioning booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards. Belt-positioning booster
seats raise the child and provide a shorter, firmer seating
cushion that encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A belt-positioning booster
should be used if the shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s
face or neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on both
65
File:03unsrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:02:31 1996
thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let the child sit all the
way back on the seat cushion when the lower legs hang over
the edge of the seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your pediatrician.
*[SR20200(ALL)07/95]
Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and shoulder belts
should always be worn snugly and below the hips, touching the
child’s thighs.
*[SR20300(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,
children should always ride with the seatback upright.
66
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST01700(ALL)03/95]
% [ST01800(ALL)01/95]
*
Ignition
Understanding the Positions of the Ignition
[ST02000(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021143-A
The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder.
%
*[ST02201(ALL)07/95]
ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’s electrical accessories
such as the radio and the windshield wipers to operate while
the engine is not running.
*[ST02301(ALL)01/95]
In order to turn the key from the ON or OFF position to the
ACCESSORY position, you must push the key release button if
your vehicle’s manual transmission gearshift is mounted on the
floor.
*[ST02401(ALL)08/95]
*[ST02501(ALL)05/95]
LOCK locks the steering wheel and gearshift lever.
RWARNING
Turn the key to LOCK whenever you leave your vehicle.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that
the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). Never
leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.
*[ST02651(ALL)01/95]
LOCK is the only position that allows you to remove the key.
The LOCK feature helps to protect your vehicle from theft.
*[ST02701(ALL)05/95]
If your key is stuck in the LOCK position and will not turn,
move your steering wheel left or right until the key turns freely.
67
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
*[ST02801(ALL)03/95]
OFF allows you to shut off the engine and all accessories
without locking the steering wheel or the automatic
transmission gearshift lever.
*[ST02901(ALL)05/95]
ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warning lights (except the
brake system warning light) to make sure they work before you
start the engine. The key returns to the ON position once the
engine is started and remains in this position while the engine
runs.
*[ST02951(ALL)03/95]
START cranks the engine. Release the key once the engine starts
so that you do not damage the starter. The key should return to
ON when you release it. The START position also allows you to
test the brake warning light.
*[ST03025(ALL)08/95]
*[ST03050(ALL)08/95]
Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime
*[ST03076(ALL)02/95]
*[ST03100(ALL)08/95]
Removing the Key From the Ignition
[ST03117(ALL)05/91]
If you have a manual transmission, you have a key release lever
which allows you to remove your key from the ignition. The
key release lever is on the upper right of the steering column,
just above the key lock cylinder.
*[ST03300(ALL)08/95]
If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on the
column:
%
%
*[ST03400(ALL)06/95]
*[ST03500(ALL)03/91]
The buzzer or chime will sound if you open the driver’s door
while the key is in the ignition. Never leave your vehicle
unattended with the key in the ignition.
Procedures for removing your key from the ignition will vary,
depending on the type of gearshift your vehicle has. Gearshift
levers may be mounted on the steering column or on the floor
or console.
1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).
2. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot from
the service brake. (This will avoid “binding” or “loading” the
park gear if you park on a grade.)
68
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST03600(ALL)03/95]
*[ST03700(ALL)03/95]
*[ST03800(ALL)05/95]
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key.
If your vehicle’s gearshift lever is mounted on the
floor:
*[ST03950(ALL)05/95]
*[ST04000(ALL)05/95]
*[ST04100(ALL)05/95]
1. Put the gearshift in 1 (First).
*[ST04200(ALL)05/95]
*[ST04300(ALL)05/95]
*[ST04400(ALL)05/95]
*[ST04600(ALL)05/95]
4. Push and hold in the key release button.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake fully before removing your foot from
the service brake.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
6. Remove the key.
RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that
the gearshift is latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).
*[ST04750(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets alone in
your vehicle. They could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle.
Further, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause
severe and possibly fatal injuries to people as well as
animals.
69
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
*[ST04800(ALL)03/95]
*[ST04900(ALL)03/95]
Fuel-Injected Engines
*[ST04950(ALL)03/95]
% [ST05200(ALL)05/94]
*
*[ST05300(ALL)09/95]
Starting Your Vehicle
%
When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most important thing
to remember is to avoid pressing down on the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you
have problems getting your vehicle started. See Starting Your
Engine in this chapter for details about when to use the
accelerator while you start your vehicle.
Preparing to Start Your Vehicle
RWARNING
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or other
enclosed area. Never sit in a stopped vehicle for more
than a short period of time with the engine running.
Exhaust fumes are toxic. See Guarding Against Exhaust
Fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
*[ST05400(ALL)01/95]
*[ST05500(ALL)08/95]
Before you start your vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure all occupants in the vehicle buckle their safety
belts. See Safety Restraints in the Index for more details.
*[ST05600(ALL)03/95]
2. Make sure the headlamps and other accessories are turned
*[ST05700(ALL)10/94]
3. If you have an automatic transmission, make sure that the
*[ST05800(ALL)03/91]
4. If you have a manual transmission, make sure that the
off when starting.
gearshift lever is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set
before you turn the key.
parking brake is fully set, push the clutch pedal to the floor,
and put the gearshift into Neutral before you turn the key.
(Remember, the starter will operate only if the clutch pedal
is pushed in all the way).
70
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST06000(ALL)03/95]
Before you start your vehicle, you should test the warning lights
on the instrument panel to make sure that they work. Refer to
the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.
*[ST06200(ALL)02/95]
*[ST06300(ALL)06/95]
*[ST06400(ALL)05/95]
Starting Your Engine
%
To start your engine:
1. Follow the steps under Preparing to Start Your Vehicle at the
beginning of this section.
*[ST06425(ALL)03/95]
*[ST06451(ALL)06/95]
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
*[ST06475(ALL)02/95]
4. Turn the key to the START position (cranking) until the
*[ST06501(ALL)02/95]
3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when starting your
engine. DO NOT use the accelerator while the vehicle is
parked.
engine starts. Allow the key to return to the ON position
after the engine has started.
If you have difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering
wheel slightly because it may be binding.
*[ST06510(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06515(ALL)06/95]
For a cold engine:
*[ST06520(ALL)04/95]
■ At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If the engine does not
%
■ At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: If the engine does
not start in fifteen (15) seconds on the first try, turn the key
to OFF, wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not
flood the engine, then try again.
start in five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,
wait approximately ten (10) seconds so you do not flood the
engine, then try again.
71
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
*[ST06521(ALL)05/95]
*[ST06522(ALL)04/95]
For a warm engine:
*[ST06575(ALL)08/95]
Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
*[ST06601(ALL)09/95]
After starting, allow the engine to idle for a few seconds before
driving away.
*[ST06775(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06825(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06851(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06876(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06900(ALL)04/95]
*[ST06925(ALL)04/95]
If the engine does not start after two attempts:
*[ST06951(ALL)04/95]
If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump shut-off switch
may have been triggered. For directions on how to reset the
switch see Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.
%
%
%
*[ST07300(ALL)10/95]
*[ST07390(ALL)07/95]
■ Do not hold the key in the START position for more than
five (5) seconds at a time. If the engine does not start within
five (5) seconds on the first try, turn the key to the OFF
position. Wait a few seconds after the starter stops, then try
again.
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floor and hold it.
3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.
4. Release the ignition key when the engine starts.
5. Release the accelerator gradually as the engine speeds up.
Then drive away in the normal manner.
A computer system controls the engine’s idle speed. When you
start your vehicle, the engine’s idle speed normally runs high.
These faster engine speeds will make your vehicle coast slightly
faster than its normal idle speed. It should, however, slow down
after a short time. If it does not, have the idle speed checked.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, do
not allow your vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes. Have
the vehicle checked.
72
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST07400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very
high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
*[ST07450(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or
other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
*[ST07500(ALL)03/95]
If you consistently start your vehicle in subzero temperatures,
use an engine block heater (if your vehicle has this option).
*[ST07600(ALL)06/95]
*[ST07700(ALL)03/95]
Engine Block Heater (If equipped)
%
*[ST08000(ALL)05/95]
Engine block heaters are strongly recommended if you live in a
region where temperatures reach s20˚F (s29˚C) or below
consistently during the winter months. An engine block heater
warms the engine coolant, which improves starting, warms up
the engine faster, and allows the heater-defrost system to
respond quickly.
RWARNING
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
*[ST08100(ALL)03/95]
For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before
you start your vehicle. Using the heater for longer than three
hours will not damage the engine, so you can plug it in at night
to start your vehicle the following morning.
*[ST08150(ALL)12/91]
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine block heater before
driving your vehicle.
73
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
%
*[ST08175(ALL)03/95]
If the Engine Cranks but Does Not Start or
Does Not Start After a Collision
*[ST08200(ALL)07/95]
*[ST08210(ALL)10/95]
The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
*[ST08215(ALL)03/95]
Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you must reset the switch
by hand before you can start your vehicle.
If the engine cranks but does not start or does not start after a
collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been
triggered. The shut-off switch is a device intended to stop the
fuel pump when your vehicle has been involved in a major jolt.
[ST08225(ALL)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
Fuel pump shut-off switch location
art:0090157-A
*[ST08250(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you see or smell fuel, do not reset the switch or try to
start your vehicle. Have all the passengers get out of the
vehicle and call the local fire department or a towing
service.
74
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST08275(ALL)10/95]
If your engine cranks but does not start after a collision or
major jolt:
*[ST08290(ALL)03/95]
*[ST08300(ALL)03/95]
*[ST08325(ALL)03/95]
1. Turn the key in the ignition to OFF.
*[ST08350(ALL)01/95]
4. Turn the ignition key ON for a few seconds, then turn it
*[ST08375(ALL)03/95]
5. Check under the vehicle again for leaking fuel. If you see or
*[ST08400(ALL)03/95]
6. Check all vehicle warning lights before driving your vehicle.
2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the red reset button
down. If the button is already set, you may have a different
mechanical problem.
OFF.
smell fuel, do not start your vehicle again. If you do not
see or smell fuel, you can try to start your vehicle again.
[ST08450(ALL)01/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0021144-A
Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch
75
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
*[ST09300(ALL)05/95]
*[ST09400(ALL)02/95]
%
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
Carbon monoxide, although colorless and odorless, is present in
exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
*[ST09500(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Never let your vehicle idle in an enclosed area, and do
not sit in a parked vehicle, (with the engine running) for
more than a short period of time. Exhaust fumes,
particularly carbon monoxide, might build up. These
fumes are harmful and could kill you.
*[ST09600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
*[ST09900(ALL)01/95]
Have the exhaust and body ventilation systems checked
whenever:
*[ST10000(ALL)02/95]
*[ST10100(ALL)02/95]
*[ST10200(ALL)01/95]
■ your vehicle is raised for service
■ the sound of the exhaust system changes
■ your vehicle has been damaged in a collision
76
File:04unstx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:22:05 1996
Starting Your Explorer
*[ST10300(ALL)01/95]
Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inlet vents clear of
snow, leaves, and other debris.
*[ST10400(ALL)08/95]
If the engine is idling while you are stopped in an open area
for long periods of time, open the windows at least one inch
(2.5 cm). Also, adjust the heating or air conditioning system to
bring in outside air.
[ST10650(ALL)03/95]
■ HEATING — Set fan speed to medium or high, the function
control knob on any position except OFF and the
temperature control knob on any desired position.
[ST10700(ALL)03/95]
■ AIR CONDITIONING — Set fan speed to medium or high
with the function control knob on any position (except OFF
or MAX A/C) and the temperature control knob at a
comfortable level.
77
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
%
*[LG00400(ALL)01/95]
[LG00550( X)11/89]
The instrument panel (dashboard) on your vehicle is divided
into several different sections. The illustrations on the following
pages show the major parts of the instrument panel that are
described in this chapter. Some items shown may not be on all
vehicles.
In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges are grouped
together on the instrument panel. We call this grouping a
cluster. Your vehicle has a mechanical cluster with tachometer.
79
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
[LG02600(ALL)12/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0090107-C
Mechanical cluster with tachometer
80
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG03000(ALL)06/94]
*[LG03100(ALL)06/93]
The Mechanical Cluster
*[LG03200(ALL)06/95]
*[LG03300(ALL)03/95]
Brake System Warning Light
*[LG03400(ALL)05/94]
This light comes on when you turn the ignition key to START
to verify that the indicator bulb is working. If the light stays on
or comes on after you have released the parking brake fully,
have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
*[LG03500(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
%
%
The following warning lights and gauges are on the mechanical
cluster. All of the warning lights and gauges alert you to
possible problems with your vehicle. Some of the lights listed
are optional. The following sections detail what each of these
indicators means.
The warning light for the brakes can show two things — that
the parking brake is not fully released, or that the brake fluid
level is low in the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes may not be
working properly. Have the brakes checked immediately.
[LG03600(ALL)04/94]
6 pica art:0021145-A
Brake warning light symbols
81
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG03800(ALL)02/95]
Anti-lock Brake Warning Light
[LG03925(ALL)03/95]
To check the ABS brake warning light, turn the ignition key to
ON. The ABS brake warning light should glow momentarily.
[LG04050(ALL)06/94]
6 pica art:0021146-A
Anti-lock warning light symbol
*[LG04100(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning light remains on or
comes on while driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
*[LG04110(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock system, and the brake
warning light is not lit, the anti-lock system is
disabled but normal brake function remains
operational.
*[LG04150(ALL)07/95]
*[LG04301(ALL)08/95]
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
[LG04325(ALL)03/95]
■ If the safety belt is not buckled when the key is turned to
%
The safety belt warning light/chime reminds you to fasten your
safety belt. One of the following will take place:
the ON position, the light comes on for 60 seconds and the
chime sounds for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG04351(ALL)02/95]
■ If the safety belt is buckled while the light is on and the
[LG04355(ALL)03/95]
■ If safety belt is buckled before the key is turned to the ON
chime is sounding, both the light and chime turn off.
position, both the light and the chime will not turn on.
82
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG04400(ALL)08/94]
6 pica art:0021148-B
Safety belt warning light symbol
%
*[LG04420(ALL)01/95]
[LG04430(ALL)06/95]
Air Bag Readiness Light
This light illuminates for approximately six seconds when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position to verify that the
indicator bulb is working and the air bag system is operating
normally.
[LG04435(ALL)04/95]
RWARNING
A problem with the air bag system is indicated by one or
more of the following: the readiness light will either
flash or stay lit, or it will not light, or a group of five
beeps will be heard.
*[LG04437(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have
the air bag system serviced at your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately.
[LG04440(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021268-A
Air bag readiness light symbol
83
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
[LG04450(ALL)10/94]
Door Ajar Warning Light (If equipped)
*[LG04460(ALL)08/94]
If the ignition switch is in the ON position and any door or the
liftgate is not completely closed, the light will illuminate.
[LG04480(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021269-A
Door ajar warning light symbol
*[LG04500(ALL)03/95]
*[LG04600(ALL)05/95]
Check Engine Warning Light
*[LG04650(ALL)05/95]
Modification or additions to the vehicle may cause incorrect
operation of the OBD II system. Additions such as burglar
alarms, cellular phones, and CB radios must be carefully
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping into or running
wires close to powertrain control system wires or components.
[LG04675(ALL)02/95]
The light comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to
the ON position, but it should turn off when the engine cranks.
If the light does not come on when you turn the ignition to the
ON position or if it comes on and stays on when you are
driving, have your vehicle serviced as soon as conveniently
possible. This indicates a possible problem with one of the
engine’s emission control systems. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed in.
%
The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II) system consists
of the hardware and software necessary to monitor the
operation of the powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain control system
during normal operation. If an emission problem is detected, the
Check Engine Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.
84
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG04680(ALL)05/95]
If the light turns on and off at one (1) second intervals while
you are driving the vehicle, it means that the engine is
misfiring. If this condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle serviced at the
first opportunity. You do not need to have your vehicle towed
in.
*[LG04685(ALL)05/95]
If the light turns on and off on rare occasions while you are
driving, it means that a malfunction occurred and the condition
corrected itself.
*[LG04695(ALL)05/95]
On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine Warning Light
will turn off as soon as the engine begins to crank. It is not
necessary to have the engine serviced.
[LG04720(ALL)03/95]
Under certain conditions, the Check Engine Warning Light may
come on if the fuel cap is not properly installed. If the light
comes on and you suspect the fuel cap is not properly installed,
pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the
engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap, making sure it is
properly seated.
[LG04750(ALL)03/95]
After completing the three consecutive warm-up cycles and on
the fourth engine start-up, the Check Engine Warning Light
should turn off. If the light does not go off after the fourth
engine restart, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer or a
qualified technician.
[LG05300(ALL)04/94]
6 pica art:0021149-A
Check engine warning light symbol
85
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
%
*[LG05835(ALL)10/94]
Overdrive Off Indicator (If equipped)
[LG05850(ALL)05/95]
This light tells you that the Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
on the gearshift lever has been pushed. When the light is on,
the transmission does not shift into overdrive. Depressing the
button on the shifter once more returns the vehicle to overdrive
mode. The transmission will be in the overdrive mode when the
vehicle is started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected when
the vehicle was last shut off.
*[LG05855(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: If the light does not come on when the TCS is
depressed or if the light flashes when you are driving,
have your vehicle serviced at the first opportunity. If
this condition persists, damage could occur to the
transmission.
[LG05865(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0021226-B
Overdrive off light (if equipped)
[LG05870( X)03/95]
Speed Control Light (If equipped)
*[LG05875( X)07/95]
This light comes on when you turn on the speed control system
and set the speed. The light will be on whenever the speed
control is set, even if you override the set speed by pressing the
accelerator pedal or by pressing the coast button. The light will
go off when the brakes are used or the speed control system is
turned off.
[LG05885( X)07/95]
This light does not indicate any problems with the speed control
system, but is only a convenience to tell you when the speed
control system is active and ready to maintain a set speed.
86
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG05890( X)03/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090108-A
Speed control light
*[LG05900(ALL)01/95]
*[LG06000(ALL)03/95]
%
Charging System Light
This light, shown as a battery symbol on your cluster, indicates
that your battery is not being charged and that you need to
have the electrical system checked.
[LG06050(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0021150-B
Charging system light symbol
*[LG06100(ALL)07/95]
This light comes on every time you turn the ignition to the ON
or START position (engine off). The light should go off when
the engine starts and the alternator begins to charge.
*[LG06300(ALL)01/95]
If the light stays on or comes on when the engine is running,
have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
87
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
%
*[LG06310( X)04/95]
[LG06335(ALL)04/95]
Anti-Theft Alarm Light (If equipped)
This light flashes on and off when the ignition switch is OFF
and any door is opened. As soon as you lock the doors, the
light glows steadily. Within 30 seconds of closing all the doors,
the light flashes intermittently (every 2 seconds). This indicates
that the alarm system is armed.
[LG06345( X)10/94]
6 pica art:0021151-A
Anti-theft alarm light
[LG06350(ALL)10/94]
Check Gage Light (If equipped)
*[LG06355(ALL)06/94]
This light will come on when the key is in the ON position and
the:
■ engine coolant temperature is high
■ engine oil pressure is low
■ fuel level is near empty
[LG06360(ALL)06/94]
[LG06365(ALL)06/94]
[LG06370(ALL)06/94]
[LG06375(ALL)06/94]
This light serves as a notice that a system needs your attention
and to check the engine coolant temperature gauge, the engine
oil pressure gauge, and the fuel level gauge.
[LG06380(ALL)03/95]
Please see Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge, Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge, or Fuel Gauge in this chapter for more information.
[LG06385(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0021250-B
Check gage light
88
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG06390(ALL)03/95]
Fuel Reset Light (If Equipped)
[LG06393(ALL)01/95]
Your vehicle may have a fuel reset light. The fuel reset light
will come on when you turn the ignition key to ON and the
fuel pump shut-off switch has been triggered. Refer to Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Index to find additional information.
[LG06395(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0021372-A
Fuel reset light
*[LG06400(ALL)05/94]
*[LG06601(ALL)05/94]
Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter)
*[LG06701(ALL)05/95]
If the battery is operating under cold weather conditions, the
pointer may indicate in the upper range of the NORMAL band
while the battery is charging. If you are running electrical
accessories with the engine off or idling at a low speed, or the
battery is not fully charged, the pointer may move toward the
lower end of the NORMAL band.
*[LG06750(ALL)05/94]
If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your vehicle’s
electrical system checked as soon as it is safely possible.
%
This gauge shows you the battery voltage when the ignition key
is in the ON position.
[LG06850(ALL)07/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0020539-H
Battery voltage gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer
89
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG07500(ALL)05/94]
*[LG07601(ALL)06/93]
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
*[LG07701(ALL)03/95]
*[LG07801(ALL)03/95]
*[LG07901(ALL)03/95]
If you lose engine oil pressure:
%
This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure, not the oil level.
However, if your engine’s oil level is low, it could affect the oil
pressure. With the engine running, the pointer should move into
the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below the NORMAL
band while the engine is running, you have lost oil pressure
and continued operation will cause severe engine damage.
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon as
safely possible, severe engine damage could result.
*[LG08001(ALL)02/95]
3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the instructions on
*[LG08051(ALL)03/93]
4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as necessary before
checking and adding engine oil. Refer to Engine oil in the
Index. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others
could be injured. To assure an accurate reading, your vehicle
should be on level ground.
you start the engine again. Do not overfill. Do not operate
the engine if the pointer is below the NORMAL band,
regardless of the oil level. Contact your nearest dealer for
further service actions.
[LG08150(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020540-E
Engine oil pressure gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer
90
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG08900(ALL)01/95]
*[LG09001(ALL)03/95]
%
High Beam Light
This light comes on when the headlamps are turned on high
beam or when you flash the lights.
[LG09025(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0021266-A
High beam indicator light symbol
%
*[LG09300(ALL)03/95]
“Headlamps On” Alert Chime
[LG09400(ALL)09/95]
This chime sounds if you open the driver’s door while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on, and the key is removed
from the ignition.
*[LG09500(ALL)01/95]
*[LG09700(ALL)06/93]
Fuel Gauge
*[LG09850(ALL)01/95]
For a proper fuel gauge indication after adding fuel, the ignition
switch should be in the OFF position while the vehicle is being
refueled.
*[LG09860(ALL)06/93]
The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when the vehicle is
in motion.
*[LG09875(ALL)08/93]
With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge indicator may drift
from the ignition switch ON position.
%
The fuel gauge displays approximately how much fuel is in the
fuel tank only when the ignition switch is ON.
91
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
[LG10300(ALL)10/94]
6 pica art:0020752-E
Fuel gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer
*[LG11100(ALL)01/95]
*[LG11201(ALL)03/95]
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
*[LG11301(ALL)08/95]
The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into the Normal
band as the engine coolant warms up. It is acceptable for the
pointer to fluctuate within the Normal band under normal
driving conditions. Under certain driving conditions, such as
heavy stop and go traffic or driving up hills in hot weather, the
pointer may move to the top of the Normal band.
*[LG11401(ALL)05/95]
If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves above the
NORMAL band, the engine coolant is overheating and
continued operation may cause engine damage.
*[LG11501(ALL)01/95]
*[LG11601(ALL)03/95]
*[LG11701(ALL)03/95]
If your engine coolant overheats:
%
This gauge tells you the temperature of the engine coolant, not
the coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level or
mixture, the gauge indicator will not be accurate.
1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely possible.
2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the engine as soon as
safely possible, severe engine damage could result.
*[LG11801(ALL)05/95]
3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE COOLANT
*[LG11901(ALL)04/95]
4. Check the coolant level following the instructions on
SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL THE ENGINE IS COOL.
checking and adding coolant to your engine. Refer to Engine
coolant in the Index. If you do not follow these instructions,
you or others could be injured.
92
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG12240(ALL)01/95]
If the coolant continues to overheat, have the coolant system
serviced as soon as possible.
[LG12325(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021154-C
Engine coolant temperature gauge — mechanical cluster with tachometer
*[LG12601(ALL)01/95]
*[LG12700(ALL)01/95]
Speedometer
*[LG12753(ALL)08/95]
Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed (mph/km/h)
limiting device that is contained within the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak
vehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehicle speed limits may
vary based on engine displacement.)
*[LG12756(ALL)05/95]
If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at high
speeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is a
normal condition and can be avoided by reducing
vehicle/engine speed.
%
The speedometer tells you how many miles (kilometers) per
hour your vehicle is moving.
93
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
[LG12790(ALL)08/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020873-F
Speedometer
*[LG12801(ALL)01/95]
*[LG12900(ALL)01/95]
Odometer
*[LG13000(ALL)11/94]
*[LG13100(ALL)03/93]
Trip Odometer
*[LG13250( X)02/95]
*[LG13300(ALL)05/95]
Tachometer
*[LG13400(ALL)05/95]
The tachometer may move slightly when the key is placed in
the ACC or ON position, with the engine off. This is normal
and does not affect the performance of the tachometer when the
engine is running.
%
%
%
The odometer tells you the total number of miles (kilometers)
your vehicle has been driven.
If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9 miles
(kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply set the trip odometer
to zero by pressing the reset button firmly when beginning the
distance you wish to measure.
The tachometer will show you the engine’s speed measured in
revolutions per minute (RPM).
94
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG13525(ALL)09/95]
Some vehicles are equipped with an engine speed (RPM)
limiting device contained within the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The purpose of this device is to maintain peak engine
speed (RPM) below a specified limit. This feature is only
evident on automatic transmission vehicles when shifting
manually (1, 2, D) and on all manual transmission units. (Engine
speed limits may vary based on engine displacement.)
*[LG13550(ALL)05/95]
If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out” condition at high
speeds, it may be the result of this limiting device. It is a
normal condition and can be avoided by reducing
vehicle/engine speed.
[LG13650(ALL)05/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020528-E
Tachometer
[LG13675(ALL)03/93]
NOTE: If the 4.0L engine exceeds 5200 RPM, the PCM will
restrict fuel flow to maintain engine speed at or below
5200 RPM. This function is designed to protect the
engine and should be considered normal operation.
95
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
%
*[LG35000( X)04/95]
The Electronic Message Center
(If equipped)
[LG35050( X)03/95]
The Electronic Message Center (M/C) display, located in the
center of the floor console, works only when your ignition is in
the ON position. Each time the M/C is powered, the display
goes through a self-test by displaying a blank message for two
seconds. This self-test is used to stabilize the systems before
reporting the status of the systems to you.
*[LG35100( X)01/95]
The M/C tells you about the condition of your vehicle by two
methods:
*[LG35150( X)01/95]
*[LG35200( X)01/95]
*[LG35250( X)01/95]
■ Operator selectable features
*[LG35300( X)01/95]
*[LG35350( X)01/95]
Operator Selectable Features
%
■ Continuous warning reporting of monitored systems
You can select different features for the M/C to display by
using the keyboard directly below the M/C display. You will
hear a tone when you press one of these switches. However, if
the M/C detects a warning from any of the monitored systems
then the M/C will display the appropriate warning message.
These features are controlled by the switches in the keyboard
below the M/C display. The following pages describe the
operation of the individual switches.
96
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG35400( X)08/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021115-B
Electronic message center
*[LG35450( X)01/95]
*[LG35500( X)01/95]
English/Metric
*[LG35550( X)01/95]
Fuel Range
[LG35600( X)10/94]
A press of the FUEL RANGE switch allows you to display one
of two features (Distance to Empty or Distance Driven). The
first press of the FUEL RANGE switch allows you to display
approximately how many miles or kilometers you can drive
before you run out of fuel.
A press of the ENGLISH/METRIC switch allows you to change
the M/C and electronic climate control displays from English to
metric units. When you press this switch, all the displays
change from English to metric or metric to English units. The
displays remain in the units you have chosen until you change
them again, even after you turn off the vehicle and start it
again.
97
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG35650( X)01/95]
To ensure accuracy, turn the ignition OFF when you fill the fuel
tank.
[LG35700( X)06/94]
NOTE: Distance to empty is calculated using a “Running
Average Fuel Economy” initialized by the factory. The
value is not the same as the Average Fuel Economy
Display. The Running Average Fuel Economy is based
on more than 500 miles (800 km) of driving history.
Also, the factory default for Running Average Fuel
Economy is reinitialized if the battery is disconnected.
*[LG35750( X)05/95]
If the “FUEL LEVEL ERROR” message is displayed, this means
that there is a problem with the fuel indication system and you
should contact your dealer for service as soon as possible.
[LG35800( X)03/95]
A second consecutive press of the FUEL RANGE switch allows
you to display how many miles or kilometers you have driven
since you last reset this feature. A press of the RESET switch
with MILE (KM) DRIVEN displayed resets the distance driven
to 0.0 miles or kilometers.
*[LG35850( X)05/95]
*[LG35900( X)01/95]
Fuel Status
*[LG35950( X)01/95]
If your fuel tank is full or nearly full, the M/C will display the
“FULL FUEL TANK” message. If your fuel tank is empty or
nearly empty, the M/C will display the “EMPTY FUEL TANK”
message.
[LG36000( X)04/94]
A second consecutive press of the FUEL STATUS switch allows
you to display the amount of fuel used since you last reset this
feature. A press of the RESET switch with GALLONS (LITERS)
USED displayed resets the amount to 0.0 gallons or liters used.
A press of the FUEL STATUS switch allows you to display one
of two features (Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used). The first press
of the FUEL STATUS switch allows you to display the
approximate amount of fuel in the tank in whole numbers
(gallons or liters).
98
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG36050( X)01/95]
%
*[LG36100( X)05/95]
Because of factors like rounding of numbers and fuel movement
in the tank, the M/C and the service station fuel pump readings
may disagree slightly.
Fuel Economy
[LG36150( X)10/94]
A press of the FUEL ECON switch allows you to display one of
two features (Average Fuel Economy or Instantaneous Fuel
Economy). The first press of the FUEL ECON switch will allow
you to display your average fuel economy in miles/gallons or
liters/kilometers. Your M/C computes this figure using the
distance traveled and fuel used information. If you want to reset
this feature, press the RESET switch while the average fuel
economy feature is displayed. Your average fuel economy will
then use data only from after the RESET was pressed to
calculate the new average.
[LG36200( X)10/94]
A second consecutive press of the FUEL ECON switch will
allow you to display the instantaneous fuel economy, which is
the fuel economy that you get at any particular moment. For
example, you can see what your fuel economy is in heavy traffic
or on an open highway. Your fuel economy is affected by such
factors as braking, acceleration, and the type of road you are
driving on.
*[LG36250( X)01/95]
Your vehicle must be moving for the M/C to calculate the fuel
economy. When your vehicle is not moving, instantaneous fuel
economy will be displayed at 0 miles/gallon or
99 kilometers/100 liters. When you are moving, the M/C will
display between 0 and 99 miles/gallon or between 1 and
99 kilometers/100 liters.
*[LG36300( X)01/95]
Reset
[LG36350( X)01/95]
A press of the RESET switch will allow you to reset the current
feature being displayed. Warnings, Distance Driven, Average
Fuel Economy, Fuel Used, and your Personalized Oil Reset
Percentage are the only features which respond to the RESET
switch. Distance to Empty, Fuel Remaining, and Instantaneous
99
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Fuel Economy cannot be reset. That is, these three features are
unaffected by pushing the RESET switch.
*[LG36750( X)01/95]
*[LG36800( X)01/95]
System Check
*[LG36850( X)01/95]
*[LG36900( X)01/95]
*[LG37000( X)01/95]
*[LG37050( X)01/95]
*[LG37100( X)01/95]
■ Engine Oil Life Left
%
A press of the SYSTEM CHECK switch causes the M/C to cycle
through a status of each of the systems being monitored. For
each of the monitored systems, the M/C will indicate either an
OK message or a warning message for two seconds. The
sequence of the system check report is as follows:
■ Engine Oil Level
■ Voltage Level
■ Engine Coolant Temperature
■ Washer Fluid Level
[LG37150( X)04/94]
■ Head Lamps
[LG37200( X)04/94]
■ Tail Lamps
[LG37250( X)04/94]
■ Brake Lamps
[LG37300( X)06/94]
■ Air Ride System (if equipped)
*[LG37350( X)01/95]
*[LG37400( X)01/95]
■ Fuel Level
*[LG37450( X)01/95]
For two of the systems reported in the system check (Engine Oil
Life Left and Fuel Level), there are two messages to describe the
status of the system. For Engine Oil Life Left, the first message
will indicate the oil change status (OK, SOON, REQUIRED) and
the second message will indicate the oil life remaining as a
percentage. If the second message is “OIL TEMP SIGNAL
ERROR”, this means that there is a problem with the oil
temperature sender system and you should contact your dealer
At normal conclusion of the system check sequence, the M/C
will display the last displayed feature before pressing the
SYSTEM CHECK switch or the warnings that are active.
100
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
for service as soon as possible. For Fuel Level, the first message
will indicate the fuel level status (OK or LOW) and the second
message will indicate the range (distance to empty).
*[LG37500( X)01/95]
*[LG37550( X)01/95]
Message center operation during system check
The M/C switches will operate as follows during the System
Check sequence:
*[LG37600( X)01/95]
1. A press of the SYSTEM CHECK switch will advance the
*[LG37650( X)01/95]
2. A press of the RESET switch anytime during this sequence
[LG37700( X)04/94]
3. A press of the RANGE, FUEL STATUS, OR FUEL
cycle to the next system message without waiting the two
seconds.
will cause the SYSTEM CHECK cycle to conclude
immediately and the last displayed feature before pressing
SYSTEM CHECK will be displayed.
ECONOMY, switch will conclude the SYSTEM CHECK cycle
and the requested feature will be displayed.
*[LG37750( X)01/95]
4. A press of the ENGLISH/METRIC switch will halt the
*[LG37800( X)01/95]
5. A press of the OIL CHANGE RESET switch during the
SYSTEM CHECK cycle and display, in the new mode, the
last displayed feature before pressing the SYSTEM CHECK
switch.
sequence will cause the SYSTEM CHECK cycle to conclude
and the Oil Change Reset Procedure will begin.
*[LG37850( X)01/95]
System Warnings
[LG37900( X)01/95]
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions
in your vehicle’s operating systems. There are twelve warning
messages which can be displayed by the Message Center (M/C)
to show the status of the monitored systems. When a warning
occurs, the warning message is displayed and a tone sounds.
The warning message will appear at a brighter level if the
instrument panel is dimmed.
101
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG37950( X)01/95]
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the M/C will cycle
the display to show all warnings by displaying each warning
message for 4 seconds.
*[LG38000( X)01/95]
Using the message center while a warning is active
[LG38050( X)04/94]
If you want to display the operator selectable features of the
M/C while a warning is displayed, the warning message may
be removed from the M/C display by pressing the RESET
switch. The M/C will display the last selected feature if there
are no more warning messages. This allows you to use the full
functionality of the M/C after you acknowledge the warning by
pressing the RESET switch and clearing the warning message.
*[LG38100( X)01/95]
Warning messages which have been reset are divided into two
categories. They will reappear on the display in 10 minutes
from the reset or they will not reappear until an ignition key
OFF-ON cycle. This reappearing of warning messages is a
reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the
vehicle. Warnings may be repeatedly reset. All warning
messages will reappear after an entire SYSTEM CHECK
sequence has been completed.
102
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
*[LG38150( X)01/95]
The following is a list of warning messages and their associated
reset category:
[LG38200( X)04/94]
fourteen pica
chart:0021147-A
*[LG38250( X)01/95]
*[LG38300( X)01/95]
Check Engine Temp
*[LG38350( X)01/95]
*[LG38400( X)03/95]
Check Charging System
This warning message is displayed when the engine coolant is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off
engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and level following the
instructions in the Servicing Your Vehicle chapter. If you do not
follow these instructions, you or others could be injured.
This warning message is displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining a proper voltage. If you are running electrical
accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as
many of the electrical loads as soon as safely possible. If this
warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at
normal speeds, have the electrical system checked as soon as it
is safely possible.
103
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG38450( X)01/95]
*[LG38500( X)01/95]
Low Fuel Level
*[LG38550( X)01/95]
*[LG38600( X)01/95]
Low Oil Level
*[LG38650( X)02/95]
*[LG38700( X)05/95]
To check your oil:
*[LG38750( X)01/95]
This warning message is displayed when you have
approximately 50 miles (80 km) left before you run out of fuel.
This warning message is displayed when your engine oil level is
low. If this warning message is displayed, check the level of the
engine oil.
1. Park your vehicle on level ground, turn off the engine and
wait at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.
2. Use the dipstick to check the oil. If the level is low, add oil,
but do not overfill.
*[LG38800( X)01/95]
If you are parked on a steep incline, the LOW OIL LEVEL
warning may come on when you start your vehicle, even
though the oil is at the correct level.
*[LG38850( X)01/95]
% [LG38900( X)05/95]
*
*[LG38950( X)04/95]
For information about adding oil, see Engine oil in the Index.
[LG39000( X)01/95]
Check Head Lamps
[LG39050( X)08/94]
This warning message is displayed when you turn on your
headlamps and at least one of them is burned out. A high beam
headlamp burn out is not monitored.
[LG39100( X)04/94]
Check Tail Lamps
[LG39150( X)04/94]
This warning message is displayed when you turn on your rear
parking (tail) lamps and at least one of them is burned out.
Low Washer Fluid Light
This warning message is displayed when the washer fluid
reservoir is less than one quarter full.
104
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG39200( X)04/94]
Check Brake Lamps
[LG39250( X)03/95]
This warning message is displayed when you turn on your
brakelamps by pressing the brake pedal and at least one of the
lamps is burned out.
[LG39300( X)04/94]
If you use additional lights, such as trailer lights, or if you
replace the headlamps or bulbs with equipment that is not equal
to the original equipment from Ford, you may get a false
“CHECK LAMPS” warning or no warning at all.
[LG39350( X)06/94]
Air Ride Switch Off (If equipped)
[LG39400( X)03/95]
This warning message is displayed when the air suspension
switch, located in the rear jack stowage area on the left side, is
off. For information about the operation of the air suspension
switch, see Automatic ride control system in the Index.
[LG39450( X)06/94]
Check Air Ride System (If equipped)
[LG39500( X)03/95]
This warning message is displayed when an air suspension
system fault has been detected. If this warning message is
displayed while driving, safely pull off the road at your earliest
convenience. If the vehicle is loaded beyond the recommended
maximum payload, the CHECK AIR RIDE SYSTEM message
may be displayed. This is a normal condition if the vehicle is
overloaded. To correct this condition, remove or redistribute the
payload per the recommended maximum requirements. Turn the
ignition switch from ON to OFF and ON again. If the warning
message reappears, turn the air suspension switch (located in
the rear jack stowage area on the left side) OFF and take your
vehicle to a dealership for service as soon as possible.
*[LG39550( X)01/95]
*[LG39600( X)01/95]
Change Oil Soon or Oil Change Required
One of these warning messages is displayed when the engine oil
life remaining is 5% or less. When Oil Life Left is between 5%
and 0%, the “CHANGE OIL SOON” message will be displayed.
When Oil Life Left reaches 0%, the “OIL CHANGE REQUIRED”
message will be displayed.
105
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
*[LG39650( X)01/95]
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the M/C. USE
ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS (See Engine oil in the
Index).
*[LG39700( X)01/95]
The M/C will tell you the percent of oil life left during System
Check. This percentage is based on your driving history and the
time since your last oil change. In order to ensure accurate oil
life left indications, you should only perform the following OIL
CHANGE RESET Procedure after you have the oil changed.
*[LG39801( X)01/95]
Oil Change Reset
[LG39901( X)08/94]
A press of the OIL CHANGE RESET switch will allow you to
reset the oil life feature to 100% (or your Personalized Oil Reset
Percentage). After you have the oil changed, you must execute
the following procedure. Press the OIL CHANGE RESET switch
and hold for five seconds as the M/C counts down for five
seconds. After a successful reset the Message Center will display
“OIL LIFE RESET TO 100%.” If you have established a
Personalized Oil Reset Percentage, the display will show that
percentage instead of 100%. To ensure accurate oil life
indicators, perform this reset procedure only after an oil change.
[LG40001( X)08/94]
Your Personalized Oil Reset Percentage allows you to establish a
smaller oil change interval than the manufacturer’s
recommended interval. To establish your Personalized Oil Reset
Percentage perform the following procedure:
[LG40101( X)08/94]
1. Press and hold the OIL CHANGE RESET switch and press
the RESET switch while the display is still counting down
the 5 seconds to reset. The display will change to “START
OIL LIFE AT XXX%.”
[LG40201( X)08/94]
2. Press the OIL CHANGE RESET switch until the displayed
percentage is the Personalized Oil Reset Percentage that you
desire. Your choices are 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%,
40% and 30%.
106
File:05unlgx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:04:08 1996
Warning Lights and Gauges
[LG40301( X)08/94]
3. Press the RESET switch to complete the procedure. A press
of any switch besides RESET or OIL CHANGE RESET will
abort this procedure and will not establish your new
Personalized Oil Reset Percentage.
[LG40401( X)08/94]
When your Personalized Oil Reset Percentage has been
established, it will be used beginning with the completion of
your next OIL CHANGE RESET procedure.
107
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP00250( X)12/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0090198-B
Instrument Panel Controls
Instrument Panel & Controls
109
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP00400( X)03/95]
%
*[IP00475(ALL)09/95]
The main controls for the climate control system, lights, message
center, lamps, clocks and radio are on the instrument panel.
NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the gloss (shine)
of the upper part of the instrument panel should be
avoided. The dull finish in this area is to help protect
the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
*[IP00500(ALL)06/95]
*[IP00601(ALL)12/91]
The Climate Control Systems
*[IP00801(ALL)10/93]
*[IP00901(ALL)02/95]
Instrument Panel Registers
%
%
Your vehicle is equipped with a control assembly designed to
handle either a combination A/C-Heater System or a
Heater-Only System.
There are four registers in the instrument panel. Each of these
registers contains a louver assembly which can be manually
adjusted to direct airflow up, down, left and right. An
illustration of the register locations follows.
[IP01201(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020099-D
Instrument panel registers
[IP01400(ALL)12/91]
Air Conditioning (A/C) Controls (Manual Air
Conditioning)
*[IP01450(ALL)02/95]
The control for your air conditioning and heater system is
located at the center of the instrument panel below the radio
and will operate only when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position. Your air conditioner and heater will heat and/or
cool your vehicle interior depending on the function position
110
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
and temperature you select. The function selector control knob
allows you to select heating or cooling and determine where the
air will be directed. The temperature control knob setting
determines the temperature of the air that flows into the vehicle.
[IP01500(ALL)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
Climate control knobs
art:0020589-G
*[IP01550(ALL)03/95]
To turn your air conditioner and heater system on, select any
position except OFF. This will turn the fan on and allow airflow
into the vehicle. To turn your air conditioner and heater off,
select OFF. This will turn the fan off and stop airflow from
coming into the vehicle.
*[IP01600(ALL)03/95]
Temperature selection
[IP01650(ALL)03/95]
The temperature control knob is the rotating knob located at the
center of the control with tapered red and blue bands
surrounding most of the knob. The wide red part of the band
(full right) is the heat or warmer area. The wide blue area (full
left) is the cooling or cool temperature area. Any position
selected between full right and full left will give a temperature
between the two extreme temperatures.
111
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP01700(ALL)03/95]
[IP01750(ALL)03/95]
*[IP01800(ALL)08/94]
H Fan speed adjustment
The H (left) knob on the control is the fan control knob which
controls the volume of air flow. Rotate the H knob to the right
to increase fan speed and increase the amount of air entering
the vehicle. Four fan speed positions are available and are
indicated by dots beside the H control knob. The largest dot is
high speed position.
Airflow selections
[IP01850(ALL)08/95]
Q (Panel)
[IP01900(ALL)03/95]
Use Q to bring outside air through the instrument panel
registers. You can heat the air in this position by rotating the
temperature knob into the red area. The air CANNOT be cooled
below the outside temperature regardless of the temperature
knob setting. Select A/C or MAX A/C to get cool air through
the instrument panel registers.
*[IP01950(ALL)08/95]
A/C
[IP02000(ALL)06/94]
Select A/C to get refrigerated outside air through the
instrument panel registers. The A/C position is used for cooling
except when it is extremely hot or fast cooling of the vehicle is
needed. Then, select MAX A/C for fast cooling and return to
A/C when you are comfortable.
*[IP02050(ALL)08/95]
MAX A/C
[IP02100(ALL)05/95]
The MAX A/C position produces cool air more rapidly to
provide faster cooling of your vehicle. This is possible because
cooler air is drawn from inside the passenger area and
refrigerated again instead of using warmer outside air. Using
inside air will also make the fan sound louder and is normal
when using MAX A/C. The air flow will be from the
instrument panel registers.
112
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP02150(ALL)08/95]
S (Panel and Floor)
[IP02200(ALL)03/95]
Select S to direct airflow to the floor and through the
instrument panel registers at the same time. This selection can
be used to either heat or cool your vehicle. The air conditioner
will operate to cool the air if the outside temperature is about
50˚F (10˚C) or warmer.
*[IP02250(ALL)08/95]
R (Floor)
[IP02300(ALL)03/95]
Select R to direct air to the floor. The air cannot be cooled in
the R position but can be heated by rotating the temperature
knob into the red area.
[IP02350(ALL)08/95]
P (Floor and Defrost)
[IP02400(ALL)03/95]
Select P to direct air to the floor and windshield defrosters at
the same time. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C)
or warmer, the air will also be dehumidified to remove
moisture. This feature will help prevent fogging in humid
weather. The air can be cooled or heated.
%
*[IP02450(ALL)08/95]
[IP02500(ALL)03/95]
V (Defrost)
Select V to obtain maximum airflow to the windshield. Rotate
the temperature knob into the red area for the air temperature
required to defrost. When the outside temperature is about 50˚F
(10˚C) or warmer, the air will be dehumidified to remove
moisture. Rotate the H knob to increase the airflow.
113
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP02550(ALL)04/95]
*[IP02600(ALL)02/95]
Operating tips
[IP02650(ALL)03/95]
■ In humid weather, select V before starting your engine.
The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction
from your air conditioning and heater system.
This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a few
minutes of operation, you may select another function.
[IP02700(ALL)03/95]
■ To prevent humidity buildup inside your vehicle, always
drive with the air conditioner or heater system turned on.
*[IP02750(ALL)03/95]
■ Do not put objects under the front seats that interfere with
[IP02800(ALL)03/95]
■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area of
the flow of air to the back seat area.
your air conditioner and heater system that could block the
air intake. The intake area is located at the bottom of the
windshield.
[IP04500( X)03/95]
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(If equipped)
[IP04600( X)03/95]
The control for your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC) is located at the center of the instrument panel below
the radio and will operate only when the ignition key is turned
on to the ON position.
[IP04700( X)03/95]
The EATC feature will maintain the temperature you select and
automatically control the airflow for your comfort. It also allows
you to override the automatic operation with manual override
buttons.
114
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP04800( X)03/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090132-A
Electronic automatic temperature control system
*[IP04850( X)02/95]
To turn your EATC on, push the AUTOMATIC button or any
of the six override buttons along the bottom of the control.
[IP04900( X)03/95]
To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button. When the system
is off, the display window will be blank (dark) when the
ignition is on. The display will also be blank (dark) when the
ignition is off.
*[IP05000( X)01/95]
If you select AUTOMATIC, the system will automatically
determine fan speed and airflow location. If an override button
is selected, your selection determines airflow location only. Fan
speed remains automatic unless you override it by rotating the
vertical thumbwheel located at the extreme right of the control
panel.
115
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP05100( X)03/95]
To change the temperature in the display window, select any
temperature between 65˚F (18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) using the
BLUE (cooler) or RED (warmer) buttons. The Electronic
Automatic Temperature Control will do the rest.
[IP05150( X)03/95]
To change the temperature display from ˚F to ˚C or from ˚C to
˚F, press and hold the MAX A/C and the DEF V buttons at
the same time for one second.
[IP05200( X)03/95]
If you want continuous maximum cooling, push the BLUE
button until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown in the display window. Your
EATC will cool at maximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C)
setting until you select a warmer temperature with the RED
button. If you want continuous maximum heating, push the
RED button until 90˚F (32˚C) is shown in the display window.
Your EATC will provide maximum heat regardless of the 90˚F
(32˚C) setting until you select a cooler temperature with the
BLUE button.
*[IP05300( X)03/95]
The display window tells you how the system is operating. It
will indicate the selected temperature and the operating function
you have chosen; AUTO or one of the six manual overrides. It
will also indicate manual (thumbwheel) control of the fan speed
with the H symbol. The display window with all possible
displays and their positions are shown here. Normally not all
are shown at the same time but are included here to familiarize
you with the names and symbols.
116
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP05400( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090125-A
*[IP05500( X)01/95]
*[IP05600( X)02/95]
Automatic operation
Push the AUTOMATIC button and select the desired
temperature. The selected temperature and AUTO will be shown
in the display window. The EATC will automatically heat or
cool to achieve the set temperature. Under normal conditions,
your EATC will need no additional attention.
[IP05700( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090126-A
117
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP05800( X)03/95]
When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions require heat, air
will be sent to the floor. However, a feature is included in your
EATC to prevent blowing cold air to the floor if the engine
coolant is not warm enough to allow heating. In 3 1/2 minutes
or less, the fan speed will start to increase and the air flow will
be to the floor area.
[IP05900( X)07/94]
If unusual conditions exist (i.e. window fogging, etc.), the six
manual override buttons allow you to select special air
discharge locations. A thumbwheel allows you to adjust the fan
speed to suit your needs.
*[IP06000( X)03/95]
Temperature selection
[IP06100( X)03/95]
The RED and BLUE buttons at the upper left of the Control are
for temperature selection. The RED button will increase the set
temperature and the BLUE button will lower the set
temperature. Pressing a button and releasing it will change the
set temperature one degree. Holding either button in will
rapidly change the temperature setting in one degree increments
to either 65˚F (18˚C) (BLUE) or 85˚F (29˚C) (RED). Then, the set
temperature will jump 5˚ and stop at either 60˚F (16˚C) which is
maximum cooling or 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.
When you select 60˚F (16˚C) or 90˚F (32˚C), the fan will go to
HI speed for maximum airflow.
118
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP06200( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090133-A
*[IP06300( X)06/94]
The average temperature range used is between 68˚F (20˚C) and
78˚F (26˚C). Changing the temperature setting by several
degrees outside this range will not speed up the heating or
cooling process.
*[IP06400( X)01/95]
Fan speed and thumbwheel
[IP06500( X)05/95]
Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed to the existing
conditions. You must push AUTOMATIC for automatic fan
speed operation. To control the fan speed yourself, use the
thumbwheel which will cancel the automatic fan speed control.
The thumbwheel is located at the extreme right side of the
EATC control panel and is marked with a H symbol. Rotate up
for HI and down for LO speeds.
119
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP06600( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090134-A
[IP06700( X)03/95]
When you move the thumbwheel, the fan speed will go to
manual control. The display window will show the H symbol
in the upper left corner along with the selected temperature and
operating function.
[IP06800( X)03/95]
You can override the fan speed at any time. If you use the
thumbwheel to override the fan speed, the EATC will continue
to control the temperature but you control the fan speed. If you
are operating in one of the override functions (FLOOR, MAX
A/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continue unless you rotate
the fan thumbwheel. To return to automatic fan control, press
the AUTOMATIC button. The EATC will return to automatic
operation. If you want to return to any override function, press
the button for that function. The fan speed will continue to be
automatically controlled.
120
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP06900( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090127-A
*[IP07000( X)01/95]
Manual override buttons
[IP07100( X)03/95]
Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to make special
selections. The buttons are located along the bottom edge of the
EATC Control and allow you to determine where the air will be
discharged. Pressing any override button changes the air
discharge location only. It does not affect the ability of the
system to control temperature or the fan speed. Return to fully
automatic operation by pushing the AUTOMATIC button.
[IP07200( X)07/94]
MAX A/C Button
[IP07300( X)03/95]
MAX A/C allows for faster cooling because air is drawn from
inside the vehicle. Using inside air causes the fan to sound
louder which is normal for this selection. The display window
will change to indicate 60˚F (16˚C) and MAX A/C. The fan will
run at high speed and the air flow will be from the instrument
panel registers. To exit and return to the previous temperature,
push AUTOMATIC or any of the other 5 override buttons.
121
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP07400( X)07/94]
VENT Button
[IP07500( X)03/95]
Push this button to select outside air through the instrument
panel registers. The display window will show the set
temperature and VENT to the lower right of the temperature.
Your EATC will heat the air if the temperature you have
selected is warmer than the outside air coming into the vehicle.
However, the air will NOT be cooled regardless of the
temperature setting. Airflow will be from the instrument panel
registers.
[IP07600( X)03/95]
PNL & FLR Button
*[IP07700( X)03/95]
Push this button to get air from the floor and instrument panel
registers at the same time. The display will show the set
temperature and the words PNL and FLR. Depending on the
selected temperature, the air will be automatically heated or
cooled.
[IP07800( X)07/94]
FLOOR Button
[IP07900( X)03/95]
Airflow will be to the floor when the FLOOR button is pressed.
The display window will show the set temperature and FLR to
the left of the temperature. The air cannot be cooled in the
FLOOR position, only heated. Fan speed will be automatic
unless manually controlled. If you override the fan speed and
wish to return to automatic fan control, push AUTOMATIC.
Then, again select FLOOR for airflow to the floor.
[IP08000( X)07/94]
FLR & DEF Button
[IP08100( X)03/95]
Push this button to get air to the floor and windshield
defrosters at the same time. The display will show the set
temperature, FLR and V symbol to indicate FLR & DEF has
been selected. If the outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) or
warmer, the air will be dehumidified to remove moisture. This
will help to prevent fogging in humid weather.
122
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP08200( X)04/95]
DEF V Button
[IP08300( X)03/95]
Press the defrost button to obtain maximum airflow to the
windshield. Adjust the temperature setting as required for
defrosting. The display window will show the temperature
setting and V symbol to the left of the temperature. When the
outside temperature is about 50˚F (10˚C) or warmer, the air will
be dehumidified to remove moisture.
[IP08400( X)07/94]
REAR FAN OFF Button
[IP08500( X)03/95]
Press this button once to turn on the rear fan circuit. Press the
button again to turn the rear fan off. REAR FAN OFF will be
shown in the display window above the set temperature.
[IP08600( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090128-A
*[IP08700( X)04/95]
*[IP08800( X)04/95]
Operating tips
*[IP08900( X)07/95]
■ In humid weather, select DEF V before starting your
The following tips will help you to get the most satisfaction
from your Electronic Automatic Temperature Control system.
engine. This will help to prevent windshield fogging. After a
few minutes of operation, switch to AUTOMATIC or an
override selection of your choice.
123
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP09000( X)04/95]
■ To prevent humidity buildup inside your vehicle, always
*[IP09100( X)03/95]
■ Do not put objects under the front seats that interfere with
[IP09200( X)03/95]
■ Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air intake area of
drive with the EATC System turned on.
the flow of air to the back seat area.
your EATC System which could block the air intake. The
intake area is located at the bottom of the windshield.
*[IP09300( X)04/95]
*[IP09400( X)04/95]
Service
[IP09500( X)10/94]
Rear Fan and Airflow Operation
*[IP09600( X)03/95]
Fan speed adjustment
If your EATC is not operating as described here, take it to your
dealer to have it checked. System diagnostics are built in which
will allow your dealer to readily identify problems that might
occur.
[IP09700( X)05/95]
The H (right) knob controls the volume of air flow. Rotate the
knob upward to increase fan speed and increase the amount of
air entering the vehicle. Three fan speed positions are available
and are indicated by dots beside the H knob. The largest dot is
high speed position.
[IP09800( X)10/94]
In O (OFF), all blower motor operation is stopped.
*[IP09900( X)08/94]
Airflow selections
[IP10000( X)05/95]
Q (Vent)
[IP10100( X)05/95]
Airflow will be to the upper console registers when Q is
selected.
*[IP10200( X)08/95]
R (Floor)
[IP10300( X)05/95]
Airflow will be to the floor when R is selected.
124
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP10400( X)10/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021271-A
Rear climate controls
125
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP12300( X)06/95]
*[IP12400( X)12/91]
Rear Window Defroster (If equipped)
[IP12500( X)10/94]
The control switch is located on the instrument panel to the
right of the radio.
%
The defroster for the rear window clears frost, fog, or thin ice
from both the inside and outside of the rear window.
[IP12700( X)08/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020110-H
Rear window defroster switch
*[IP12800( X)02/95]
*[IP12900( X)02/95]
*[IP13000( X)09/93]
[IP13200( X)06/94]
To defrost the rear window:
1. Clear any snow from the rear window.
2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine.
3. Push the switch and release. The indicator light turns on.
Push switch again to turn off.
*[IP13300( X)02/05]
%
*[IP13400( X)09/95]
The defroster turns off automatically after approximately 10
minutes. If the window is not clear, turn on the defroster again.
It will also automatically shut off any time the engine is shut
off.
NOTE: Never use sharp instruments or window cleaners with
abrasives to clean the inside of your rear window. If
you do, you may damage the heating elements that
are bonded to the inside of the rear window and
cause damage to the rear window defroster.
126
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP15800( X)10/94]
Liftgate Wiper and Washer (If equipped)
[IP15901( X)10/94]
The wiper/washer switch is to the right of the radio. To turn on
the wiper, rotate the wiper/washer switch to the WIPE position.
To select an interval wipe rotate switch between OFF and HI.
To turn on the washer, push the switch all the way in and hold
for spray. Release the button and the spray stops, but the wiper
continues to operate. To turn off the wiper, rotate the switch to
the OFF position.
[IP15950( X)12/92]
For information about refilling the liftgate washer fluid or
replacing your liftgate wiper blade, see Windshield washer fluid
and Windshield wipers in the Index.
[IP16000( X)05/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090189-A
Liftgate wiper/washer button
*[IP16800(ALL)01/95]
% [IP16900(ALL)01/95]
*
*[IP17000(ALL)09/95]
%
[IP17100(ALL)09/95]
The Interior and Exterior Lights
Turning On the Exterior Lights
To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps, marker lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps, use the headlamp control
knob to the left of the steering column.
1. Rotate the headlamp control knob to the first position.
Parking lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps and marker
lamps are now on.
[IP17200(ALL)06/94]
2. Rotate the headlamp control knob to the next position.
Headlamps are now on in addition to the above.
127
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP17250(ALL)09/95]
3. Rotate the thumb wheel when the headlamp control knob is
in an “ON” position to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lamps. Rotate fully upward to operate courtesy and cargo
lamps.
[IP17260(ALL)09/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090190-A
Headlamp control knob
*[IP17301( X)02/95]
*[IP17320( X)02/95]
Setting the Autolamp Delay System (If equipped)
*[IP17340( X)01/95]
*[IP17360( X)01/95]
*[IP17380( X)01/95]
■ turn on the lamps automatically at night
%
The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and off
automatically. You can use the autolamp to:
■ turn off the lamps automatically during daylight
■ keep the lamps on for up to three minutes after you turn the
key to OFF.
128
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP17390( X)12/95]
Your vehicle may have one of the following autolamp systems
depending on when it was built:
[IP17400( X)1/96]
10-1/2 pica
art:0020974-C
[IP17405( X)12/95]
OR
[IP17410( X)12/95]
10-1/2 pica
art:0090216-A
[IP17415( X)12/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the first autolamp (with the
ON/OFF button) use the following directions:
*[IP17420( X)01/95]
To set the autolamp:
[IP17440( X)05/95]
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. If the
switch for the headlamps is ON, you cancel the autolamp.
129
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP17460( X)01/95]
2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle.
[IP17490( X)12/92]
3. Find the autolamp delay slide knob on the right hand side of
the mirror.
[IP17510( X)12/92]
4. Slide the knob all the way to the left.
[IP17528( X)03/93]
5. Press the autolamp “On/Off” button. An indicator light will
glow when the autolamp is on.
[IP17530( X)06/93]
6. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps on and off.
*[IP17570( X)03/93]
To turn the autolamp off, press the On/Off button. The
indicator light will turn off.
[IP17572( X)12/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the second autolamp (without
the ON/OFF button) use the following directions:
[IP17574( X)12/95]
1. Make sure the headlamp is in the OFF position. If the switch
for the headlamps is ON, you will override the autolamp.
[IP17576( X)12/95]
2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start your vehicle.
[IP17578( X)12/95]
3. Find the autolamp delay slide knob in the center of the
mirror.
[IP17580( X)12/95]
4. Slide the knob to the center of travel.
[IP17582( X)12/95]
5. The autolamp automatically turns the lamps ON and OFF.
[IP17584( X)12/95]
To turn the autolamp OFF, slide the knob all the way to the
left.
*[IP17600( X)12/92]
You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay on for up to three
minutes after you turn your vehicle off.
*[IP17601( X)01/95]
*[IP17630( X)10/94]
To keep the lamps on after you leave your vehicle:
■ Move the slider knob to the right. Once the slider knob is to
the right, it controls how long the lamps stay on.
130
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
*[IP17660( X)12/93]
%
*[IP17715(ALL)04/95]
■ The further you move the slide knob toward the right, the
longer the headlamps stay on after you leave your vehicle.
Similarly, if you move the slide knob only slightly toward
the left, the headlamps stay on for only a moment after you
turn your vehicle off.
Fog Lamps (If equipped)
[IP17725(ALL)03/95]
The fog lamps switch is located on the instrument panel to the
right of the radio and climate control.
[IP17730(ALL)05/95]
■ To turn the fog lamps on, turn on the low-beam headlamps,
then push the fog lamp switch. An indicator light will glow
when the lamps are on.
*[IP17735(ALL)10/94]
■ To turn off, push the switch again.
[IP17750(ALL)05/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090191-A
Fog lamp switch
*[IP17760(ALL)02/93]
The fog lamps act as a supplement to the low beam headlamps
under limited visibility conditions such as rain, snow, dust or
fog and operate only when the low beam headlamps are on.
*[IP17770(ALL)02/93]
To maximize fog lamp bulb life it is recommended that the fog
lamp switch be turned off after each use prior to turning off the
headlamps.
131
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
*[IP17780(ALL)08/95]
*[IP17785(ALL)08/95]
Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
*[IP17815(ALL)01/95]
*[IP17820(ALL)03/95]
*[IP17830(ALL)03/95]
Daytime Running Light System
*[IP17840(ALL)03/95]
*[IP17850(ALL)01/95]
*[IP17860(ALL)05/95]
■ The headlamp system is in the OFF position, and
%
%
Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents or abrasive
cleaners to clean the lamps, as these may cause scratches or
crack the lamps.
(Canadian vehicles only)
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns the high beam
headlamps on, with a reduced light output, when:
■ The vehicle has a fully released parking brake.
The high beam indicator light on the instrument cluster will not
be on.
*[IP17890(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system will not
illuminate the tail lamps and parking lamps. Turn on
your headlamps at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
%
*[IP17900(ALL)03/95]
Lighting Up the Instrument Panel and the Interior of
Your Vehicle
[IP18000(ALL)10/94]
The instrument panel lights can be turned on by turning the
headlamp knob toward either the first or second position. You
can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by rotating the
thumb wheel.
[IP18200(ALL)03/95]
The interior lights will shut off after 25 seconds with all the
doors closed, or immediately when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if the vehicle speed is above five MPH
(8 km/h). The interior lights will turn off after 40 minutes if
any of the doors are left open. Refer to Battery Saver in the
Features section for more details.
132
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP18400( X)03/95]
Cargo and Map Lamps
[IP19100( X)08/94]
The cargo lamp is located on the roof headliner near the liftgate.
The lamp will come on whenever the driver’s door or
passenger’s door is open or when the headlamp switch
thumbwheel is rotated fully upward.
*[IP19187(ALL)04/95]
*[IP19188(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Interior Lamps
[IP19700(ALL)04/95]
Dome/Map Lamps (If equipped)
*[IP19800( X)08/95]
The map lamps are located inside the dome lamp assembly, on
each side of the dome lamp. Each lamp has its own switch.
[IP19815( X)03/93]
If you have the Explorer Limited, the map lamps are located in
the overhead console. Each lamp has its own switch.
%
Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are plastic and
should be cleaned with a mild detergent diluted in water. Rinse
them with clear water.
[IP19850( X)05/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090188-A
Map lamps
133
File:06unipx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:05:45 1996
[IP19875( X)09/95]
10-1/2 pica
Map lamps (if equipped)
art:0020975-B
%
*[IP19900( X)10/94]
[IP19910( X)10/94]
High-mount Brakelamp
The high-mount brakelamp is located outside the vehicle,
directly over the rear window.
[IP19920( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0021015-E
High-mount brakelamp
*[IP20300(ALL)04/95]
Clock Controls on Electronic Radios
[IP20400(ALL)10/94]
The electronic radios have a built-in clock. For complete
operating instructions, refer to Electronic Sound Systems in this
Owner Guide.
134
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC00400(ALL)01/95]
The controls on the steering column and wheel are designed to
give you easy access to the controls while you are driving.
*[SC00500(ALL)01/95]
*[SC00600(ALL)01/95]
The Turn Signal Lever
*[SC00700(ALL)03/95]
*[SC00800(ALL)01/95]
*[SC00900(ALL)05/95]
*[SC01000(ALL)01/95]
% [SC01100(ALL)01/95]
*
■ operate the turn signals and cornering lamps
%
You can use the turn signal lever on the left side of the steering
column to:
■ turn the high beams on/off
■ flash the lamps
■ turn the windshield wipers and washer on/off
Turn Signals
[SC01600(ALL)07/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090131-B
Turn signal lever and functions
*[SC01800(ALL)11/89]
If the turn indicator light in the instrument panel does not
illuminate or remains on (doesn’t flash) when you signal a turn,
the turn signaling system is malfunctioning. Have this condition
corrected as soon as possible, but make sure that you use the
accepted hand signals in the meantime.
135
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
%
*[SC03200(ALL)08/95]
High Beams and Flashing the Lamps
[SC03500(ALL)03/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090130-A
Headlamp high beam switch and turn signal lever on steering column
*[SC04400(ALL)08/95]
*[SC04500(ALL)03/95]
%
Windshield Wipers and Washer
To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition key must be
turned to the ON or ACC position.
[SC04900(ALL)08/94]
10-1/2 pica
Interval wiper on turn signal lever
art:0020084-D
*[SC05000(ALL)02/95]
To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at the end of the turn
signal lever toward or away from the instrument panel to the
interval operation you desire.
136
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
[SC05200(ALL)06/95]
To clean the windshield, push in the end of the wiper knob for
a single wipe. For a constant spray, keep the knob pushed in.
After you release the knob, the wipers operate for two to three
cycles before turning off (if wipers were off) or returning to the
interval setting selected.
*[SC05300(ALL)08/95]
Do not try to clean the windshield when the washer fluid
container is empty or activate the washers at any time for more
than 15 seconds continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
[SC05350(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: The addition of shields to the front of the vehicle, as
used to deflect bugs, may also adversely affect the
washer system from delivering fluid to the
windshield. Devices such as bug shields are not
recommended to be added to your vehicle.
*[SC05400(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
In freezing weather, the washer solution may freeze on
the windshield and obscure your vision. Always warm
up the windshield with the defroster before you use the
washer fluid. If you cannot see through the windshield
clearly, it can increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
*[SC05500(ALL)08/95]
For information about refilling the washer fluid or replacing
your windshield wiper blades, see Windshield washer fluid and
Wipers in the Index.
137
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
[SC05502(ALL)10/94]
Gearshift Lever (Automatic transmission
only)
[SC05504( X)08/94]
The gearshift lever on your Explorer is mounted on the steering
column. On the end of the gearshift lever is the Overdrive
On/Off button. For additional information about the gearshift
lever and the Overdrive On/Off button, see the Driving Your
Explorer chapter.
[SC05508(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021255-A
*[SC05510(ALL)11/93]
OVERDRIVE OFF Lamp
[SC05512(ALL)03/95]
This lamp indicates the operating range of the transmission.
This lamp illuminates when the O/D ON/OFF button is
depressed. For additional information, refer to the Warning
Lights and Gauges chapter.
[SC05514(ALL)07/95]
6 pica art:0021226-B
138
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC05516(ALL)03/95]
*[SC05520(ALL)04/95]
Hazard Flasher
*[SC05527(ALL)10/94]
The flashers will flash and the high-mount brakelamp will stay
on steadily (not flash) with the brake pedal depressed.
*[SC05530(ALL)08/95]
The flashers work whether your vehicle is running or not. The
flashers work for up to two hours when the battery is fully
charged and in good condition without draining the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than two hours or if
the battery is not fully charged, the battery power can be
drained.
*[SC05540(ALL)09/93]
*[SC05550(ALL)10/92]
To use the hazard flasher:
%
*[SC05560(ALL)10/92]
*[SC05562(ALL)08/95]
The hazard flasher is used to alert other drivers to hazardous
situations.
1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop out and the lamps will
begin to flash.
2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasher button again.
NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking up slightly higher
when on than when off.
[SC05590(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Hazard flasher
art:0020079-D
139
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
*[SC05600(ALL)01/95]
*[SC05700(ALL)02/95]
%
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center of the horn pad. Check the
horn regularly to make sure it operates properly.
[SC06000(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Horn location
art:0020890-D
*[SC06200(ALL)05/95]
*[SC06250(ALL)04/95]
%
Tilt Steering (If equipped)
RWARNING
Never adjust the steering column/wheel when the vehicle
is moving. You could lose control of the vehicle and
injure someone.
[SC06400(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020088-D
Tilt steering wheel lever
140
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC06450(ALL)09/95]
To change the position of the steering wheel, push the release
lever under the steering column away from you. Tip the
steering wheel to the desired position. Pull the lever back into
place to lock the steering wheel.
*[SC07250(ALL)12/89]
Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It is not infinitely
adjustable. Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion.
*[SC07300(ALL)03/91]
*[SC07400(ALL)06/95]
Speed Control (If equipped)
*[SC07450(ALL)06/95]
Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) or in Canada the Canadian
Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) approved
may cause the speed control to malfunction. Therefore, use only
properly installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio
transmitting equipment in your vehicle.
%
If your vehicle has speed control, you can automatically
maintain a constant speed at or above 30 mph (50 km/h).
[SC07500(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020091-F
The speed control switches
*[SC07800(ALL)08/95]
*[SC08000(ALL)08/95]
[SC08100(ALL)02/95]
To set the speed control:
1. Press and release the ON switch.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed above 30 mph (48 km/h)
using the accelerator pedal.
141
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
[SC08300(ALL)03/95]
3. Press SET ACCEL switch and release it immediately. This
will set your speed. If you keep this switch pressed, your
speed will continue to increase and will not be set until the
switch is released.
*[SC08500(ALL)08/95]
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will
*[SC08600(ALL)08/95]
If you drive up or down a steep hill, your vehicle may
momentarily slow down or speed up, even though the speed
control is on. This is normal.
[SC08630(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, and if your speed increases above your
set speed while driving in j (Overdrive) on a
downhill grade, you may want to shift to D (Drive) to
reduce vehicle speed. This can be accomplished by
pushing in the Transmission Control switch which is
located on the end of the gearshift lever. The speed
control cannot reduce the vehicle speed if it goes
above your set speed on a downhill grade. For the
best fuel economy during normal driving conditions,
leave the shift select in j (Overdrive), or resume as
soon as practical.
[SC08675(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a 5 speed manual
transmission, and if your speed increases above your
set speed while driving in 5 (Fifth) gear on a downhill
grade, you may want to shift to 4 (Fourth) gear to
reduce vehicle speed. Depressing the clutch pedal
cancels speed control, therefore speed control must be
reset by pressing the SET ACCEL or RESUME
switches. Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle
speed if it goes above your set speed on a downhill
grade.
maintain the speed you set.
142
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC08700(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
*[SC08801(ALL)05/95]
In mountainous areas, at higher elevations, or when pulling a
trailer, the speed control may not be able to maintain the preset
speed with the transmission in j (Overdrive).
*[SC08850(ALL)06/92]
If your vehicle comes with a 5-speed manual transmission, you
may prefer to drive in 4 (Fourth) gear, in mountainous areas or
at high altitudes, to improve speed control performance.
*[SC09275(ALL)12/91]
In order to downshift (with a manual transmission) with the
speed control operating, you must press either the brake or
clutch pedal long enough to disengage the speed control. Wait a
second before depressing the clutch again and making the shift
so that the speed control can fully return to the idle position.
*[SC09325(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not shift the transmission into N (Neutral) with the
speed control on.
[SC09350(ALL)03/95]
To maintain a preset speed under the above conditions, with
electronically controlled transmissions — press the Transmission
Control Switch (TCS). The indicator light will turn on and
illuminate the words “O/D OFF.” This will cancel “Overdrive.”
You can press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) on or off
at any speed. For the best fuel economy during normal driving
conditions, press the Transmission Control Switch (TCS) to turn
off the light. This allows overdrive operation.
143
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
[SC09375(ALL)10/94]
quarter page
art:0021255-A
Transmission control switch
*[SC09400(ALL)08/95]
*[SC09500(ALL)08/95]
Accelerating With the Speed Control Operating
*[SC09600(ALL)08/95]
*[SC09700(ALL)06/95]
Resetting the Speed Control
*[SC09750(ALL)10/94]
Your vehicle has a “tap-down” feature that allows you to
decrease your current speed in increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
by a momentary tap of the COAST switch. Multiple taps of the
COAST switch will decrease your vehicle speed 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) for each tap. For example, if you are currently set at
65 mph (104 km/h) and tap the COAST switch 5 times your
vehicle speed will decrease and set at 60 mph (96 km/h).
*[SC09800(ALL)06/95]
To reset the speed control to a higher speed, you can follow
any of these procedures:
[SC09900(ALL)08/94]
■ Accelerate to the desired speed, then press the SET ACCEL
%
%
You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up momentarily.
When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
To reset the speed control to a lower speed, press and hold the
COAST switch. Let your vehicle slow down to the desired
speed and release the COAST switch.
switch and release it immediately.
[SC10100(ALL)08/94]
■ Press and hold the SET ACCEL switch, then accelerate to
your desired speed and release the switch.
144
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
Steering Column Controls
*[SC10250(ALL)10/94]
■ TAP-UP — This allows you to increase your current speed in
*[SC10300(ALL)06/95]
*[SC10400(ALL)06/95]
Turning the Speed Control Off
[SC10550(ALL)08/94]
increments of 1 mph (1.6 km/h) by a momentary tap of the
SET-ACCEL switch. Multiple taps of the SET-ACCEL switch
will increase your vehicle speed 1 mph (1.6 km/h) for each
tap. For example, if you are currently set at 60 mph
(96 km/h) and tap the SET-ACCEL switch 5 times your
vehicle speed will increase and set at 65 mph (104 km/h).
You can cancel the speed control while you are driving.
■ Press the OFF switch. The speed control is off. If you want
to resume speed control, press the ON switch and reset the
speed control by pressing the SET ACCEL switch.
[SC10600(ALL)06/94]
■ Press the brake or clutch pedal slightly. The speed control is
suspended, but you can reset it by pressing SET ACCEL or
return to the previous set speed with the RSM switch.
*[SC10800(ALL)10/95]
In addition, the speed control is turned off each time you turn
the vehicle ignition off.
*[SC11100(ALL)11/89]
*[SC11200(ALL)05/95]
Driving uphill or on a steep grade
[SC11300(ALL)05/95]
If the speed control “dropped out” after your climb is
completed, the speed of your light truck can be reset with the
SET ACCEL switch, or returned to the previous set speed with
the RSM switch, as long as you are driving over 30 mph
(50 km/h).
When the speed control is on, your vehicle may significantly
drop speed when driving uphill, especially with a heavy load. If
the speed drops more than 8 to 14 mph (15 - 25 km/h) the
automatic speed control will, by design, be canceled. You may
have to temporarily resume manual speed control while driving
up a steep grade in order to maintain the speed you desire.
145
File:07unscx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:06:35 1996
*[SC11500(ALL)08/95]
*[SC11600(ALL)06/95]
Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed
*[SC11700(ALL)08/95]
To resume the speed you had before, you must be driving at
least 30 mph (50 km/h).
*[SC11800(ALL)05/93]
Press and release the RSM switch. Your vehicle gradually
returns to the previously set speed and then maintains it.
%
If you press the brake pedal, the speed control is cancelled. You
can return to the speed you set by using the RSM switch, as
long as you did not press the OFF switch.
*[SC11850(ALL)03/95]
RWARNING
If your vehicle has speed control, do not use it on
slippery roads. You could lose control of your vehicle
and could injure someone.
[SC12000( X)06/95]
Speed Control Indicator (If equipped)
[SC12100( X)08/94]
A SPEED CONTROL light is displayed in the instrument cluster
when the speed control system is engaged. The display will turn
off when the brake pedal is pressed or if speed control is shut
off.
*[SC12200( X)05/95]
This display does not indicate any problems with the speed
control, but is simply a convenient way of knowing when it is
active.
146
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV00350(ALL)02/95]
Your vehicle has a variety of features designed for your
comfort, convenience and safety. Read this chapter to find out
about standard and optional features.
*[FV00601(ALL)01/95]
*[FV00701(ALL)06/95]
Doors
%
Door Handles and Locks
[FV00901( X)08/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020548-C
Inside handles
147
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV01502( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Outside handles and locks
art:0021367-A
[FV01600( X)10/95]
Two step unlock feature (if equipped)
[FV01620( X)10/95]
This feature allows you to unlock all vehicle doors with the key.
[FV01640( X)10/95]
1. Unlock driver door with key.
[FV01660( X)12/95]
2. Repeat unlock procedure within 5 seconds. All doors will
unlock when the key is returned to the vertical position
(position of the key before removal).
[FV01680( X)10/95]
NOTE: This feature can be activated by all outside locks on
vehicles equipped with keyless entry.
*[FV01801(ALL)03/95]
*[FV01901(ALL)10/89]
Anti-theft front door lock knobs
%
Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to preclude unlocking the
door by pulling up on the bullet type lock knob. To unlock and
open the front door from the inside of the vehicle, pull on the
inside door handle.
148
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV02001( X)01/91]
Setting the Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors
*[FV02101( X)03/95]
In addition to standard or power locks, your vehicle has
childproof locks for the rear doors. If you set these locks, the
rear doors cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle. The
doors can still be opened from the outside when the lock knobs
are raised.
[FV02300( X)08/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020545-C
The child lock lever
*[FV02401( X)03/95]
To set the childproof lock on each rear door, open the rear
door.
[FV02601( X)01/95]
Find the lever near the white label with the word LOCKED in
green letters. Move the lever up.
*[FV02801( X)03/95]
To release the childproof lock, open the rear door from the
outside.
*[FV03001( X)06/95]
Move the lever down.
149
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV04900( X)08/94]
Liftgate Handle and Locks
[FV05000( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020550-F
Liftgate handle and locks
[FV05100( X)11/89]
You can unlock the liftgate by using the key. To open the
liftgate, rotate the handle clockwise and to open the liftgate
window, rotate the handle counterclockwise.
[FV05200( X)05/95]
You can lock the liftgate by using the key, pushing the lock
button down, or using the power door lock switch on the left
side of the cargo area.
*[FV05300( X)10/89]
Make certain that you close the liftgate door and window before
driving your vehicle. If you do not, possible damage may occur
to the liftgate door lift cylinders and attaching hardware.
*[FV05400( X)08/95]
RWARNING
When driving your vehicle make sure that the liftgate
door and window are closed to prevent exhaust fumes
from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
cargo from falling out.
*[FV05900( X)12/93]
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers. You
can open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle. It
cannot be opened from inside the cargo area.
150
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV11000( X)05/95]
Cargo Area Shade (If equipped)
[FV11201( X)03/91]
This removable shade hides cargo and also secures lightweight
objects in the cargo area of your vehicle.
*[FV11401( X)03/91]
*[FV11601( X)05/90]
To install the shade:
[FV11700( X)05/95]
*[FV11801( X)03/93]
*[FV12001( X)05/90]
[FV12200( X)05/95]
1. Position the shade in the mounting brackets located behind
the rear seat on each rear trim panel.
The tongue end of the shade should face the rear of your
vehicle.
2. Grasp the end of the shade and pull it toward you.
3. Hook the sides of the outstretched shade to notch in the rear
trim panels near the liftgate opening.
RWARNING
To avoid possible injury during a sudden stop or a
collision, the cover should be attached to the brackets,
when not in use.
151
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV12400( X)10/94]
17-1/2 pica art:0020547-F
The cargo shade
*[FV12600( X)05/91]
The shade is a wind-up type, just like a window shade. Over
time the shade may lose its spring tension. If this happens, you
can easily rewind the shade with the help of another person.
*[FV12700( X)05/91]
To rewind the shade:
[FV12800( X)06/94]
1. Remove the shade from its side anchor slots by compressing
telescoping tube.
*[FV12900( X)05/91]
2. Extend the shade fully. Make sure the smooth grain side is
*[FV13000( X)05/91]
3. Wrap the vinyl around the roller tube two times in the
*[FV13100( X)05/91]
4. Tuck the edges of the vinyl inside the end cap with each
facing you (see Figure 1).
direction shown in Figure 1.
wrap.
152
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV13200( X)05/91]
5. Fold the edges of the vinyl toward the center. Make sure the
*[FV13300( X)05/91]
6. While holding the vinyl and roller tube as shown in Figure
*[FV13400( X)05/91]
7. Wind the shade 14 revolutions in the direction shown in
edges of the vinyl clear the end cap slots (see Figure 2). Use
masking tape or a rubber band to hold the vinyl on the left
side of the roller tube.
2, push the right end cap (marked with an “R”) about 1/4
inch to disengage the clutch.
Figure 2. (The wind direction is also marked on the end
cap.)
[FV13500( X)05/94]
10-1/2 pica
Figure 1
art:0021202-A
153
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV13600( X)05/94]
10-1/2 pica
Figure 2
art:0021203-A
*[FV13700( X)05/91]
8. Let go of the right end cap. The clutch should now engage
*[FV13800( X)05/91]
*[FV13900( X)05/91]
9. Unfold the vinyl and place it into the end cap slots.
*[FV14000( X)05/91]
and stop the shade from losing its spring tension.
10. With the vinyl fully wound around the roller tube, insert the
shade into the side mounting brackets. NOTE: The opening
for the right mounting bracket is narrower than the left.
11. Check to see that the shade operates properly.
154
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
%
*[FV14100(ALL)04/95]
Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV14500( X)05/95]
The power door lock switches are located in the front doors and
in the driver side trim panel of the cargo area. To lock all doors
push the switch button marked L. To unlock all doors push the
switch button marked U.
*[FV14701(ALL)03/91]
The manual door locks will override the power door lock
controls.
[FV15201( X)04/94]
24 pica art:0020553-C
Power door lock controls
155
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV15203( X)09/95]
*[FV15205( X)02/95]
%
Using the Keyless Entry System (If equipped)
If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, you can lock or
unlock the vehicle doors without using a key. The buttons for
the system are near the outside door handle on the driver’s
side. See also Remote Entry System which follows this
description.
[FV15207( X)02/95]
10-1/2 pica
Keyless entry buttons
art:0021158-A
*[FV15209( X)02/95]
When you bought your vehicle, you were given a computer
code that operates the system for your vehicle. For your
convenience, we have duplicated this code in two places.
*[FV15211( X)09/95]
*[FV15213( X)09/95]
*[FV15217( X)02/95]
*[FV15219( X)05/95]
The code is:
■ on your owner’s wallet card found in the glove compartment
■ taped to the computer module
When you use this entry system, the illuminated entry system
turns on the interior lights for 25 seconds and the buttons on
the keypad light up for 5 seconds. Do not push the buttons
with a key, ballpoint pen, pencil or any other hard object. These
objects could damage the buttons.
156
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV15273( X)09/95]
*[FV15275( X)02/95]
Programming your own entry code
*[FV15277( X)09/95]
*[FV15279( X)09/95]
*[FV15281( X)09/95]
*[FV15283( X)09/95]
*[FV15285( X)09/95]
To program your own code:
%
*[FV15287( X)09/95]
You can program a personal code to unlock your vehicle with
the keypad. This code does not replace the permanent code that
the dealership gave you. Use your personal code in the same
manner as you would your original code.
1. Select five digits for your personal code.
2. Enter the permanent code that the dealership gave you.
3. Within five seconds, press 1/2.
4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enter your personal
code, pressing each digit within five seconds of the previous
digit.
The keyless entry system registers this second code. To open
your vehicle, you can now use either code. The module
remembers only one personal code at a time. Entering a
second personal code will erase the first, replacing it with
the new second one.
*[FV15289( X)09/95]
*[FV15291( X)09/95]
*[FV15293( X)09/95]
*[FV15295( X)09/95]
*[FV15297( X)09/95]
To erase your personal code:
*[FV15299( X)09/95]
Do not set a code that presents the numbers in sequential order,
such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0. Studies show that people who
idly press the buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,
do not select a code that uses the same button five times.
Thieves can easily figure out these types of codes.
1. Enter the original permanent code.
2. Press 1/2 within five seconds of Step 1.
3. Wait six seconds.
The keyless entry system automatically erases your personal
code. The system will now only respond to the permanent
code.
157
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV15301( X)09/95]
*[FV15303( X)02/95]
%
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system
You must unlock the driver’s door before you unlock any of the
other doors. If you let more than five seconds pass between
pressing numbers, the system shuts down, and you have to
enter the code again. The system has shut down if the keypad
light is out. If the keyless entry system does not work properly,
use the key or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock the doors.
*[FV15305( X)09/95]
1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory code or your
[FV15307( X)04/95]
2. To unlock the passenger’s door(s), press the 3/4 button
personal code. All codes have five numbers. After you press
the fifth number, the driver’s door unlocks.
within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s door or re-enter
the code to open the driver’s door, then press 3/4.
*[FV15309( X)09/95]
*[FV15311( X)09/95]
Locking the doors with the keyless entry system
*[FV15313( X)02/95]
To lock all of the doors, press 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time. It
is not necessary to first enter the keypad code. This will arm
your factory installed anti-theft system, if so equipped.
*[FV15320( X)05/95]
Arming, disarming and resetting your anti-theft
system (If equipped) from the keyless entry pad
*[FV15330( X)05/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional factory installed
anti-theft system, the keyless entry system will arm it when you
use the 7/8 and 9/0 keys to lock the doors, and will disarm or
reset a triggered anti-theft alarm when you enter in the five
digit code to unlock the driver’s door.
*[FV15340( X)09/95]
NOTE: Doors and the liftgate must be fully closed for the
anti-theft system to arm. Refer to the Anti-Theft
System section in this chapter for more details.
Along with unlocking your doors, you can use the keyless entry
system to lock the doors. You can also use the Autolock feature
to automatically lock the doors after you get in the vehicle.
158
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
% [FV15350( X)02/95]
Autolock (With automatic transmission vehicles only)
*[FV15351( X)02/95]
The Autolock feature is part of your remote keyless entry
system and is enabled at the factory. With the Autolock feature
enabled, all of the doors will automatically lock when:
[FV15353( X)02/95]
■ the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate window are fully
closed
*[FV15355( X)09/95]
*[FV15356( X)02/95]
*[FV15358( X)02/95]
*[FV15359( X)02/95]
*[FV15360( X)09/95]
[FV15361( X)02/95]
■ the ignition key is turned to the ON position
■ the brake pedal is pressed
■ you shift through (Reverse)
■ the brake pedal is released
The Autolock feature will repeat when:
■ a door is opened and then all doors, liftgate and liftgate
window are closed
*[FV15362( X)02/95]
*[FV15363( X)04/95]
■ the brake pedal is released
*[FV15364( X)02/95]
The doors may not lock automatically at the correct time if the
driver:
*[FV15365( X)02/95]
*[FV15366( X)02/95]
*[FV15367( X)02/95]
■ shifts through gears without pressing the brake
*[FV15368( X)05/95]
*[FV15369( X)06/95]
To deactivate the Autolock system:
*[FV15370( X)09/95]
You can deactivate the system by using the buttons for the
keyless entry system if you don’t want to use the Autolock
feature.
■ shifts through gears quickly after starting the vehicle
■ releases their foot from the brake while someone has stepped
out of the vehicle for a moment
1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code (not the personal
code you may have set).
2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.
159
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV15371( X)09/95]
*[FV15373( X)09/95]
*[FV15375( X)02/95]
*[FV15377( X)04/95]
[FV15379( X)02/95]
3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release 3/4.
4. Release 7/8.
To reactivate the Autolock system, simply repeat the instructions
for deactivating the system. By re-entering the code that
deactivates the Autolock, the keyless entry system reinstates the
Autolock feature.
You can also deactivate or reactivate the Autolock feature by
this method:
1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed or triggered,
ignition is off, and all doors and liftgate window are closed.
*[FV15381( X)02/95]
*[FV15383( X)02/95]
*[FV15385( X)02/95]
*[FV15387( X)02/95]
*[FV15389( X)02/95]
2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.
*[FV15391( X)02/95]
7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30 seconds and
*[FV15393( X)02/95]
*[FV15395( X)02/95]
*[FV15397( X)02/95]
8. Press the door power unlock button.
*[FV15399( X)02/95]
*[FV15401( X)02/95]
3. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.
5. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30 seconds of step
2.
repeat steps 1 through 6.
9. Press the door power lock button.
10. The horn will chirp once if the Autolock feature was
deactivated, twice (one short chirp followed by a long chirp)
if the Autolock feature was activated.
11. Turn the ignition OFF.
12. The horn will chirp once to confirm that you activated or
deactivated the Autolock feature.
160
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV15425(ALL)05/95]
*[FV15500( X)02/95]
Remote Entry System (If equipped)
*[FV15600( X)06/95]
The system will work with up to four transmitters. Your vehicle
came with two transmitters. Additional transmitters can be
ordered from your dealer.
*[FV15700(ALL)02/95]
The remote entry features only operate with the ignition in the
OFF position.
%
If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you can lock or
unlock the vehicle doors and liftgate without using a key. The
remote also has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the
system are located on the two hand held transmitters that came
with your vehicle.
[FV15800(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021159-A
The remote entry transmitter
*[FV15901(ALL)02/95]
*[FV16001(ALL)02/95]
*[FV16201( X)02/95]
Unlocking the doors with the remote entry system
*[FV16300(ALL)02/95]
*[FV16450( X)02/95]
Locking the doors with the remote entry system
[FV16490( X)02/95]
If you would like a signal that the doors are being locked, press
the LOCK button again within five seconds. If all doors, liftgate
%
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button.
To unlock the other doors and liftgate, press the UNLOCK
button a second time, within five seconds after the first
UNLOCK.
To lock all the doors and liftgate, press the LOCK button. This
will also arm the factory installed Anti-Theft system.
161
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
and the liftgate window are completely closed, the doors and
liftgate will lock again, the horn will chirp and the external
lamps will flash. If a door, liftgate or the liftgate window is
open or ajar, the horn will give two short chirps warning you
that a door or the liftgate is open.
*[FV16800(ALL)02/95]
*[FV16900(ALL)02/95]
Remote entry personal alarm
*[FV17000(ALL)02/95]
When you use the remote entry UNLOCK or PANIC buttons,
the illuminated entry system turns on the vehicle’s interior
lights for 25 seconds. You can turn these lights off with the
remote entry LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the ON
or ACCESSORY position.
%
If you wish to activate the remote entry system personal alarm,
press the PANIC button. This will honk the horn and flash the
lights for approximately 2 minutes 45 seconds. You can turn it
off by pressing the PANIC button again from the transmitter or
by turning the ignition to the ON or ACCESSORY position.
[FV17100(ALL)03/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0021160-A
%
*[FV17200(ALL)04/95]
*[FV17350(ALL)04/95]
Arming and Disarming the Alarm System with Remote
Entry
Your Remote Entry System will automatically arm the factory
installed Anti-Theft System when the doors are locked, and
automatically disarm it when the doors are unlocked. The
remote will also reset the anti-theft alarm (when the driver’s
door is unlocked or the PANIC button is pressed on a
programmed remote entry transmitter) if it was triggered.
162
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV17400(ALL)04/95]
The remote entry system may not arm and disarm non-factory
installed anti-theft systems.
[FV17425( X)03/95]
Remote Memory Seat Feature (If equipped)
[FV17452( X)03/95]
Your vehicle allows the remote keyless entry system to control
the Memory Seat system (see Memory Seat section of this Owner
Guide). With this feature, each of the first three transmitters
programmed will recall a different seat position.
[FV17453( X)03/95]
The feature is turned on at the factory for your convenience.
[FV17454( X)05/93]
Pressing the transmitter UNLOCK button once will unlock the
driver’s door and move the seat to its corresponding memory
seat position, just as if you had pressed the memory seat button
in the vehicle.
*[FV17456( X)01/95]
When your dealer programs new transmitters, the order of
programming controls seat recall as follows:
[FV17458( X)03/95]
■ First transmitter programmed — recall seat position #1
[FV17460( X)03/95]
■ Second transmitter programmed — recall seat position #2
[FV17462( X)03/95]
■ Third transmitter programmed — recall seat position #3
[FV17464( X)03/95]
■ Fourth transmitter programmed — NO recall (Memory Seat
allows only three memory positions)
[FV17466( X)05/03]
You may change seat positions at any time. Once programmed,
Transmitter #1 will always move the seat to position #1.
[FV17483( X)03/95]
You can deactivate or reactivate the remote Memory Seat
feature:
[FV17485( X)02/95]
1. Make sure the anti-theft system is not armed or triggered,
ignition is off, and all doors and liftgate window are closed.
*[FV17490( X)02/95]
*[FV17495( X)02/95]
*[FV17500( X)02/95]
2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to RUN.
3. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
4. Turn the ignition key from RUN to OFF.
163
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV17505( X)02/95]
*[FV17510( X)02/95]
5. Press the door power unlock button 3 times.
*[FV17515( X)02/95]
7. The horn should chirp once. If not, wait 30 seconds and
[FV17520( X)06/04]
8. Press the door power unlock button twice.
*[FV17525( X)02/95]
9. Press the door power lock button.
[FV17530( X)03/95]
10. The horn will chirp twice if the remote Memory Seat feature
6. Turn the ignition key back to RUN within 30 seconds of
step 2.
repeat steps 1 through 6.
was deactivated, three times (two short chirps followed by a
long chirp) if the remote Memory Seat feature was activated.
*[FV17535( X)02/95]
11. Turn the ignition OFF.
[FV17540( X)03/95]
12. The horn will chirp once to confirm that you activated or
deactivated the remote Memory Seat feature.
[FV17542( X)03/95]
To reactivate the remote Memory Seat system, simply repeat the
instructions for deactivating the system. By reentering the code
that deactivates the remote Memory Seat, the keyless entry
system reinstates the feature.
[FV17545( X)09/95]
NOTE: The Memory Seat function will continue to work from
the door switch even when deactivated at the remote
keyless entry module. Only remote Memory Seat
recall can be deactivated.
*[FV17551(ALL)02/95]
*[FV17601(ALL)02/95]
Replacing the batteries
%
The remote entry transmitter is powered by two coin type
three-volt lithium 2016 batteries (included) that should last for
several years of normal use. If you notice a significant decrease
in operating range, the batteries should be replaced.
Replacement batteries can be purchased at most pharmacies,
watch stores or at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
164
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV17701(ALL)02/95]
NOTE: The operating range of the remote entry system can
also be affected by weather conditions (such as very
cold temperatures) or structures around the vehicle
(buildings, other vehicles, radio and TV towers, etc.).
Typical operating range will allow you to be up to 33
feet (10 meters) away from your vehicle.
[FV17801(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021161-A
Opening the remote transmitter
*[FV17901(ALL)02/95]
The transmitter can be snapped apart to replace the batteries by
twisting a thin coin between the two halves of the transmitter.
DO NOT TAKE THE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTER
APART. When installing the new batteries, be sure to place the
positive (+) side down as marked. Snap the two halves back
together.
[FV18001(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021162-A
Replacing the batteries
165
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
%
*[FV18101(ALL)02/95]
Replacing lost transmitters
[FV18200(ALL)07/95]
In the event a transmitter is lost, you should take your vehicle’s
transmitters to your dealer to have the remote entry system
deprogrammed for the lost transmitter. This is necessary to
prevent further unauthorized use of the lost transmitter.
*[FV18301(ALL)02/95]
You can also purchase additional transmitters (up to 4
transmitters can be used) from your dealer. You will need to
take all your transmitters to the dealer so they can program
them to the remote entry system all at the same time.
*[FV18601(ALL)04/95]
*[FV18701(ALL)06/95]
Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)
*[FV18801(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The inside lights will not turn off if you have turned
them on with the dimmer thumbwheel or if any door
is open.
[FV18810( X)10/94]
Delayed Accessory
[FV18815( X)08/94]
This feature provides power to operate the power windows and
power moon roof for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned from the RUN to the OFF position.
[FV18820( X)06/94]
If either front door is opened during the 10 minute period the
delayed accessory feature will be disabled.
*[FV18900(ALL)08/94]
*[FV19000(ALL)03/95]
Battery Saver
%
%
This system will provide illumination of the vehicle’s interior
courtesy lamps when either outside front door handle is pulled
or when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door or
sound the personal alarm. The system will automatically turn
off after approximately 25 seconds or when the ignition is
turned to the RUN or ACC position.
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will turn off battery
voltage to all of these lights after 40 minutes: glove box, engine
compartment, overhead console, mirror, courtesy and
interior (including cargo) lamps.
166
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV19100( X)03/95]
This will prevent draining of the battery if these lights have
been left on inadvertently or if a door or the liftgate is not
completely closed. Battery voltage to these lamps will be
restored when the remote entry transmitter is used, any door is
opened, the liftgate is opened, or the ignition key is turned ON
again.
*[FV19104(ALL)09/95]
*[FV19106(ALL)05/95]
Anti-Theft Alarm System (If equipped)
%
%
*[FV19109(ALL)05/95]
When armed, this system helps protect your vehicle against
break-ins or theft.
When an unauthorized entry occurs, the system triggers and
will:
*[FV19112( X)02/95]
*[FV19115(ALL)06/95]
*[FV19118(ALL)05/95]
■ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, and theft indicator lamp
% [FV19121(ALL)02/95]
Arming the System
*[FV19124(ALL)04/95]
The system is ready to arm any time the ignition switch is
turned OFF and the alarm is not triggered or sounding. Any of
the following events will prearm the anti-theft system:
[FV19130(ALL)04/95]
■ Pressing the remote entry transmitter LOCK button to lock
■ honk the horn
■ disable the starting circuit to prevent the vehicle from being
started
the doors (with the doors open or closed),
[FV19133( X)04/95]
■ Pressing the 7/8 and 9/0 buttons on the keyless entry
keypad at the same time to lock the doors (with the doors
open or closed), or
*[FV19136(ALL)04/95]
■ Opening a door and pressing the power door lock button to
*[FV19140( X)04/95]
If a door, liftgate or liftgate window is open, the anti-theft
system is prearmed and waiting for all doors to close. The
THEFT indicator in the instrument panel will light continuously
while the system is prearmed.
lock the doors.
167
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV19145( X)04/95]
■ Close all doors, liftgate and liftgate window
*[FV19149( X)04/95]
Once all doors, liftgate and liftgate window are closed, if any
were open, the system will begin a 30 second countdown to
become armed. The 30 second countdown allows people who
may still be in the vehicle time to exit without triggering the
alarm. The THEFT indicator will glow steadily until the system
is armed. When the system is armed, the THEFT indicator will
begin to flash with short flashes every 2 seconds until the
system is triggered or disarmed.
*[FV19153( X)02/95]
Remember, all doors, the liftgate and liftgate window must be
fully closed for the anti-theft system to arm. If a door, the
liftgate or liftgate window has been left open or ajar, and you
press the remote entry transmitter twice to confirm the doors
are locked, two short horn chirps will warn you that the
anti-theft system is not arming.
*[FV19155(ALL)02/95]
When you get a single horn chirp by pressing the LOCK button
twice within 5 seconds on your remote entry transmitter, you
can be assured that all doors are locked and the anti-theft
system is arming.
% [FV19157(ALL)02/95]
Disarming the System
*[FV19160(ALL)10/95]
*[FV19162(ALL)04/95]
An armed or activated system can be disarmed if you:
*[FV19163( X)04/95]
■ Unlock the doors by entering the unlock code on the keyless
*[FV19187( X)02/95]
*[FV19190(ALL)02/95]
*[FV19196(ALL)04/95]
■ Unlock any door or the liftgate with a key.
■ Unlock the doors by pressing the remote entry transmitter
UNLOCK button.
entry keypad.
■ Turn ignition to the ON or ACC position.
■ Pressing the remote entry PANIC button will disarm the
anti-theft system only when the anti-theft alarm is triggered
and sounding.
168
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV19200(ALL)02/95]
When unlocking the vehicle with a key, turn the key all the
way to the end of its travel or the system may not disarm.
*[FV19202(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The flashing lights and honking horn will shut off
automatically within 2 minutes 45 seconds after the
system is triggered. It will trigger again if another
intrusion occurs. However, the starter circuit remains
disabled until the system is disarmed.
*[FV19205(ALL)05/95]
The anti-theft system is designed to work with the factory
installed remote entry system. It may not work with other
remote entry systems.
[FV19210( X)06/94]
Automatic Ride Control System
(If equipped)
[FV19213( X)03/95]
The automatic ride control system is designed to improve ride,
handling, and general vehicle performance for both on and
off-road conditions by adjusting vehicle ride height and shock
dampening (firm or soft).
[FV19216( X)08/94]
The system automatically controls the vehicle ride height over a
range of approximately two inches based on vehicle speed and
selection of two or four wheel drive modes. Also, the system
keeps the vehicle at a constant level if a load is added to or
removed from the vehicle.
[FV19218( X)03/95]
The automatic ride control system places the vehicle at its
lowest height when two wheel drive is selected. Shock
dampening is automatically set based on driver and road inputs
to optimize ride.
[FV19220( X)03/95]
The automatic ride control system raises the vehicle
approximately one inch when Auto 4WD is selected. However,
if vehicle speed exceeds 58 mph (93 km/h), the system will
lower the vehicle to its two wheel drive height to maximize ride
comfort. The vehicle will raise again if vehicle speed is less than
30 mph (48 km/h) for one minute. Like the two wheel drive
mode, shock dampening is automatically set based on driver
and road inputs.
169
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV19224( X)03/95]
In 4WD Low, the automatic ride control system raises the
vehicle approximately two inches above its lowest height. Shock
dampening is locked in firm mode. The height change improves
body clearance. The combination of firm dampening and the
height change also provides maximum suspension feedback for
improved off-road safety and performance.
[FV19226( X)03/95]
The vehicle will drop to its lowest position when the ignition is
turned OFF to provide ease of entry and exit of the vehicle.
[FV19229( X)03/95]
As a safety consideration, whenever a door is opened, including
the liftgate and liftgate glass, the system memorizes and
maintains the height at the moment the door was opened. The
system will maintain this height until either the doors are all
closed or vehicle speed exceeds 10 mph (16 km/h).
[FV19234( X)03/95]
An on-board air compressor and solenoids are used to raise and
lower the vehicle. It is normal to occasionally hear a buzz or
clicking from the vehicle even when the ignition is turned off.
The system stays energized for forty minutes after ignition is
turned off to compensate for any load changes made after the
vehicle is parked.
[FV19237( X)05/95]
The automatic ride control system operation can be monitored
through the message center. Refer to Message Center in the
Warning Lights and Gauges chapter for more details.
[FV19240( X)08/94]
Service Switch
[FV19243( X)08/94]
The automatic ride control service switch is mounted in the jack
storage area. The switch should be turned off to disable the
automatic ride control system during jacking, hoisting, towing,
or transport of the vehicle to avoid unexpected vehicle
movement.
170
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV19246( X)03/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021253-A
*[FV19250(ALL)02/95]
*[FV19300(ALL)08/95]
*[FV19400(ALL)08/95]
%
Automatic Ride Control service switch
Windows
Operating the Windows Manually
The door windows are opened and closed by turning the handle
crank.
[FV19600(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021163-A
Manual window operation
171
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV20801( X)05/95]
Flip quarter window (2 door model only)
[FV20900( X)03/91]
To open, press outward on the window latches, then depress
the levers on each side of the latch and pull inward. Move the
latch out and into the open position. To close, depress the levers
on each side of the latch. Lift the latch and pull inward, then
press latch outward to lock the levers.
[FV21000( X)03/90]
10-1/2 pica
Flip quarter window
art:0020680-B
%
*[FV22901(ALL)03/91]
Using the Power Windows (If equipped)
[FV23001(ALL)08/94]
Each door has a power control that opens and closes the
window on that door. The driver’s door has a master control
switch that operates all door windows. You must place the
ignition switch in the ON or ACC position to use your power
window controls.
[FV23101( X)02/92]
One touch down driver’s power window operation
[FV23201( X)01/95]
The one touch down power window feature allows you to
completely open the driver’s window without holding down the
window switch. To open the window completely, press the
window switch to the down position for less than 1/2 second,
then release it. If the switch is pressed while the window is
going down, the window will stop at that position.
172
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV23401( X)04/95]
To close the window, hold the window switch to the up
position until the window closes.
*[FV23501(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not let children play with the power windows. They
may seriously hurt themselves. Make sure occupants are
clear of the window(s) before closing.
[FV23701( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090162-A
Master control switch
173
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
%
*[FV24101(ALL)01/95]
Seats
[FV24250( X)10/94]
Four-Way Head Restraints (If equipped)
[FV24325(ALL)06/94]
Adjust the head restraints so that the cushion contacts the back
of your head when you move your head rearward.
[FV24350( X)10/94]
The head restraint may be adjusted in four directions. To raise
or lower the head restraint, push in the lock release button. The
button is located on the outboard side of the post of the head
restraint for the driver’s side and the inboard side for the
passenger side. To adjust the head restraint forward or
rearward, simply push or pull head restraint to desired position.
[FV24650( X)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021021-B
Adjusting the head restraint (limited)
*[FV24801(ALL)05/90]
*[FV25920(ALL)06/95]
%
Adjusting the Front Seat Manually
To move the front seat forward or rearward:
[FV25930(ALL)08/94]
1. Find the adjustment bar at lower front of the front seat.
[FV25940(ALL)10/94]
2. Lift bar upward to unlatch the seat.
*[FV25950(ALL)08/95]
3. Move the seat to the desired position.
[FV25960(ALL)10/94]
4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new position. Make
sure the seat latches securely in place.
174
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV25970(ALL)10/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0021273-A
*[FV26001(ALL)08/95]
Adjusting the bucket seat
RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
*[FV26100(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
*[FV26200(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision, always
drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
*[FV26300(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a collision,
children should always ride with the seatback upright.
175
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV26400(ALL)08/94]
Reclining Bucket Seats (If equipped)
*[FV27301( X)02/92]
*[FV27401( X)03/93]
You can tilt the seat back of your bucket seats backward.
1. On the outboard side of the seat, lift the recliner handle up
and hold it in place.
*[FV27501( X)10/89]
2. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust it to the position
[FV27601( X)10/94]
3. Release the handle to latch the seat back in place.
*[FV27701( X)10/89]
4. To return the seat back upright, lift the handle and lean
[FV27751(ALL)08/94]
you want.
forward.
Lifting the recliner handle of an unoccupied seat will allow the
seat back to fold forward for access to the rear. Pushing the seat
back with the release handle raised returns the seat back to the
upright position.
[FV27800(ALL)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Reclining bucket seat
art:0021165-A
176
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV28100( X)10/89]
Folding Rear Seat
[FV28201( X)11/89]
2 door models
[FV28301( X)10/89]
To fold down the rear split seat:
[FV28401( X)05/95]
Rotate the head restraint fully forward. Lower the head restraint
to the top of the seatback. Pull upward on the latch release
handle at the side of the seatback, while pulling the seatback
forward with the other hand. Push the seatback downward until
the latch engages in the full down position.
[FV28601( X)05/95]
To return the system to the seating position, pull upward on the
latch release handle while rotating the seat upward until seat
back latches in the upright position.
[FV28701( X)11/89]
The inboard safety belt buckle will not be damaged by this
operation. The buckles will automatically return to original
position when seat is upright.
[FV28801( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020226-F
Folding rear seat (two door model)
[FV28901( X)11/89]
4 door models
[FV28902( X)06/95]
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a built-in child seat,
the seatback cannot be folded down unless the
built-in child seat is fully stowed.
177
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV29000( X)10/89]
[FV29101( X)10/94]
To fold down the rear split seat:
1. Push the lower release handle (located on side of seat)
downward to unlatch the seat back latch.
[FV29201( X)10/94]
2. Rotate the seat downward into the latched load floor
position.
[FV29251( X)09/95]
NOTE: When you hear a “click” type sound, this ensures the
seatback will be in the latched load floor position.
[FV29301( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020664-E
Folding rear seat (four door model)
[FV29401( X)08/94]
To return the seat to the upright, locked seating position:
[FV29501( X)10/94]
1. Push downward on the upper outboard corner of the
seatback and hold.
[FV29601( X)10/94]
2. Lift the lower release handle upward to unlatch the seat
back latch.
[FV29701( X)10/94]
3. Rotate seat upward until seat back latches in the upright
position.
178
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV29801( X)08/94]
Reclining Rear Seat (If equipped)
[FV29811( X)08/94]
To recline the rear seatback:
[FV29821( X)08/94]
■ Turn the recliner handle (upper handle) rearward while
pushing the seatback rearward.
[FV29826( X)10/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0021285-B
[FV29831( X)08/94]
To return the seatback from the recline position:
[FV29841( X)08/94]
■ Turn the recliner handle (upper handle) rearward. The
seatback will automatically return to its upright position.
179
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV46005(ALL)08/94]
Tilt Slide Seat (If equipped)
[FV46015( X)03/93]
2 door models only
[FV46020(ALL)08/94]
With the front seatback tilted forward, the tilt slide seat can be
moved to provide additional entry space to access the rear seat
compartment of the vehicle.
*[FV46025(ALL)05/94]
To operate the tilt slide seat:
[FV46030(ALL)08/94]
1. Lift the seatback release lever on the outboard side of the
seat cushion to unlock the slide mechanism and seatback.
*[FV46035(ALL)03/93]
2. Push the seat assembly forward to provide entry space to the
*[FV46037(ALL)08/94]
RWARNING
rear seat compartment of the vehicle.
Do not place objects behind or under the front seat
which can prevent the seat from returning to the locked
position.
[FV46040(ALL)08/94]
3. With the seatback still forward, using the seat cushion push
the seat rearward to the desired position and return the
seatback to its upright position. This will lock the seat track.
[FV46043(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Whenever the seatback is returned to the upright
position, the seat will lock in that seat position.
*[FV46052(ALL)10/94]
NOTE: The seat can no longer be moved rearward when in
its latched position.
180
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV46055(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Tilt slide seat
art:0021166-A
*[FV46065(ALL)05/95]
Prior to operating the vehicle, check to ensure that the seat
assembly is locked by pushing or pulling the seat forward or
rearward. If seat does not lock, repeat steps 2 and 3.
[FV46070(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Locking tilt slide seat
art:0021167-B
181
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV46075(ALL)03/93]
[FV46080(ALL)10/94]
To operate the seat adjuster:
4. To adjust the seats forward or rearward, locate the release
bar at the lower front area of the seat cushion. Lift the
release bar and hold until the desired seat position is
obtained, then release the bar to relock the seat.
[FV46085(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Adjusting seat
art:0021168-B
[FV46100(ALL)02/91]
60/40 Split Front Bench (If equipped)
[FV46200( X)10/90]
The seat back release operates the same as the basic bucket seat.
On two door models both seats have the slide tilt feature.
[FV46500( X)08/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020637-C
60/40 split front bench
182
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV46600(ALL)05/95]
*[FV46700(ALL)08/94]
%
Using the Power Seats (If equipped)
If your vehicle has the power seat option, you can adjust it in
several directions. The controls are on the outboard side of the
seat.
[FV46800(ALL)08/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020888-B
The power controls on the driver’s seat
[FV46910( X)03/93]
Three Person Memory Seats — Explorer Limited Only
[FV46920( X)03/93]
Your Explorer Limited has a three person memory driver seat
which includes power tracks. The memory switch is located in
the driver door trim panel forward of the power mirror switch.
[FV46925( X)03/93]
It is also equipped with power lumbar support, infinite position
seatback and four way head restraints.
183
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV46926( X)04/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021022-B
The power controls on the driver’s seat
[FV46927( X)03/93]
To adjust the infinite position seatback, pull up on the handle
while leaning against the back of the seat. Release the handle to
lock the seat in its new position. You can tilt the seat back or
bring it forward.
[FV46929( X)08/94]
Lifting the seatback adjustment lever of an unoccupied seat will
allow the seatback to fold forward for access to the rear.
Pushing the seatback backwards with the handle lifted returns
the seat upright.
[FV46930( X)01/93]
To use the memory switch:
[FV46940( X)03/94]
1. After the seat is in the desired position, depress the “SET”
button, then press the “1” button within 5 seconds or until
the light goes off.
184
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV46950( X)03/94]
2. For an alternative memory position, place seat in the second
desired position, depress the “SET” button, then press the
“2” button within 5 seconds or until the light goes off.
[FV46960( X)03/94]
3. For the third memory position, move the seat to the desired
position, depress the “SET” button, then press the “1” and
“2” buttons at the same time within 5 seconds or until the
light goes off.
[FV46970( X)03/94]
To use your memory switch either in Park or Neutral after the
settings are complete, press either the “1”, “2”, or “1 and 2
simultaneously” and the seat will move to that position.
[FV47000(ALL)08/94]
Using the Power Lumbar Support and Side Bolsters
(If equipped)
[FV47200(ALL)08/94]
Inflating the lumbar support and side bolsters
[FV47800(ALL)12/91]
If your vehicle is equipped with this option you can
inflate/deflate the lumbar support pad in the seat back and
inflate/deflate the side bolster pads.
[FV47900(ALL)10/94]
To inflate the bolster pads, push the “+” end of the front rocker
switch. To deflate the bolster pads, push the “s” end of the
switch.
[FV48000(ALL)10/94]
To inflate the lumbar support pad, push the “+” end of the rear
rocker switch. To deflate the lumbar support pad, push the “s”
end of the switch.
185
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV48300(ALL)08/94]
10-1/2 pica
Power lumbar and side bolsters switch — sport bucket seat
art:0021169-C
*[FV48310(ALL)04/95]
% [FV48315(ALL)04/95]
*
*[FV48320(ALL)05/95]
Cleaning the Seats
*[FV48325(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a small, hidden
area of fabric. If the fabric’s color or texture is
adversely affected by a particular cleaner, do not use
it.
[FV48340(ALL)02/96]
Cleaning your vehicle
[FV48345(ALL)02/96]
Leather
[FV48350(ALL)12/95]
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth.
For more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a leather and
vinyl cleaner or a mild soap.
%
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum
cleaner. Remove fresh spots immediately. Follow the directions
that come with the cleaner.
186
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV48400( X)06/94]
Positive Location Floor Mats (If equipped)
[FV48500( X)05/95]
Installation
[FV48600( X)03/93]
1. Move driver’s seat to most rearward position.
[FV48700( X)12/92]
2. Locate driver’s side floor mat in vehicle with rear of mat
against left (outboard) front edge of seat track mounting
bracket (see Figure 1).
[FV48800( X)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020972-B
[FV48900( X)12/92]
3. Use a screwdriver to screw locator post into vehicle
carpeting. Exert pressure while turning to allow locator
"auger point" to pierce floor carpet. Locator will not screw
down tightly, but will rotate freely when installed properly.
[FV49000( X)12/92]
[FV49100( X)12/92]
Usage
4. To remove mat, pull up on rear of mat to un-snap from
locator post (see Figure 2).
[FV49200( X)12/92]
5. To re-install mat, align grommet in mat over locator post
and push down to snap mat in place (see Figure 2).
187
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV49300( X)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020973-B
*[FV50000(ALL)01/95]
% [FV50700( X)01/95]
*
%
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Inside Rearview Mirror
(If equipped)
[FV51600( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
The automatic non-glare mirror
art:0020976-C
*[FV51700( X)01/95]
The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal
state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the
mirror. This mirror functions at night, and has a limited
function at dusk or dawn. From the non-glare state, the mirror
will return to the normal state after a short delay. The delay
starts when the glare goes away. The delay prevents excessive
changing of the mirror as traffic moves behind and around the
vehicle, or on rolling hills and curves.
188
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV51800( X)01/95]
The electronic mirror measures the brightness of the light
coming in from the rear of the vehicle. It automatically makes a
correction in the glare state. The mirror may be turned off in
either the normal or non-glare position.
*[FV51900( X)06/94]
There are two light sensors (photocells) in this mirror. The
sensor that detects rear glare is located inside a window in the
upper RH corner of the mirror. The second light sensor which
determines outside light level is located on the backside of the
mirror case.
*[FV52000( X)01/95]
One important safety feature is that the mirror automatically
returns to the normal position whenever the vehicle is placed in
R (Reverse) (when the mirror is in the ON position). This
feature ensures a bright clear view in the mirror when backing
up.
*[FV52200( X)03/95]
To turn on the automatic mirror, have the key in the ON
position and push the ON button once. The light in the center
of the button will light indicating the mirror is on. To turn the
mirror off push the ON button again.
*[FV52300( X)05/93]
The mirror can be temporarily darkened, if wanted, by pushing
the Dim button. After releasing the button, the mirror will
return to the previous operation mode after a short delay.
189
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV52400( X)06/95]
% [FV52500( X)06/95]
*
%
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If equipped)
Your vehicle may feature illuminated vanity mirrors on the sun
visors. You can turn on the lighted mirror by lifting the mirror
door cover.
[FV52600( X)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021171-B
Visor vanity mirror
*[FV52700( X)05/93]
Visors that are equipped with the lighted vanity mirror also
have an auxiliary visor. The auxiliary visor slides right and left
to cover the windshield when the primary visor is pivoted to
the door window.
[FV52800( X)03/95]
10-1/2 pica
Auxiliary sun visor (right side shown)
art:0090129-A
190
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV54500(ALL)08/91]
*[FV54600(ALL)08/91]
*[FV54800(ALL)01/95]
%
[FV55000(ALL)10/94]
Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors (If equipped)
To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:
1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door panel.
2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the selector switch
to the right or left.
*[FV55200(ALL)01/89]
3. Move the control knob in the direction you want to move
*[FV55400(ALL)06/94]
4. Return the selector switch to the middle position to keep the
the mirror.
mirror in place.
[FV55500(ALL)04/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090159-A
Power mirror control
*[FV55900(ALL)12/91]
*[FV55950(ALL)05/95]
Do not clean the plastic housing of any electric mirror with
gasoline or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
RWARNING
The side view mirror on the right makes objects appear
smaller and farther away than they actually are.
[FV56000( X)03/93]
Heated Mirror Feature (Limited)
*[FV56100( X)03/95]
Both mirrors are heated whenever the Electric Rear Window
Defroster is turned on. Do not remove ice from the mirrors with
a scraper or you could damage them. If the outside mirror glass
is frozen in place, do not attempt to readjust or move the
mirror glass or damage may result.
191
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV56200( X)10/94]
Rear Storage Compartment with Net
(If equipped)
[FV56300( X)12/91]
Your vehicle may have a small storage compartment which is
located on the inside rear passenger quarter panel. This
compartment has a net which will secure small objects.
[FV56400( X)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020564-B
Rear storage compartment with net
*[FV56550( X)02/95]
*[FV56650( X)03/95]
Moon Roof (If equipped)
[FV56750( X)06/94]
The roof console switch is used to open and close the moon
roof. Press and hold the switch until the desired position is
reached. At the fully closed position the motor automatically
turns off.
*[FV56850( X)01/95]
To open the moon roof, press and hold the rear portion of the
switch.
*[FV56950( X)01/95]
To close the moon roof, press and hold the front portion of the
switch.
[FV57050( X)06/94]
To tilt the moon roof into vent position when glass is closed,
press and hold the front portion of the switch.
[FV57150( X)06/94]
To close from the vent position, press and hold the rear portion
of the switch.
%
You can move the moon roof back to open the glass panel, or
you can tilt it up to ventilate the vehicle.
192
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV57350( X)01/95]
The moon roof has a sliding shade that you can manually open
or close to block the sun when the glass panel is shut.
*[FV57450( X)06/94]
To close the sliding shade, pull the shade toward the front of
the vehicle. The shade automatically opens when the moon roof
is opened.
[FV57550( X)06/94]
10-1/2 pica
Moon roof switch
art:0021251-A
193
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV59400(ALL)08/94]
Console (If equipped)
*[FV59500(ALL)12/91]
Your vehicle may have a full console. The full console has the
features shown in the illustration below.
[FV59600( X)08/94]
NOTE: Ford recommends the use of 12 oz. (355 ml.) beverage
cans in the cupholder. With manual transmissions there may be
an interference of the shift lever, when in reverse, with taller
beverage cans.
[FV59700(ALL)07/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090211-A
The features on the console — bucket seats
194
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV59800(ALL)04/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020896-C
Storage armrest — 60/40 split bench
195
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV59900( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090166-A
[FV59930( X)10/94]
[FV59940( X)10/94]
High series console
Replacing the Tissue Box
1. Slide coinholder/tissue tray out of the console in an upward
motion.
[FV59950( X)10/94]
2. Replace tissue box.
[FV59960( X)10/94]
3. Slide coinholder/tissue tray into console locating pins at
bottom of tray. Fit in slots in console bracket.
196
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV60300( X)03/93]
Overhead Console (If equipped)
[FV60400( X)05/95]
Your Explorer comes with an overhead console located between
the sun visors. The console includes:
*[FV60500( X)03/93]
*[FV60600( X)03/93]
*[FV60700( X)03/93]
% [FV60800( X)03/93]
*
*[FV60900( X)05/95]
■ Compass/temperature display
*[FV60920( X)03/93]
The MODE button is used to select one of the following
features:
*[FV60940( X)03/93]
*[FV60960( X)03/93]
*[FV60980( X)03/93]
■ Display Off
■ Map lamps
■ Storage compartment
Compass/Temperature display
This display provides the outside temperature and the compass
direction of the vehicle.
■ Temp in ˚F and Compass
■ Temp in ˚C and Compass
[FV61001( X)07/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090165-A
The electric compass
[FV61100( X)10/94]
Outside temperature display
*[FV61150( X)05/95]
If the outside temperature is below 39˚F (4˚C), the word “ICE”
will flash in the display alternately with the outside temperature
for about one minute.
197
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV61200( X)10/94]
Electronic compass
[FV61500( X)10/94]
Factors affecting compass accuracy
*[FV61600( X)01/95]
The compass reading can be affected when you drive near a
number of things — such as large buildings, bridges, power
lines, and powerful antennas.
*[FV61700( X)05/95]
Your compass can also be affected by magnetic or metallic
objects placed in or on the vehicle. If the compass is giving
inaccurate readings, perform the following compass adjustments.
[FV61800( X)10/94]
Compass adjustments
*[FV61900( X)05/95]
There are two possible adjustments to the compass: Zone and
Calibration.
[FV62050( X)05/95]
Zone adjustment:
*[FV62100( X)03/93]
1. Determine which zone of the country you are in by referring
to the following zone map.
198
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV62200( X)04/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021177-A
Zone map
*[FV62300( X)03/93]
2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “VAR”
*[FV62400( X)03/93]
3. Release the “MODE” button. The display will now show the
*[FV62500( X)03/93]
4. Press the “MODE” button repeatedly (or press and hold in)
*[FV62600( X)03/93]
5. Release the “MODE” button when the desired zone number
*[FV62700( X)05/95]
indicator appears in the display (approximately 4 seconds).
current zone number that is stored in the compass.
until the desired zone number appears in the display (once it
reaches 15, the next press of the button will set it to 1).
is displayed.
After approximately three seconds the display will flash all
segments and then return to normal operation. Zone is now
updated.
199
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV62850( X)05/95]
Calibration adjustment:
*[FV62900( X)03/93]
1. Find an open area that is free from steel structures and high
*[FV63000( X)03/93]
2. Press and hold the “MODE” button until the “CAL”
*[FV63050( X)05/95]
*[FV63100( X)03/93]
*[FV63300( X)03/93]
*[FV63800( X)03/93]
*[FV63900( X)03/93]
%
voltage lines. An open parking lot is a good example.
indicator appears in the display (approximately 8 seconds).
NOTE: You cannot perform calibration unless the display
reads “CAL.”
3. Release the “MODE” button.
4. Once the “CAL” indicator has appeared, drive the vehicle
slowly (less than 3 mph / 5 km/h) in 360˚ circles until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. This will happen within 2 to 3
complete circles.
Map lamps
The map lamps are located in the overhead console. The driver
and passenger side each has its own switch.
[FV64000( X)09/95]
10-1/2 pica
Map lamps (If equipped)
art:0020975-B
200
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
*[FV64100( X)09/95]
*[FV64200( X)03/93]
Storage Compartment (If equipped)
*[FV64300( X)03/93]
The compartment can be used to store a variety of items such
as: tissues, parking pass, cigarettes or sunglasses.
*[FV64400( X)03/93]
*[FV64500( X)03/93]
Use as Garage Door Opener
*[FV64600( X)03/93]
*[FV64700( X)03/93]
Removal of storage clip
%
The storage compartment can be accessed by pushing the
“OPEN” button. The door will open approximately one inch
then it can be manually moved to the full open position.
The door can be converted from “Utility” storage to a housing
and means of actuating a variety of “aftermarket” garage door
opener transmitters.
In order to convert the door, simply remove the utility storage
clip from the back side of the door as shown in the following
illustration.
[FV64800( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
art:0020981-B
201
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
*[FV64900( X)03/93]
*[FV65000( X)03/93]
Installing “aftermarket” transmitter
*[FV65100( X)03/93]
Place the transmitter into the console housing, button down, as
shown. Place the height adapters provided into the back side of
the “GARAGE” button as needed. Some larger transmitters will
not need the adapters, and some smaller ones may need two
adapters.
*[FV65200( X)03/93]
The transmitter can now be activated without opening the door.
Simply depress the “GARAGE” button.
Place the piece of Velcro hook onto your aftermarket
transmitter, opposite side as that of the actuator button.
[FV65300( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
art:0020982-B
202
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV65400( X)03/95]
Rear Console (If equipped)
[FV65500( X)03/95]
Your Explorer comes with a rear console that is located between
the bucket seats. The console includes:
[FV65600( X)08/94]
■ Air vents, with rear seat controls
[FV65700( X)08/94]
■ Radio controls
[FV65800( X)10/94]
■ Beverage holder
[FV65900( X)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090192-A
Rear console
203
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
%
*[FV69900(ALL)03/95]
Power Point Electrical Outlet
[FV70000(ALL)08/94]
The power point outlet should be used in place of the cigarette
lighter for optional electrical accessories.
[FV70100(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter. Use the power point.
[FV70200(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020260-E
Power point electrical outlet
[FV70300( X)10/94]
13-1/2 pica
art:0021275-B
Power point electrical outlet (high series console)
204
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
Features
[FV72500( X)08/94]
Luggage Rack (If equipped)
[FV72600( X)12/92]
Loading the Luggage Rack
[FV72700( X)10/94]
If your vehicle is equipped with the luggage rack, load your
luggage as far back as it will safely go on the rack. Do not
carry more than 100 pounds (45 kg) or cause the vehicle to
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) or its gross axle
weight rating (GAWR front and rear), which are shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
[FV72800( X)2/96]
10-1/2 p art:0020644-G
Luggage rack
[FV72900( X)07/92]
Luggage Rack Adjustment
[FV73000( X)08/94]
The rear crossbar of the luggage rack can be adjusted toward
the front or rear of your vehicle. To unlock the crossbar, slide
the locking switches at each end of the rear crossbar toward the
rear of the vehicle until the word “UNLOCKED” appears. The
crossbar is now free to slide forward or backward in the guide
rails.
[FV73100( X)10/94]
Adjust the crossbar to the desired position and lock into place
by pushing the locking switches on each end of the crossbar
toward the front of the vehicle.
205
File:08unfvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 13:56:40 1996
[FV73200( X)12/92]
The rear rack can be completely removed in the “UNLOCKED”
position by sliding the crossbar toward the rear of the vehicle
until it becomes free of the guide rails.
[FV73300( X)12/92]
“D” Ring Adjustment
[FV73400( X)12/95]
The luggage rack has two “D” rings (one on each side of the
luggage rack guide rails) that can be adjusted to secure cargo.
Turn the “D” rings counterclockwise to loosen. Move the “D”
rings to the desired positions and lock into place by turning the
“D” ring clockwise. The “D” rings should only be tightened by
hand.
[FV73500( X)06/94]
Items should be properly secured to the luggage rack to prevent
them from coming loose and creating a safety hazard on the
roadway.
206
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS00500( X)03/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0060679-A
Luxury Audio System
Electronic Sound Systems
207
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS00550( X)03/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0060680-A
Luxury Audio System with CD DJ
208
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS00600( X)06/95]
*[AS00700( X)08/95]
*[AS00800( X)08/95]
*[AS00900( X)01/95]
Luxury Audio System
*[AS01000( X)08/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS01100( X)06/95]
Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob clockwise to increase the
volume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume.
[AS01200( X)09/95]
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening
level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will
come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if
the radio power is turned off (with the “VOL/PUSH
ON” button) and the volume is at a low level, the
volume will remain in the position it was set at when
radio power is switched back on.
*[AS01300( X)08/95]
*[AS01400( X)04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
%
Using the Controls on Your New Radio
How to turn the radio on and off
Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the radio on. Press
again to turn it off.
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band.
Pushing the “AM/FM” button causes the frequency band to
switch from “AM” to “FM1” to “FM2” to “AM”, changing one
band to the next each time the button is pressed. These
functions are used with the station memory buttons described
under How to tune radio stations.
209
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS01500( X)08/95]
*[AS01600( X)01/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS01700( X)09/95]
*[AS01800( X)01/95]
■ Using the “TUNE” function
%
There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You
can use the “TUNE”, “SEEK”, “SCAN” or memory buttons.
You can change the frequency up or down one increment at
a time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right
(a) side of the “TUNE” or “TUNE DISCS” button. To
change frequencies quickly, press and hold down either the
right or left side of the button.
*[AS01900( X)08/95]
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast
frequency, whether or not a station is present on that
frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)
*[AS02000( X)08/95]
*[AS02100( X)05/95]
■ Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS02200( X)01/95]
*[AS02300( X)04/95]
■ Using the “SCAN” function
Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left
(b) side of the button to select the next listenable station
down the frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired
station.
Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for
approximately five seconds.
*[AS02400( X)02/95]
*[AS02500( X)01/95]
*[AS02600( X)01/95]
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,
press the “SCAN” button again.
■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons
Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.
These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM
stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)
210
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS02700( X)08/95]
*[AS02800( X)01/95]
1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS02900( X)01/95]
*[AS03000( X)01/95]
3. Follow the above steps for each memory preset button.
2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold until the sound
returns and the lamp above the memory button lights up.
That memory button is now set.
Using the Automatic Memory Store feature
(“AUTOSET”)
*[AS03100( X)01/95]
If the memory buttons have been set, either by using the Auto
Memory Load feature or if you have set them manually, the
system is prepared to let you use a convenient feature called
Automatic Memory Store.
*[AS03200( X)01/95]
With Auto Memory Store, you can continually set strong
stations into your memory buttons without losing your
originally set stations. Your radio will automatically set your
memory buttons to the strong local stations.
*[AS03300( X)01/95]
Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the “AUTOSET”
button once. Your radio will set the first six strong stations of
the band you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory
buttons. The display will flash “AUTO” and display the autoset
icon “A” while the stations are being set in the memory
buttons.
*[AS03400( X)07/95]
NOTE: If there are less than six strong stations in the
frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will
store the last strong station detected on the band.
After all stations have been filled, the radio will begin
playing the station stored on memory button 1.
*[AS03500( X)01/95]
To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to the
manually-set memory button stations, simply push the
“AUTOSET” button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.
The next time Auto Memory Store is activated on that band, the
radio will store the next set of six strong stations.
211
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS03600( X)01/95]
*[AS03700( X)01/95]
*[AS03800( X)01/95]
Adjusting the tone balance of your radio
■ Increasing or decreasing bass and treble response
Push the “BASS/TREB” popout knob to gain access to the
bass and treble controls. Bass control allows you to adjust
the lower, bass frequencies to your preference. The outer
ring of the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the bass (turn
clockwise to increase bass; counterclockwise to decrease
bass).
*[AS03900( X)01/95]
*[AS04000( X)01/95]
*[AS04100( X)01/95]
Treble control allows you to adjust the higher, treble
frequencies of your radio to your preference. The inner ring
of the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the treble (turn clockwise
to increase treble; counterclockwise to decrease treble).
■ Adjusting speaker balance and speaker fader
Push the “BAL/FADE” popout knob to gain access to the
speaker balance and fader controls. Balance control allows
you to adjust the sound distribution between the right and
left speakers. The outer ring of “BAL/FADE” knob adjusts
the speaker balance control. (Turn clockwise to shift the
sound to the right speakers, and turn counterclockwise to
shift the sound to the left speakers.)
*[AS04200( X)01/95]
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the front and rear speakers. The inner ring of the
“BAL/FADE” knob adjusts the speaker fader. (Turn
clockwise to shift the sound to the rear speakers, and turn
counterclockwise to shift the sound to the front speakers.)
212
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS04210( X)07/94]
*[AS04220( X)01/96]
Using the Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Feature
*[AS04230( X)07/94]
*[AS04240( X)07/94]
*[AS04250( X)07/94]
*[AS04260( X)07/94]
*[AS04270( X)07/94]
The following signal modes may be selected:
*[AS04280( X)07/94]
Push the “DSP” button to activate the feature. The display will
indicate which signal mode is in effect. To change the signal
mode press either the left (b) or right (a) side of the selector
button (located under the “DSP” button).
1. “HALL” — Rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2,000.
2. “CHURCH” — Church with a high vault.
3. “JAZZ” — Jazz club with clearly reflected sounds.
4. “STADIUM” — Outdoor stadium with a capacity of about
30,000.
5. “NEWS” — “Voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio
band.
*[AS04290( X)07/94]
% [AS04300( X)05/92]
*
To deactivate the DSP feature, press the “DSP” button again.
[AS04350( X)10/94]
The radio antenna is mounted on the front passenger side
quarter panel of the vehicle. It is a fixed mast antenna and can
not be retracted.
*[AS04400( X)04/95]
Power Antenna (If equipped)
[AS04450( X)10/94]
If your vehicle is equipped with a power antenna, it will
automatically be extended when the radio is turned on. When
the radio is turned off, it will automatically be retracted.
*[AS04500( X)09/95]
NOTE: The radio must be turned off so that the antenna will
retract prior to entering a car wash. Failure to retract
the antenna could result in damage to the antenna,
antenna base, or vehicle.
Radio Antenna
213
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS04600( X)08/95]
*[AS04700( X)08/95]
Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player
*[AS04800( X)08/95]
*[AS04900( X)04/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS05000( X)01/95]
If the player is in the tape mode but not in play, pressing the
“TAPE” button will activate play. If the “TAPE” button is
pressed with no tape inserted, the display will flash “NO
TAPE”.
*[AS05100( X)08/95]
*[AS05200( X)01/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS05300( X)09/95]
*[AS05400( X)03/95]
■ Fast forwarding the tape
*[AS05500( X)08/95]
*[AS05600( X)03/95]
■ Rewinding the tape
%
NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tape
player.
Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Once
you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the
right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the
way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening
process. Display indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.
There are six ways to quickly locate a desired selection on the
tape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, Blank Skip, “SEEK”,
“SCAN” or “SIDE 1-2” functions. Following are brief
descriptions of each:
To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radio
will play while the tape is in fast forward. The light above
the “FF” button will blink while in the fast forward mode.
Press “FF” again or press the “TAPE” button to stop fast
forwarding. At the end of the tape, the direction
automatically reverses and plays the other side of the tape.
To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio will
automatically begin playing while the tape is rewinding. The
light above the “REW” button will blink while in the rewind
mode. Press “REW” again or press the “TAPE” button to
stop rewinding.
214
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS05700( X)08/95]
*[AS05800( X)05/95]
■ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player
*[AS05900( X)01/95]
■ Using the “Blank Skip” function with your cassette tape
*[AS06000( X)01/95]
While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the
“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the
tape. Push the left (b) side to restart a currently playing
tape selection.
player
Press the “Blank Skip” button to activate the blank skip
mode. After approximately 20 seconds of blank program, the
tape will seek forward to the next program.
*[AS06100( X)08/95]
*[AS06200( X)01/95]
■ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player
*[AS06300( X)01/95]
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape
selection, press the “SCAN” button or the “TAPE” button.
Pushing the “SCAN” button will begin the forward scan
mode on the tape currently playing, stopping on each tape
selection for approximately eight seconds.
*[AS06400( X)08/95]
*[AS06500( X)01/95]
■ How to change the side of the tape being played
*[AS06600( X)08/95]
*[AS06700( X)03/95]
How to eject the tape
The alternate side of the tape can be selected by pressing the
“SIDE 1-2” button.
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJECT”
button. The tape will eject only when in the tape mode. The
cassette cannot be ejected when the radio is playing an “AM”
or “FM” station. The system will revert to radio mode when
the cassette is ejected.
215
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS06800( X)01/95]
*[AS06900( X)01/95]
How to store the tape
*[AS07000( X)08/95]
*[AS07100( X)09/95]
Using the Dolby쑓 B noise reduction feature
[AS07200( X)07/95]
Push the k button to activate. When activated, the light
above the k button illuminates.
*[AS07300( X)08/95]
*[AS07400( X)08/95]
Tape error messages
*[AS07500( X)01/95]
TD E1 — Radio tries to change sides of tape 3 times in a 10
second span. Push “EJECT” and try another tape. If problem
persists, refer problem to qualified personnel for service.
*[AS07600( X)01/95]
TD E2 — Tape eject failure. Radio tries to eject tape and it will
not eject. Push “EJECT” to eject tape. If the tape will not eject,
refer problem to qualified personnel for service.
*[AS07700( X)01/95]
TD E3 — Loading error. Push “EJECT” to eject tape. Reload
tape. If the same error code appears in the display, try another
tape.
[AS07705( X)09/94]
Rear Seat Radio Controls (If equipped)
[AS07710( X)09/94]
Rear seat radio controls are available on vehicles equipped with
Premium and Luxury Audio Systems only.
[AS07715( X)09/94]
The rear seat radio controls are located on the rear of the center
console. These controls duplicate several radio functions of the
radio and allow the use of headphones in the vehicle.
Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resume
radio play.
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license
from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Your cassette tape player is equipped to diagnose certain
problems you may experience. Error codes are as follows:
216
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
[AS07720( X)09/94]
10-1/2 pica
Rear Seat Radio Controls
art:0060683-A
*[AS07725( X)06/95]
How to turn the rear seat radio controls on and off
[AS07727( X)09/94]
Press memory preset buttons “3” and “5” simultaneously on the
face of your radio to turn the rear seat radio controls on. A
headphone symbol (j) will appear in the display when the
rear seat controls are on. Press “3” and “5” simultaneously
again to turn rear seat controls off.
*[AS07730( X)08/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS07735( X)09/94]
Press the right (a) side of the “VOLUME” rocker switch to
increase volume, and push the left (b) side to decrease the
volume of the rear speakers.
[AS07740( X)09/95]
NOTE: Rear seat volume control can be set no higher than
current radio setting unless speakers are turned off.
See note under How to turn speakers on and off.
*[AS07745( X)06/95]
Setting the AM or FM frequency band
[AS07750( X)09/94]
Push the “AM/FM” button to change the frequency band.
217
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS07755( X)06/95]
Using the “MEMORY” button
[AS07760( X)04/95]
Push the “MEMORY” button to access the station you have set
into memory button 1 on the face of the radio. Successively
pushing this button will access, numerically, all stations set into
the Station Memory Preset buttons (1 through 6).
*[AS07765( X)06/95]
*[AS07770( X)06/95]
How to turn the speakers on and off
When the rear seat controls are on, push the “SPKRS ON-OFF”
button to turn all speakers off. Push again to turn all speakers
on.
*[AS07775( X)06/95]
Using the “SEEK” function
[AS07785( X)06/95]
Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch to seek to
the next highest radio station. Press the left (b) side to seek to
the next lower radio station.
[AS07790( X)09/95]
NOTE: When using the rear seat controls, the “SEEK”
function on the rear seat controls will also function
with cassettes or CD, seeking the next (“SEEK a”) or
previous (“b SEEK”) selection.
*[AS07793( X)06/95]
Using headphones with the rear seat controls
[AS07796( X)10/94]
Two 3.5mm headphone jacks have been provided on the rear
seat controls. Plug headphones (not provided) into the provided
jack(s) to operate headphones.
*[AS07800( X)08/95]
*[AS07900( X)08/95]
Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes
*[AS08000( X)08/95]
■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tape
*[AS08100( X)08/95]
■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should be
In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it
was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:
player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the
best playback sound and proper tape operation.
used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject
to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.
218
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS08200( X)08/95]
■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, high
*[AS08300( X)08/95]
■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playing
*[AS08400( X)08/95]
■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in the
*[AS08500( X)08/95]
■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player when not in
*[AS08600( X)08/95]
*[AS08700( X)08/95]
Clock Operation
[AS08800( X)09/94]
Press the “CLK” button to display time. The time will continue
to be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. After
approximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in the
display. To display radio or tape information only, press the
“CLK” button a second time.
[AS08900( X)09/95]
NOTE: The clock can be displayed or set whether the ignition
is on or off as long as the “CLK” button is depressed.
*[AS09000( X)08/95]
*[AS09100( X)08/95]
How to set the clock
%
[AS09200( X)04/00]
humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to
extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and
turning the hub until the tape is tight.
mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting
a cassette.
use. High heat in the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
How to view the clock mode
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press and hold the “CLK” button, press the right (a) side of
the “SEEK” button to increase hours. Press the left (b) side
of the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side of
the “TUNE” or “TUNE DISCS” button to increase minutes.
Press the left (b) side of the button to decrease minutes.
*[AS09300( X)09/95]
NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM
indications.
219
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29210(ALL)05/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0060681-A
Premium Stereo Cassette
220
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29215(ALL)09/94]
33-1/2 pica
art:0060682-A
Electronic Sound Systems
Premium Stereo Cassette with CD DJ
221
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
%
*[AS29217(ALL)08/94]
Premium Stereo Cassette and Stereo
Cassette with CD DJ
*[AS29220(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29225(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29230(ALL)01/95]
Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS29235(ALL)08/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS29240(ALL)06/95]
Turn the “VOL/PUSH” knob clockwise to increase the volume
and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Bars illuminate in
the display to show relative volume level.
*[AS29245(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening
level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will
come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if
the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain
in the position it was set at when radio power was
switched off.
*[AS29250(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29255(ALL)02/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
How to turn the radio on and off
Press the “VOL/PUSH” knob to turn the radio on. Press again
to turn it off.
Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired frequency band
or to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode). Pushing
the button more than once will alternate between AM, FM1 and
FM2. These functions are used with the station memory buttons
described under How to tune radio stations.
222
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
%
*[AS29260(ALL)08/95]
How to tune radio stations
[AS29265(ALL)10/94]
There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You
can use the “TUNE”, “SEEK”, “SCAN” or the memory buttons.
*[AS29270(ALL)09/95]
■ Using the “TUNE” function
[AS29275(ALL)03/95]
You can change the frequency up or down one increment at
a time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right
(a) side of the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies
quickly, press and hold down either the right or left side of
the button.
*[AS29280(ALL)08/95]
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast
frequency, whether or not a station is present on that
frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)
*[AS29285(ALL)08/95]
[AS29290(ALL)09/94]
*[AS29295(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29305(ALL)04/95]
*[AS29310(ALL)02/95]
■ Using the “SEEK” function
This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select
listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the
right (a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the next
listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)
side of the button to select the next listenable station down
the frequency band. By pressing and holding the button,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach the desired
station.
■ Using the “SCAN” function
Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for
approximately five seconds.
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,
press the “SCAN” button again.
223
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS29315(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29320(ALL)01/95]
■ Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons
*[AS29325(ALL)08/95]
Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired
frequencies:
Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.
These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM
stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)
*[AS29330(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29340(ALL)08/95]
1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS29345(ALL)08/95]
3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset
*[AS29350(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29355(ALL)01/95]
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button
until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory
on that button.
button you want to set.
■ Using the AUTOSET feature
With AUTOSET, you can continually set strong stations into
your memory buttons without losing your originally set
stations.
*[AS29360(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29365(ALL)09/95]
Press the “AUTOSET” button once. Your radio will set the
first six strong stations of the band you are in (AM, FM1, or
FM2) into the memory buttons. The display will show
“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies setting the
memory buttons.
NOTE: If there are fewer than five strong stations in the
frequency band, the remaining unfilled buttons will
store the last strong station detected on the band.
*[AS29370(ALL)01/95]
When all stations are filled, the radio will begin playing the
station stored in memory button 1.
*[AS29375(ALL)01/95]
To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and return to
manually-set memory button stations, press the “AUTOSET”
button. Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”.
224
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS29380(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29385(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29390(ALL)03/95]
Adjusting the tone balance of your radio
*[AS29395(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29405(ALL)03/95]
■ Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS29410(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29415(ALL)03/95]
■ Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS29420(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29425(ALL)03/95]
■ Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS29430(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of
bass and treble, and positions of speaker balance and
fader functions (left to right, front to rear).
■ Increasing or decreasing bass response
Press the top (c) of the “BASS” button to increase bass;
press the bottom (d) of the “BASS” button to decrease bass.
Press the top (c) of the “TREBLE” button to increase treble;
press the bottom (d) of the treble button to decrease treble.
Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the right and left speakers. Press the top (c) of the
“BAL” button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and
press the bottom (d) of the “BAL” button to shift the sound
to the left speakers.
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the front and rear speakers. Press the top (c) of
the “FADE” button to shift the sound to the front speakers,
and press the bottom (d) of the “FADE” button to shift the
sound to the back speakers.
225
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS29435(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29440(ALL)08/95]
Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape Player
*[AS29445(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29450(ALL)04/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS29455(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the ignition on
whether or not the radio power is on. However, with
radio power off, the cassette tape is loaded and stored.
*[AS29465(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29470(ALL)08/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
%
*[AS29475(ALL)09/95]
*[AS29480(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the cassette tape
player.
Your cassette tape player is equipped with power loading. Once
you insert a tape and push slightly (with the open edge to the
right), the loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of the
way in and play will begin after a momentary tape tightening
process. Display indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.
There are four ways to quickly locate a desired selection on the
tape. You can use the fast forward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN”
function. Following are brief descriptions of each.
■ Fast forwarding the tape
To fast forward the tape, press the “FF” button. The radio
will begin playing until fast forward is manually stopped (by
pushing the “TAPE” button) or the end of the tape is
reached.
*[AS29485(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29490(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29495(ALL)01/95]
At the end of the tape, the direction automatically reverses
and plays the other side of the tape.
■ Rewinding the tape
To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button. The radio will
begin playing until rewind is manually stopped (by pushing
the “TAPE” button) or the beginning of the tape is reached.
226
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS29505(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29510(ALL)08/95]
■ Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette tape player
*[AS29515(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29520(ALL)01/95]
■ Using the “SCAN” function with your cassette tape player
*[AS29525(ALL)01/95]
While in the tape mode, push the right (a) side of the
“SEEK” button to seek forward to the next selection on the
tape. Push the left (b) side to seek the previous tape
selection.
Press the “SCAN” button to begin the forward scan mode on
the tape currently playing, stopping on each tape selection
for approximately an eight-second sampling (display
indicates “SC”).
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled tape
selection, press “SCAN” a second time.
*[AS29530(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29535(ALL)01/95]
■ How to change the side of the tape being played
*[AS29540(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29545(ALL)01/95]
How to eject the tape
The alternate side of the tape can be selected by pressing the
“SIDE 1-2” button.
To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the “EJ” button.
The radio will resume playing if the radio power is on. The
tape cartridge can be ejected with radio power (and/or ignition)
on or off.
227
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29550(ALL)06/95]
How to switch from tape to AM/FM mode
*[AS29555(ALL)01/95]
Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape player and resume
radio play.
*[AS29560(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29565(ALL)08/95]
Using the Dolby쑓 B noise reduction feature
*[AS29570(ALL)04/95]
Push the k button to activate Dolby B Noise Reduction. Push
again to deactivate.
[AS29620( X)10/94]
Two mini 3.5mm (1/8") jack headphone sets may be used with
the headphone jacks on your Rear Seat Radio Controls. Ford
approved headphones are also available for purchase by calling
1-800-231-4429.
*[AS29650(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29655(ALL)08/95]
Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and Tapes
*[AS29660(ALL)08/95]
■ Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to clean the tape
*[AS29665(ALL)08/95]
■ Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less should be
*[AS29670(ALL)08/95]
■ Protect cassettes from exposure to direct sunlight, high
*[AS29675(ALL)08/95]
■ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it before playing
NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured under license
from Dolby Labs Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
In order to keep your cassette tape player performing the way it
was meant to, read and follow these simple precautions:
player head after 10-12 hours of play will help maintain the
best playback sound and proper tape operation.
used. Tapes longer than 90 minutes are thinner and subject
to breakage or may jam the tape player mechanism.
humidity and extreme heat or cold. If they are exposed to
extreme conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
by putting your finger or a pencil into one of the holes and
turning the hub until the tape is tight.
228
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS29680(ALL)08/95]
■ Loose labels on cassette tapes can become lodged in the
*[AS29685(ALL)08/95]
■ Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape player. High heat in
*[AS29690(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29695(ALL)08/95]
Clock Operation
[AS29705(ALL)09/94]
Press the “CLK” button to display time. The time will continue
to be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. After
approximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in the
display. To display radio or tape information only, press the
“CLK” button a second time.
[AS29710(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: With the ignition off, the clock will display for
approximately 5 seconds once the “CLK” button is
depressed and released.
*[AS29715(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29720(ALL)08/95]
How to set the clock
%
[AS29725(ALL)04/95]
mechanism. Remove any loose label material before inserting
cassette.
the vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
How to view the clock mode
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press and hold the “CLK” button, press the right (a) side of
the “SEEK” button to increase hours. Press the left (b) side
of the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side of
the “TUNE” button to increase minutes. Press the left (b)
side of the button to decrease minutes.
*[AS29730(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM
indications.
229
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29735(ALL)09/94]
Ford 6-CD Changer (If equipped)
[AS29740( X)03/95]
The Ford Explorer 6-CD Changer is mounted in your center
console and holds 6 CDs, all controlled by using buttons on the
Audio System.
[AS29750(ALL)10/94]
Unit Loading Instructions
[AS29755(ALL)06/95]
1. Open Compact Disc Changer unit by sliding door rearward
(Figure 1).
[AS29760(ALL)09/94]
10-1/2 pica
Figure 1
art:0060686-A
230
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
[AS29765(ALL)03/95]
2. Push the “i” button to eject the disc “magazine” (holds 6
discs) (Figure 2).
[AS29770(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Figure 2
art:0060687-A
*[AS29775(ALL)04/94]
3. Load discs into the disc magazine slots (numbered 1 through
6) one at a time with labeled surfaces upward, starting with
bottom slot number 1 (Figure 3).
[AS29780(ALL)09/94]
10-1/2 pica
Figure 3
art:0060688-A
231
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29785(ALL)08/91]
4. Insert loaded disc magazine into chamber unit with the
arrow on top of the disc magazine pointing toward the
changer (Figure 4). Make sure magazine is fully inserted into
changer.
[AS29790(ALL)09/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0060689-A
Figure 4
*[AS29795(ALL)09/95]
*[AS29805(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: To remove one or more compact disc(s) from the disc
magazine, push the corresponding lever(s) to the back.
Disc(s) will partially come out for easy removal.
5. Close unit by sliding changer panel door to the left.
[AS29810(ALL)10/94]
The Compact Disc Changer unit is now ready to play using the
controls of your Audio System.
[AS29817( X)10/94]
How to Operate the Ford 6-CD Changer Using the
Controls on the Radio (Luxury and Premium Audio
Systems only)
[AS29821( X)10/94]
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ford 6-CD Changer System,
you can operate it through the controls of your Luxury or
Premium Audio System.
*[AS29822(ALL)02/95]
How to begin CD Changer play
[AS29825(ALL)03/95]
Press the “CD” button to begin CD play. The 6-CD Changer
will automatically begin playing the first track (selection) of the
first disc loaded in the unit. The display will indicate “cd-dd”
for disc number and track number and then display “TT-tt” for
track number and the “dd-tt” for current disc and track number.
232
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS29830(ALL)01/95]
If the CD Changer is empty, “NO” and “DISC” will flash in the
display and radio play will continue.
*[AS29835(ALL)02/95]
How to change the disc being played
[AS29840(ALL)10/94]
When in the CD mode, you can change discs by pressing the
right side (a) of the “TUNE DISC” button (to select the next
discs) or the left side (b) of the “TUNE DISCS” button (to
select previous discs). Play will begin on the first track of the
selected disc.
[AS29845(ALL)10/94]
If either side of the button is pressed and held, the CD Changer
will continue fast-forwarding or reversing through the discs in
the disc magazine. During these functions, the display will
indicate the disc number.
*[AS29850(ALL)02/95]
How to change the track being played
[AS29855(ALL)04/94]
There are two ways to change the track being played. You can
use the “SEEK” or “SCAN” buttons.
[AS29860(ALL)04/94]
■ Using the “SEEK” function with your CD-Changer
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to seek
next track of the current disc. After the last
completed, the CD player automatically
next disc.
[AS29865(ALL)10/94]
Press the right
forward to the
track has been
changes to the
[AS29870(ALL)04/94]
Press the left (b) side of the “SEEK” button to seek to the
previous track on the current disc.
[AS29875(ALL)04/94]
■ Using the SCAN function with your CD Changer
[AS29880(ALL)10/94]
Press the “SCAN” button to move forward to the next track.
Approximately an eight-second sampling of the track will be
played before moving to the next track. The display will
indicate the disc and track number (dd-tt). At the end of the
disc, the CD Changer automatically changes to the next disc.
[AS29885(ALL)04/94]
To end the scan mode, press the “SCAN” button a second
time.
233
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS29905(ALL)04/95]
Operating the CD Compression feature
[AS29910(ALL)04/94]
Because of the wide dynamic range of Ford’s 6-CD Changer
System, soft passages may be difficult to hear under certain
driving conditions while maintaining a reasonable volume level
in the louder passages. The compression feature will bring these
soft and loud passages closer together for a more consistent
listening level.
*[AS29915(ALL)01/95]
To turn the compression on, press the “COMPRESS”/#5 button.
When the compression feature is activated, the display will
indicate “C”.
*[AS29916(ALL)02/95]
*[AS29917(ALL)01/95]
Operating the Shuffle feature
While in the CD mode, pressing the “SHUFFLE”/#6 button will
randomly select a track from the disc currently being played.
The display will indicate “SHF” followed by the disc and track
number (dd-tt).
*[AS29918(ALL)01/95]
The CD Changer will continue to randomly select tracks for
play until the shuffle feature is turned off by pressing the
“SHUFFLE” button a second time.
*[AS29919(ALL)02/95]
*[AS29920(ALL)01/95]
How to stop CD play
While in the CD mode, press the “AM/FM” button to stop CD
play and resume radio play. Also, loading a cassette into the
cassette deck will stop CD play and begin cassette play.
*[AS29935(ALL)02/95]
*[AS29936(ALL)01/95]
CD Error Messages
*[AS29937(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29938(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29939(ALL)01/95]
— CD E1 — Mechanism error.
Your system is equipped to diagnose certain problems you may
experience. The error codes are:
— CD E2 — Focus error.
— BAD CD — Disc unreadable.
234
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS29940(ALL)01/95]
— TOO HOT — Mechanism over 167˚ Farenheit, allow to cool
before playing.
*[AS29941(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29942(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29943(ALL)01/95]
*[AS29944(ALL)08/95]
— NO CD — Empty slot or magazine.
*[AS29945(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29946(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29947(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29948(ALL)08/95]
■ A disc is already loaded.
*[AS29949(ALL)08/95]
■ Different manufacturers of compact discs may produce discs
*[AS29950(ALL)09/95]
*[AS29951(ALL)08/95]
If play does not begin after the CD button is pushed:
[AS29952(ALL)10/94]
■ The discs are inserted improperly in the magazine or the CD
— NO DJ — CD Changer not connected or not communicating.
Common Operating Conditions of the CD Player
The following information is designed to help you recognize
typical situations that could be mistakenly interpreted as
mechanical malfunctions of the disc player.
■ The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.
■ The disc is dusty or defective.
■ The player’s internal temperature is above 140˚F (60˚C).
Allow the player to cool off before operating.
with different dimensions or tolerances, some of which may
not be within industry standards or in accordance with the
CD format. Because of this, a new disc that is free of dust
and scratches could be defective and may not play on your
Ford Compact Disc Player.
■ The radio is not on.
magazine is not inserted.
*[AS29953(ALL)08/95]
■ Moisture may have condensed on the lenses within the unit.
If this occurs, remove the disc and wait approximately an
hour until the moisture evaporates.
235
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS29954(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29955(ALL)08/95]
If the sound skips:
*[AS29956(ALL)01/95]
How to take care of and clean the CD Changer and
discs
*[AS29957(ALL)01/95]
To ensure the continued performance of your CD Changer
carefully read the following precautions:
*[AS29958(ALL)01/95]
■ Always handle a disc by the edge. Never touch the playing
[AS29959(ALL)06/95]
■ Before playing, inspect all discs for any contamination. If
■ Badly scratched discs or extremely rough roads will cause
the sound to skip. Skipping will not damage the disc player
or scratch the discs.
surface.
needed, clean discs with an approved disc cleaner, such as
the Discwasher Compact Disc Cleaner or the Allsop 3
Compact Disc Cleaner, by wiping from the center out to the
edges. Do not use a circular motion to clean.
*[AS29960(ALL)08/95]
■ Do not clean discs with solvents such as benzine, thinner,
*[AS29961(ALL)01/95]
■ Do not expose the discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for
*[AS29962(ALL)01/95]
■ Do not insert more than one disc into each disc slot of the
*[AS29963(ALL)01/95]
■ Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc
commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray intended
for analog records.
an extended period of time.
disc magazine. Doing so may damage the discs, disc
magazine or the disc changer.
magazine.
*[AS29964(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The laser beam used in the compact disc player is
harmful to the eyes. Do not attempt to disassemble the
case.
236
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29965(ALL)09/94]
33-1/2 pica
art:0060684-A
Midline Stereo Radio
Electronic Sound Systems
237
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
[AS29968( X)10/94]
Midline Stereo Radio
*[AS29970(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29972(ALL)08/95]
*[AS29973(ALL)01/95]
Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS29975(ALL)08/95]
How to adjust the volume
[AS29980(ALL)06/95]
Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob clockwise to increase the
volume and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. Bars
illuminate in the display to show relative volume level.
*[AS29985(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: If the volume level is set above a certain listening
level when the ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the volume will
come back to a “nominal” listening level. However, if
the radio power is turned off, the volume will remain
in the position it was set at when radio power was
switched off.
*[AS29990(ALL)08/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
[AS29995(ALL)10/94]
Push the “AM”/FM“ button to select the desired frequency
band or to stop/store cassette tape (when in cassette mode).
These functions are used with the station memory buttons
described under How to tune radio stations.
%
*[AS30000(ALL)08/95]
[AS30005(ALL)04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the radio on. Press
again to turn it off.
How to tune radio stations
There are four ways for you to tune in a particular station. You
can manually locate the station using the ”TUNE“ button,
”SEEK“ button, ”SCAN“ button, or select the station by using
the memory buttons, which you can set to any desired
frequency. These four methods are described below.
238
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS30010(ALL)09/95]
*[AS30015(ALL)03/95]
*[AS30020(ALL)08/95]
■ Using the ”TUNE“ function
You can change the frequency up or down one increment at
a time by pressing and releasing either the left (b) or right
(a) side of the ”TUNE“ button.
Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any allowable broadcast
frequency, whether or not a station is present on that
frequency. (See All About Radio Frequencies in this section.)
*[AS30025(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30030(ALL)09/95]
■ Using the ”SEEK“ function
*[AS30035(ALL)01/95]
*[AS30040(ALL)04/95]
■ Using the ”SCAN“ function
*[AS30045(ALL)02/95]
This feature on your radio allows you to automatically select
listenable stations up or down the frequency band. Press the
right (a) side of the ”SEEK“ button to select the next
listenable station up the frequency band. Press the left (b)
side of the button to select the next listenable station down
the frequency band. By holding the button down, listenable
stations can be passed over to reach the desired station.
Pressing the ”SCAN“ button will begin the scan mode up
the frequency band, stopping on each listenable station for
approximately five seconds.
To stop the scan mode on the presently sampled station,
press the ”SCAN“ button again.
*[AS30050(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30055(ALL)02/95]
■ Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS30060(ALL)08/95]
Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons to the desired
frequencies:
*[AS30065(ALL)08/95]
Your radio is equipped with 6 station memory buttons.
These buttons can be used to select up to 6 preset AM
stations and 12 FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
239
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS30075(ALL)08/95]
2. Press one of the memory preset buttons and hold the button
*[AS30080(ALL)08/95]
3. Follow the two steps above for each station memory preset
*[AS30085(ALL)08/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker output of your
radio
*[AS30090(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30095(ALL)03/95]
■ Increasing or decreasing bass response
*[AS30100(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30105(ALL)03/95]
■ Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS30110(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30115(ALL)03/95]
■ Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS30120(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30125(ALL)03/95]
■ Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS30130(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show relative levels of
bass and treble, and positions of speaker balance and
fader functions (left to right, front to rear).
until the sound returns. That station is now held in memory
on that button.
button you want to set.
Press the top (c) of the ”BASS“ button to increase bass;
press the bottom (d) of the ”BASS“ button to decrease bass.
Press the top (c) of the ”TREBLE“ button to increase treble;
press the bottom (d) of the treble button to decrease treble.
Balance control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the right and left speakers. Press the top (c) of the
”BAL“ button to shift the sound to the right speakers, and
press the bottom (d) of the ”BAL“ button to shift the sound
to the left speakers.
Fade control allows you to adjust the sound distribution
between the front and rear speakers. Press the top (c) of
the ”FADE“ button to shift the sound to the front speakers,
and press the bottom (d) of the ”FADE“ button to shift the
sound to the back speakers.
240
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS30401(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30411(ALL)08/95]
Clock Operation
[AS30421(ALL)09/94]
Press the ”CLK“ button to display time. The time will continue
to be displayed until a radio or tape function is chosen. After
approximately 10 seconds, the time will again appear in the
display. To display radio or tape information only, press the
”CLK“ button a second time.
[AS30431(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The clock can be displayed or set whether the ignition
is on or off.
*[AS30441(ALL)08/95]
*[AS30451(ALL)08/95]
How to set the clock
%
[AS30461(ALL)04/95]
How to view the clock mode
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press and hold the ”CLK“ button, press the right (a) side of
the ”SEEK“ button to increase hours. Press the left (b) side
of the button to decrease hours. Press the right (a) side of
the ”TUNE“ button to increase minutes. Press the left (b)
side of the button to decrease minutes.
*[AS30471(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time with no AM/PM
indications.
*[AS35200(ALL)08/95]
*[AS35300(ALL)08/95]
Common Radio Reception Conditions
%
*[AS35400(ALL)08/95]
*[AS35500(ALL)08/95]
Several conditions prevent FM reception from being completely
clear and noise-free, such as the following:
1. Distance/Strength
The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance
the signal must travel. The listenable range of an average FM
signal is approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond this
distance, the radio is operating in a fringe area and the signal
becomes weaker.
241
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
*[AS35600(ALL)08/95]
*[AS35700(ALL)08/95]
2. Terrain
The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of the area over
which the signal travels may prevent the FM signal from being
noise-free.
*[AS35900(ALL)08/95]
If there is a building or large structure between the antenna and
station, some of the signal ”bends“ around the building, but
certain spots receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
”shadow“ of the structure will allow the station to return to
normal.
*[AS36000(ALL)08/95]
When the radio waves are reflected off objects or structures, the
reflected signal cancels the normal signal, causing the antenna to
pick up noise and distortion. Cancellation effects are most
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can become quite
severe in hilly terrain and depressed roadways.
*[AS36100(ALL)08/95]
To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono blend circuit has
been incorporated into this system. This feature automatically
switches a weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,
which improves the quality of reception.
*[AS36200(ALL)08/95]
Several sources of static are normal conditions on AM
frequencies. These can be caused by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms.
*[AS36300(ALL)08/95]
Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal Capture and
Overload. This can occur when listening to a weak station and
when passing another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the displayed
frequency does not change. While passing the tower, the station
may switch back and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
*[AS36400(ALL)08/95]
When several broadcast towers are present (common in
metropolitan areas) several stations may overload the receiver,
resulting in considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
242
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Electronic Sound Systems
*[AS36500(ALL)08/95]
Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM and FM bands has
been incorporated into this system to reduce strong signal
capture and overload.
*[AS36600(ALL)08/95]
*[AS36700(ALL)08/95]
All About Radio Frequencies
*[AS36800(ALL)08/95]
Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given area. This radio
will tune to each of these frequencies using manual tune and no
fine tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use other
frequencies.
*[AS36900(ALL)08/95]
Some FM radio stations advertise a ”rounded-off“ frequency
which is not the frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a frequency of 98.7
MHz may call itself ”Radio 99“ even though 99.0 MHz is not an
allowable FM broadcast frequency.
*[AS37000(ALL)08/95]
*[AS37050(ALL)08/95]
*[AS37100(ALL)08/95]
Important Warranty and Service Information
*[AS37300(ALL)08/95]
*[AS37400(ALL)08/95]
Service
%
%
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the
Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
establish the frequencies that AM and FM radio stations may
use for their broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are, AM: 530,
540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9
MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.
Warranty
Your sound system is warranted for three years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 kilometers), whichever comes first. Consult your vehicle
warranty booklet for further information. Ask your dealer for a
copy of this limited warranty.
At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio systems with a
comprehensive service and repair program. If anything should
go wrong with your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of qualified Ford
authorized repair centers to assist you.
243
File:09unasx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:08:53 1996
Notes
244
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR00350(ALL)06/95]
Procedures for driving your vehicle will vary depending on
which type of transmission your vehicle has.
*[DR00600(ALL)06/95]
■ a manual transmission
[DR05475( X)12/95]
■ an Automatic Overdrive Transmission 4R55E or 4R70W
[DR05700(ALL)1/96]
Automatic Transmission Operation
4R44E/4R55E/4R70W
*[DR08715(ALL)12/95]
The 4R44E, 4R55E and 4R70W transmissions are electronically
controlled four speed overdrive automatic transmissions with
lockup torque converter. Transmission operation is controlled by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
*[DR08720(ALL)08/95]
The PCM will automatically adjust transmission operation to
make up for varying conditions. Several sensors located on the
engine and transmission such as throttle position, engine speed,
vehicle speed and transmission temperature are used by the
PCM to shift the transmission into a higher or lower gear when
required for the best performance and fuel economy. For
example, you may notice that the transmission will upshift to a
higher gear more quickly when the vehicle has not reached
normal operating temperature.
*[DR08730(ALL)08/95]
The PCM also controls the transmission’s Torque Converter
Clutch (TCC) to further raise vehicle performance and fuel
economy. The TCC will engage when the transmission operating
temperature and other conditions determined by the PCM have
been met. Engagement of the clutch may be noted as a decrease
in engine speed.
[DR08740(ALL)03/95]
To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continually performs
self-tests on the electronic control system and, if any faults are
detected, stores them in memory. The Overdrive Off Indicator
Light (O/D OFF), which is located on the instrument cluster,
may flash steadily if a malfunction has been detected. If the
245
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Overdrive Off Indicator Light is flashing, contact your Ford
dealer as soon as possible. If this condition persists, damage to
the transmission could occur.
%
*[DR08750(ALL)01/95]
[DR08800(ALL)01/95]
Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steering column. The
transmission control switch is located on the end of the gearshift
lever. You can put the gearshift in any of the several positions.
[DR08915(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
The positions of the column-mounted gearshift
art:0021373-A
[DR08925(ALL)01/95]
quarter page
art:0021255-A
Transmission control switch (located on the end of the gearshift lever)
246
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR09000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift
lever from position to position. If you do not hold the
brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly
and injure someone.
*[DR09100(ALL)01/95]
%
*[DR09110(ALL)01/95]
Once you place the gearshift securely into position, gradually
release the brake pedal and use the accelerator as necessary.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock
feature. This feature prevents you from shifting from
P (Park) unless you have the brake pedal depressed.
(The ignition must be in the ON position.) If you
cannot shift from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
*[DR09120(ALL)01/95]
*[DR09130(ALL)01/95]
*[DR09140(ALL)08/95]
1. Apply the parking brake.
*[DR09150(ALL)08/95]
4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). (If the
*[DR09160(ALL)01/95]
*[DR09165(ALL)07/95]
5. Start the vehicle.
*[DR09170(ALL)09/95]
2. Remove the key.
3. Insert the key and rotate it one position clockwise (ignition
in the OFF position).
vehicle is shifted back to P [Park], you must repeat the
previous steps.)
If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the alternate
procedure described above, it is possible that a fuse has blown
and that your brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Explorer in this Owner
Guide for instructions on checking and replacing fuses.
RWARNING
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL YOU VERIFY
THAT THE BRAKELAMPS ARE WORKING.
247
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR09200(ALL)01/95]
*[DR09300(ALL)08/95]
R (Reverse)
*[DR09350(ALL)01/95]
*[DR09375(ALL)01/95]
N (Neutral)
*[DR09400(ALL)01/95]
% [DR09500(ALL)04/95]
*
*[DR09600(ALL)04/95]
Driving
*[DR09700(ALL)03/94]
When to use Drive
[DR09800(ALL)06/95]
You will note there is not a drive position on your gearshift
indicator. However, you will find a transmission control switch
labeled O/D ON/OFF located on the end of the gearshift lever.
Press this switch and the O/D OFF indicator light will
illuminate on the instrument cluster. With overdrive cancelled
and the O/D OFF indicator light illuminated, the transmission
will operate in gears one through three. This is useful if you
experience frequent downshift/upshift conditions, when
operating with a heavy load or in hilly terrain, or if additional
engine braking is useful. However, shift back to j (Overdrive)
whenever practical for optimum powertrain cooling and fuel
economy. This can be accomplished by pushing the transmission
control switch again, to cancel the O/D OFF control and light.
%
%
With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position, the vehicle will
move backward. You should always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R (Reverse).
With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position, the vehicle can be
started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in
this position.
When to use j (Overdrive)
This is the normal driving position. As the vehicle picks up
speed, automatic upshifts to second, third and fourth gears will
occur when j Overdrive is chosen on the selector and the
transmission control switch has not been pressed. The
transmission will shift into the correct gear when the right
speed is achieved, for the accelerator pedal position you have
chosen.
248
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR09850(ALL)01/95]
quarter page
art:0021255-A
Transmission control switch (located on the end of the gearshift lever)
*[DR09900(ALL)05/95]
To return the transmission to the normal j Overdrive
operation, press the transmission control switch again. The
Transmission Control Indicator Light will not be illuminated
when Overdrive operation resumes. This switch may be used to
select O/D ON or O/D OFF any time the vehicle is being
driven.
*[DR09950(ALL)05/94]
When starting your vehicle, the overdrive system will
automatically be in the normal overdrive mode.
*[DR10100(ALL)01/95]
*[DR10200(ALL)01/95]
When to use 2 (Second)
*[DR10300(ALL)01/95]
*[DR10400(ALL)04/95]
When to use 1 (Low)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide
additional engine braking on downgrades. This position
provides 2 (Second) gear operation only.
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum engine braking on steep
downgrades. Upshifts from 1 (Low) can be made by manually
shifting to 2 (Second) or j (Overdrive). Selection of 1 (Low)
gear provides only low gear operation from start-up. Selection
of 1 (Low) while at higher speeds provides a shift to second
gear, and a shift to first gear will occur after the vehicle
decelerates to the proper speed.
249
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR10500(ALL)01/95]
*[DR10600(ALL)03/94]
P (Park)
*[DR10650(ALL)03/94]
The gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) if you cannot rotate
it in a clockwise direction without lifting it toward you.
*[DR10700(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Always come to a complete stop before you shift into P (Park).
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear
wheels from turning. To securely latch the gearshift in the P
(Park) position, pull it toward you, push it completely
counterclockwise against the stop, and then push it toward the
instrument panel.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
*[DR10800(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended while it is running.
*[DR11100(ALL)06/94]
*[DR11200(ALL)04/95]
Forced Downshifts
*[DR11235(ALL)03/94]
*[DR11275(ALL)03/94]
Power Braking
*[DR11285(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Continued operation in the stall condition can result
in transmission overheat, malfunction or fluid
expulsion.
To gain extra acceleration in j Overdrive or Drive (O/D OFF),
push the accelerator to the floor. The transmission will
automatically downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second
or first.
Increasing the engine speed above idle without vehicle
movement (such as holding the brake) in a forward or reverse
gear causes transmission stall.
250
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR11300(ALL)08/94]
Manual Transmission Operation
*[DR11400(ALL)03/95]
*[DR11500(ALL)01/95]
Using the Clutch
*[DR11600(ALL)03/91]
To move the vehicle, release the clutch slowly and at the same
time press down slowly on the accelerator so that the vehicle
accelerates.
*[DR11700(ALL)03/95]
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do
not use the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill while
waiting on a hill. These actions will seriously reduce clutch life.
*[DR11750(ALL)03/95]
Driving with your foot resting on the clutch may cause the
vehicle to jerk sharply when pressing or removing your other
foot from the accelerator.
*[DR11800(ALL)03/95]
*[DR11900(ALL)02/95]
Shifting the Gears
%
%
Make sure the gearshift lever is in the N (Neutral) position and
your right foot is holding down the brake pedal. Then press the
clutch pedal to the floor with your left foot. Manual
transmission vehicles have a starter interlock switch. The starter
will not crank until the clutch pedal is fully depressed. Start the
engine and allow it to idle for a few seconds. Move the
gearshift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
The gearshift for a manual transmission is mounted on the floor.
The gearshift pattern consists of seven positions: Neutral, five
forward gears, and Reverse.
[DR12000(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021180-B
5-Speed Overdrive manual transmission shift pattern
251
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR12300(ALL)03/91]
*[DR12400(ALL)03/95]
*[DR12501(ALL)03/91]
Backing up
To shift into R (Reverse):
1. Push the clutch pedal in all the way to the floor and hold it.
If you do not hold the clutch pedal in all the way, you may
hear a grinding noise when you shift.
*[DR12551(ALL)03/93]
2. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Failure to do so may
*[DR12600(ALL)08/94]
3. Put the gearshift in Neutral and wait at least 3 seconds
*[DR12700(ALL)08/94]
4. Push the gearshift all the way to the right and pull it back
*[DR12800(ALL)01/95]
*[DR12950( X)02/92]
cause synchronizer teeth damage, reducing the useful life of
your transmission.
before shifting into R (Reverse) to prevent a grinding noise.
Do not release the clutch.
into Reverse.
With the 5-speed transmission you can engage R (Reverse) only
by moving the gearshift from the left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth)
gears before you shift into R (Reverse). This is a special lockout
feature that protects you from accidentally shifting into R when
you downshift from 5 (Fifth) gear.
5. Once R (Reverse) is engaged, slowly release the clutch pedal
from the floor.
*[DR13000(ALL)03/94]
If R (Reverse) is not engaged, continue to push the clutch pedal
in while you put the gearshift back into Neutral. Then, release
the clutch pedal for a moment and repeat steps 2 through 5.
*[DR13100(ALL)03/91]
Upshifting/downshifting
[DR13200(ALL)01/95]
Upshift and downshift at the speeds that are specfied in the
charts.
252
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
%
*[DR13250(ALL)06/95]
[DR14950(ALL)04/94]
Recommended Shift Speeds
Engines with 5-Speed Manual Overdrive Transmission
[DR15000(ALL)10/94]
thirty pica
chart:0021181-D
253
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR15100(ALL)03/95]
When you slow down or climb a steep hill, always downshift
before the engine starts to lose power. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives your vehicle better acceleration to
increase speed again.
*[DR15200(ALL)03/95]
When you drive down steep hills, downshifting helps you keep
a safe speed and helps prevent unnecessary wear on the brakes.
*[DR15300(ALL)03/95]
When you come to a stop, do not downshift through each gear.
Disengage the clutch and use the brake as necessary.
Downshifting through the gears decreases your vehicle’s fuel
economy.
*[DR15400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Continued use of a damaged or worn clutch, prolonged
clutch slippage or downshifting at excessive speeds can
result in a failure of the engine, transmission or clutch
components.
*[DR15500(ALL)03/91]
Transmission Function
[DR15600(ALL)10/94]
Upshift at the speeds specified in the chart. All forward gears
are synchronized allowing you to shift into them with your
vehicle in motion. The clutch pedal should be fully depressed
when shifting.
*[DR15625(ALL)04/94]
NOTE: Shifting during extremely low rpm’s can result in a
momentary audible rattle which disappears as vehicle
rpm’s are increased. Shifting at higher speeds will
eliminate this sound.
*[DR15700(ALL)03/95]
*[DR15800(ALL)01/95]
Parking
To park your vehicle, apply the service brake pedal, and shift
into N (Neutral) while still maintaining pressure on the service
brake. Set the parking brake fully. Shift into first and turn off
the ignition.
254
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR15900(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and
set the parking brake fully.
*[DR15915(ALL)01/95]
% [DR15945( X)01/95]
*
%
%
*[DR15950(ALL)04/95]
Steering Your Vehicle
Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power steering uses
energy from the engine to help steer your vehicle.
If the amount of effort needed to steer your vehicle changes at a
constant vehicle speed, have the power steering system checked.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more
effort.
*[DR15960(ALL)01/95]
Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for
more than five seconds if the engine is running. This can
damage the power steering pump.
*[DR15985(ALL)05/90]
NOTE: After any severe impact such as striking large
potholes, sliding into curbs on icy roads, or a collision
involving the front end, observe the steering wheel
alignment. If the spokes of the steering wheel seem to
be in a different position while going straight down
the road, have the front suspension and steering
checked for possible damage.
255
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
%
*[DR16101(ALL)03/95]
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) System
(If equipped)
[DR16130(ALL)10/94]
When you select the 4WD mode, your vehicle uses all four
wheels to power itself. This increases traction, enabling you to
drive your 4x4 over terrain and road conditions not travelled
normally by two-wheel drive vehicles.
*[DR16160(ALL)10/94]
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case that
allows you to select four-wheel drive when necessary. Methods
for engaging and disengaging 4WD and low range will depend
on which system your vehicle has.
[DR17585( X)01/95]
4WD Systems — Control Trac
[DR17615( X)01/95]
The Control Trac 4WD system functions in three modes. In
two-wheel drive mode, power is delivered only to the rear axle.
The 4WD AUTO position provides four-wheel drive with full
power delivered to the rear axle, and to the front axle as
required for increased traction. The 4WD LOW position
provides four-wheel drive with full power delivered to the front
and rear axles when above average power is required at
reduced speeds.
[DR17645( X)01/95]
Four-wheel drive operation (4WD LOW) on dry pavement is not
recommended. Operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW on dry
pavement will increase noise, vibration, tire wear, and decrease
fuel economy.
[DR17690( X)08/94]
Control Trac system indicator lights
[DR17735( X)03/95]
A 4WD indicator light and a 4WD LOW indicator light are
located in the instrument cluster. If either light flashes, take
your vehicle in for service.
[DR17750(ALL)01/95]
■ Two-Wheel Drive mode — Neither the 4WD nor the 4WD
LOW lights are lit.
[DR17790( X)1/96]
■ 4WD Auto mode — Only the 4WD light is lit.
256
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR17810(ALL)10/95]
■ 4WD LOW mode — Only the 4WD LOW light is lit.
[DR17855( X)10/94]
To shift from Two-Wheel Drive to 4WD AUTO:
[DR17900( X)10/94]
To shift into 4WD AUTO, rotate the 4WD switch located on the
instrument panel to 4WD AUTO. This shift can be done at a
stop or on the fly.
[DR17910( X)01/95]
The initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD AUTO while the
vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunks and
ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and is not a cause for concern.
[DR17920( X)01/95]
Because of possible damage to drivetrain components, never
shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD with the rear wheels
slipping.
[DR17935( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Electric shift switch
art:0021252-B
[DR18030( X)10/94]
To shift from 4WD AUTO to Two-Wheel Drive:
[DR18060( X)01/95]
Rotate the 4WD switch to 2WD; the light on the instrument
cluster will go out indicating the vehicle is in two-wheel drive.
This can be done at any speed.
257
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR18230( X)10/94]
To shift from 4WD AUTO or 2WD to 4WD LOW:
[DR18290( X)01/95]
Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatic
transmission in N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicles
with a manual transmission. Rotate the 4WD switch on the
instrument panel to 4WD LOW. Both the 4WD and 4WD LOW
lights are now lit.
[DR18293( X)06/95]
For Explorers equipped with Automatic Ride Control:
[DR18294( X)06/95]
After shifting to 4WD LOW, wait about 90 seconds. This will
improve ground clearance and off-road handling. Refer to
Automatic Ride Control in the Features chapter.
[DR18320( X)08/94]
To shift from 4WD LOW to 4WD AUTO or 2WD:
[DR18400( X)01/95]
Stop the vehicle, depress the brake and place the automatic
transmission into N (Neutral) or depress the clutch on vehicles
with a manual transmission. Rotate the 4WD switch on the
instrument panel to 4WD AUTO or 2WD.
[DR18500(ALL)03/95]
It is not recommended to operate the vehicle in the 4WD modes
with a temporary spare. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate at speeds above 10 mph or for distances above 50 miles.
Extended operation in 4WD with a temporary spare may result
in damage to drivetrain components.
[DR18600( X)12/95]
All-Wheel Drive System (If equipped)
[DR18620( X)12/95]
If your vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD), power
is constantly supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case.
The AWD system is full-time and has no external controls.
[DR18630( X)12/95]
The AWD transfer case utilizes a viscous clutch that distributes
torque to the front and rear differentials (approximately 35%
front and 65% rear). The viscous clutch is filled with a
high-viscosity fluid, see Lubricant Specifications in the Servicing
Your Explorer chapter for more information.
258
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR18640( X)1/96]
Vehicles equipped with AWD are more capable of superior
traction in wet and dry conditions than 2-wheel drive vehicles.
AWD vehicles are also capable of being driven on sand, snow,
mud, and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that
are the same as vehicles equipped with 4WD. For more
information on driving off-road, see Driving Off Road with
4-Wheel Drive and AWD and the Four Wheeling With Ford
supplement in your owner’s portfolio.
*[DR19200(ALL)12/95]
*[DR19300(ALL)12/95]
Driving Off Road with 4-Wheel Drive and AWD
*[DR19400( X)10/94]
*[DR19600(ALL)11/89]
■ Do not use 4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
*[DR19800(ALL)12/95]
When using four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive, maintain
steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering
wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel rim from
the outside. Do not grip the spokes.
*[DR19900(ALL)05/90]
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects
such as rocks and stumps. Know the terrain or examine maps of
the area in question before driving. Map out your route
beforehand. To maintain steering and braking control of your
vehicle, you must have all four tires on the ground, and they
must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
[DR19925(ALL)10/94]
Transmission upshift in 4WD with transfer case in 4WD LOW
may be quite firm due to large total gear reduction. This
condition is normal.
%
Vehicles equipped with four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive are
especially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud, or rough
terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both off and on the road.
The driving tips below will help you learn to use four-wheel
drive.
■ Special maintenance procedures are necessary after operating
with drive components in water.
259
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR20000(ALL)11/89]
*[DR20100(ALL)11/89]
Sand
*[DR20200(ALL)11/89]
*[DR20300(ALL)12/89]
Mud and Water
*[DR20400(ALL)11/89]
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not
stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly, while applying light
pressure on the brake pedal.
*[DR20500(ALL)11/89]
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating
driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance which could damage drive
components.
*[DR20525(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged in
water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
*[DR20650( X)11/89]
Additional Special Driving Instructions for
Utility Vehicles
*[DR20701(ALL)11/89]
Driving on Hill or Slope Terrain
[DR20800(ALL)08/94]
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes, you could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive
straight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know
the conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over the
crest.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels of the
vehicle on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce the
tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily
through the terrain. Apply accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning the wheels.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
260
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR20900(ALL)11/89]
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear, rather than
finding it necessary to downshift from a higher gear after the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the
possibility of stalling.
*[DR21000(ALL)11/89]
When descending a steep hill avoid sudden braking. Rapid
pumping of the brake pedal will help slow the vehicle and still
maintain steering control.
*[DR21101(ALL)11/89]
*[DR21200(ALL)12/95]
Driving on Snow or Ice
*[DR21300(ALL)11/89]
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of
direction on snow or ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
*[DR21310(ALL)05/95]
All utility-type and Four-Wheel Drive vehicles have special
design and equipment features to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific
design characteristics give them higher centers of gravity than
ordinary passenger cars.
A four-wheel drive or all-wheel drive vehicle has advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle. If so equipped, keep the vehicle in four-wheel
drive if icy or slippery conditions exist.
*[DR21325(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are NOT designed
for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles.
*[DR21400(ALL)03/95]
*[DR21500(ALL)01/93]
*[DR21600(ALL)06/95]
%
Brakes
Front Disc Brakes
The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require
service other than periodic inspection for pad wear.
261
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR21700( X)07/93]
Rear Disc Brakes
[DR21800( X)06/94]
The rear disc brakes are self-adjusting. They do not require any
service other than periodic inspection for pad wear.
*[DR22100(ALL)11/89]
Hydraulic Power Brakes
[DR22200(ALL)08/94]
The hydraulic brake system is made up of two independent
hydraulic circuits. One hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to the
front disc brakes and the other hydraulic circuit supplies fluid
to the rear drum or disc brakes. These two circuits are supplied
by a common hydraulic brake fluid reservoir, with a fluid level
sensor.
*[DR22300(ALL)11/89]
The brake light in the instrument cluster will light for low brake
fluid in the common brake fluid reservoir.
*[DR22400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
An increase in pedal travel will result in reduced braking
capability. The brake system should be checked
immediately.
[DR22905(ALL)10/94]
Four Wheel Anti-lock Brake System
*[DR22910( X)08/94]
Your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-lock Braking
System (4WABS). The 4WABS helps the driver to maintain
vehicle control by preventing wheel lockup during hard
braking.
*[DR22915(ALL)03/94]
The 4WABS operates with a computer that is able to optimize
vehicle control during braking on varying tire and road
conditions by modulating the brake pressure at each of the front
wheels and the rear axle. This “pumping action” is similar to
the driver “pumping” the brakes but happens at a much faster
rate.
262
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR22920(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
The Anti-lock system does NOT assist the vehicle in
stopping quickly on wet or icy surfaces. Heavy braking
combined with poor road conditions could cause you to
lose steering control of your vehicle.
*[DR22925(ALL)10/94]
*[DR22930(ALL)05/94]
Using anti-lock brakes
The operation of a vehicle with 4WABS is not similar to the
operation of normal brakes. Some differences exist and are listed
below:
*[DR22935(ALL)10/94]
■ Apply the brake steadily. In the event of a panic stop, do
%
*[DR22940(ALL)10/94]
*[DR22945(ALL)05/95]
NOT “pump” the brakes. “Pumping” the brakes during an
Anti-lock stop will diminish braking effectiveness.
■ During an Anti-lock stop, the driver will notice a brake
pedal pulsation and hear some noise from the engine
compartment. This is an indication that the 4WABS system is
working correctly and is normal.
RWARNING
The Anti-lock system does NOT decrease the time
necessary to apply the brakes. Always leave enough room
between the vehicle in front of you and your vehicle.
[DR22950(ALL)05/95]
*
[DR22955(ALL)10/94]
4WABS driver warning light
The 4WABS computer continuously monitors the system while
driving for any electrical faults or system malfunctions. In
addition, the 4WABS computer performs an initial system check
called bulb proveout when the vehicle ignition is switched on.
During bulb proveout, the ABS light on the instrument cluster
will momentarily illuminate and then go out.
*[DR22960(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: After starting the vehicle and upon initial drive-off,
the driver may notice a single pulse of the brake
pedal and a noise from the engine compartment. This
is part of the initial system check and is normal.
263
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR22965(ALL)05/95]
Should a malfunction in the 4WABS system occur, the ABS light
on the instrument cluster will come on and stay on indicating
that the anti-lock system has been shut down and the vehicle
needs to be serviced. Normal braking is not affected unless the
brake warning light is also illuminated.
*[DR22970(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: It is important to note that when the ABS Warning
Light is illuminated the ABS system is disabled. The
vehicle must be serviced immediately to restore the
benefits of the Anti-lock system.
*[DR22975(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Mobile phones or radio transmitters not installed by
Ford Motor Company may interfere with the Anti-lock
System. Should the Anti-lock system activate
unexpectedly or the Anti-lock Warning Light
illuminate after installation of such a unit, have the
installation of the unit checked.
*[DR23000(ALL)12/89]
*[DR23250(ALL)11/89]
If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is “Low”
*[DR23300(X)07/95]
Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate stops does not
affect the function of the brake system and is normal. However,
if the squeal becomes louder or more frequent, have your
brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified service technician.
%
If during normal operation the brake pedal seems “low”, it may
indicate the need for a brake system inspection and/or service.
You should have your brakes checked as soon as possible.
*[DR23400(ALL)11/89]
RWARNING
Modifications to the suspension spring rates and/or
vehicle ride height may adversely affect vehicle stopping
ability.
264
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR23500(ALL)07/92]
*[DR23600(ALL)05/95]
[DR23710( X)07/95]
If Brakes Pull
■ Check tire pressure.
■ If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10
moderatley fast stops from 40 mph (64 km/h). It may be
necessary to repeat this operation to properly seat new
brakes.
*[DR23800(ALL)05/95]
If pull occurs during the first 500 miles (800 km), make 10
moderately fast stops from 40 mph (65 km/h) and then
perform the self-adjustment procedure above. It may be
necessary to repeat this operation to properly seat new brake
linings and pads.
*[DR24000(ALL)01/93]
*[DR24100(ALL)11/89]
Stopping Distances
*[DR24200(ALL)01/95]
*[DR24300(ALL)05/95]
Applying the Brakes
*[DR24400(ALL)07/95]
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This
will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance and may also
cause brake damage.
%
%
*[DR24500(ALL)05/95]
Stopping distances vary with different loads and driving
conditions. Use caution when encountering new conditions and
acquaint yourself with vehicle performance. Take full advantage
of engine braking power when slowing down.
Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the “squeeze” technique
— push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force. This
allows the wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing
down, which lets you steer properly.
RWARNING
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a
lower gear. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as
they may overheat and become less effective.
265
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR24600(ALL)03/95]
*[DR24650(ALL)01/95]
Using the Parking Brake
*[DR24800(ALL)12/91]
The parking brake pedal is suspended just below the bottom of
the instrument panel to the left of service brake and/or clutch
pedals. To set the parking brake while parking your vehicle,
press the brake pedal with your right foot and hold it while
you push the parking brake pedal down firmly and fully with
your left foot.
%
The parking brake should be used whenever you park your
vehicle.
[DR24930(ALL)05/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020568-D
Parking brake
266
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR24950(ALL)03/95]
RWARNING
When parking, do not use the gearshift in place of the
parking brake. Turn the key to LOCK whenever you
leave your vehicle. Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual
transmission). Never leave your vehicle unattended while
it is running. If you do not take these precautions, your
vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
[DR25015(ALL)03/93]
To release the parking brake, press the service brake pedal with
your right foot and hold the parking brake pedal down with
your left foot while you pull the parking brake release lever.
Lift your foot from the parking brake pedal after it is released.
*[DR25050(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If the parking brake is fully released, but the Brake
System light remains on, have the brakes checked
immediately. They may not be working properly.
*[DR25100(ALL)06/95]
The parking brake is not designed to stop a moving vehicle, but
you can use the parking brake to stop your vehicle in an
emergency if the normal brakes fail. However, since the parking
brake applies only the rear brakes, the stopping distance will
increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be
adversely affected.
*[DR25200(ALL)01/95]
% [DR25250(ALL)01/95]
*
*[DR25301(ALL)07/95]
Driving Under Special Conditions
%
Tips for Safe Driving
As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and handle
differently from your previous vehicle. Use care until you
become accustomed to its various features and driving
characteristics.
267
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR25350(ALL)03/95]
Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits. Sudden
acceleration, deceleration, turning, or combinations of these
maneuvers can cause a vehicle to behave differently than
anticipated.
*[DR25501(ALL)02/95]
*[DR25550(ALL)11/92]
Wheel Spin
[DR26350(ALL)12/92]
If the wheels spin, use 2 (Second gear) to gain traction. Move
forward slowly and evenly. If this does not work, try rocking
the vehicle.
*[DR26401(ALL)05/91]
% [DR26550(ALL)05/90]
*
*[DR26590(ALL)07/95]
*[DR26601(ALL)05/95]
For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to drive away.
■ Extreme acceleration can cause the rear wheels to spin,
perhaps resulting in reduced steering control.
High Speed Driving
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.
RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle
components.
*[DR26625(ALL)12/91]
Speed limiter
[DR26652(ALL)01/95]
All models are equipped with a Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) which limits the maximum engine speed and thus road
speed in top gear. Vehicle operation is normal since the
controlled maximum speed is above posted highway speeds in
North America.
268
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR26701(ALL)01/95]
% [DR26750(ALL)01/95]
*
*[DR26801(ALL)03/95]
*[DR26850(ALL)03/95]
*[DR26901(ALL)01/95]
*[DR26951(ALL)01/95]
%
[DR27001(ALL)01/95]
Driving in Bad Weather
Slippery roads
Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:
■ Do not quickly move the steering wheel unless necessary.
■ Drive slower than you normally would.
■ Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
■ Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to avoid locking
your front wheels (except with 4WABS).
[DR27025(ALL)05/95]
■ To stop on ice, shift to N (Neutral) below 10 mph (15 km/h)
and gently pump brakes (except with 4WABS).
*[DR27050(ALL)02/93]
*[DR27101(ALL)05/91]
*[DR27150(ALL)05/95]
■ Consider using one of the lower gears.
■ For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD, and try to drive slowly away.
RWARNING
To avoid losing control on slippery roads, do not
downshift into Low with the automatic transmission
when moving faster than 20 mph (32 km/h). Do not
downshift into First with the manual transmission when
moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
*[DR27450(ALL)03/95]
*[DR27501(ALL)03/95]
Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)
*[DR27550(ALL)03/93]
Extended use of other than matching size tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal
driving and should not be noticeable to the driver.
%
This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface
with poor traction.
269
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR27601(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*[DR27651(ALL)01/95]
*[DR27675(ALL)06/92]
High water
*[DR27701(ALL)05/90]
Do not drive through flooded areas unless you are sure that the
water is below the bottom of the wheel hubs.
*[DR27750(ALL)04/94]
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. You may
have limited traction or wet brakes, so allow extra stopping
distance because your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
*[DR27801(ALL)01/95]
After you drive through the standing water, apply your brakes
gently several times as your vehicle moves slowly. This helps to
dry the brakes.
*[DR27820(ALL)06/95]
NOTE: If the transmission and transfer case is submerged in
water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if
necessary.
*[DR27825(ALL)03/93]
NOTE: All rear axle lube quantities must be replaced every
100,000 miles (160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the lube should not
be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or
repair required.
*[DR27850(ALL)11/89]
*[DR27901(ALL)05/90]
Rocking the vehicle
*[DR27950(ALL)05/95]
If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud or snow), you
may rock it out of the spot. Shift in a steady rhythm between
forward and reverse gears. Allow the transmission to fully
engage, then press lightly on the accelerator. Do not rock the
vehicle for more than a few minutes. This may overheat the
%
Never attempt to cross water that is fast flowing or of unknown
depth.
For 4x4 vehicles, engage 4WD LOW, when the vehicle gets
stuck and try to drive away.
270
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
engine and transmission, causing damage to both. In addition,
other vehicle systems and components may also be damaged.
*[DR27975(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
*[DR28050(ALL)03/95]
*[DR28101(ALL)01/95]
Driving With a Heavy Load
*[DR28150(ALL)08/95]
The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect the GVWR or
GAWR limitations. Usage of replacement tires with higher
weight limits than originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may lower GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
*[DR28201(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
%
There are limits to the amount of weight your vehicle can carry
or tow. The total weight of your vehicle, plus the weight of the
passengers and cargo, should never be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight that your
vehicle carries over the front axle and rear axle should never be
more than the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
respective axle.
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle
may be damaged or you may lose control and injure
someone.
*[DR28750(ALL)01/93]
*[DR28801(ALL)06/92]
Vehicle/Trailer Loads
All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer provided the Gross
Combined Weight (GCW) is less than or equal to the GVWR
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. For heavier
trailer applications, refer to the towing information found later
in this chapter.
271
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR28950(ALL)02/95]
*[DR29001(ALL)03/91]
Trailer Towing (may require trailer tow option package)
*[DR29025(ALL)09/92]
Your trailer towing capability will vary based on the standard
and optional equipment on your vehicle. Refer to the following
Vehicle Loading/Towing Information and the Trailer Towing Tables
to determine the specific towing capability of your vehicle.
*[DR29050(ALL)02/92]
*[DR29101(ALL)01/95]
■ Stay within the load limits when you tow.
*[DR29151(ALL)01/95]
■ Use extra caution when driving your vehicle while you tow.
*[DR29201(ALL)01/95]
■ Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer.
*[DR29350(ALL)05/94]
Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
500 miles (800 km).
*[DR29401(ALL)06/92]
*[DR29450(ALL)03/91]
Vehicle Loading/Towing Information
%
%
Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. For your safety
and for the good of your vehicle, use the right equipment for
the type of trailer you tow.
■ Carefully and thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing,
making sure to use the right equipment and to attach it
properly. (See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)
(See Driving while you tow in this chapter.)
(See Servicing your vehicle if you tow in this chapter.)
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not
volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space with
large or heavy loads. Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as
tire, rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified for your
vehicle at the assembly plant on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The Certification Label is located on the left
front door lock facing or the door latch post pillar.
272
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR29501(ALL)12/91]
Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basically custom vehicles
designed to carry a load. Most owners start with a base vehicle
and add production and dealer installed and/or aftermarket
components to suit their tastes and purposes. Even trucks that
are purchased for personal transportation only are likely to have
considerable optional equipment, such as step bumpers and
light bars, for example.
*[DR29525(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
*[DR29530(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
*[DR29535(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
*[DR29551(ALL)03/91]
Each additional item of equipment affects how much cargo a
vehicle can carry. If a vehicle is overloaded, performance will
suffer and service concerns may arise.
*[DR29601(ALL)04/95]
The following is a typical example of a Safety Compliance
Certification Label and an explanation of how this information
should be used:
273
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR29750( X)03/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090122-A
Safety Compliance Certification Label
*[DR29950(ALL)06/92]
Do not use the sample numbers on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label shown. Use the actual numbers from your
vehicle certification label.
*[DR30001(ALL)06/92]
*[DR30050(ALL)03/94]
Understanding Loading/Towing Information
*[DR30101(ALL)01/93]
*[DR30150(ALL)01/93]
*[DR30200(ALL)01/93]
*[DR30250(ALL)01/93]
*[DR30301(ALL)01/93]
■ Base Curb Weight
The following terms are used to describe the ability to carry or
tow a load:
■ Payload
■ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
274
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR30310(ALL)06/92]
*[DR30320(ALL)06/92]
*[DR30330(ALL)06/92]
*[DR30340(ALL)06/92]
*[DR30351(ALL)03/91]
*[DR30401(ALL)03/94]
■ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)
*[DR30451(ALL)03/91]
*[DR30501(ALL)03/91]
Payload
*[DR30550(ALL)03/91]
*[DR30601(ALL)05/95]
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
*[DR30650(ALL)08/95]
It is important to remember that GVW is not a limit or a
specification. If an owner loads up a vehicle and weighs it, that’s
the GVW at that moment. If the owner piles on more of a load
and weighs it again, that becomes the GVW.
*[DR30701(ALL)03/91]
*[DR30750(ALL)10/94]
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
%
■ Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
■ Maximum Trailer Weight
■ Trailer Weight Range
Base Curb Weight
The Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including
fuel, coolants, lubricants, emergency tools, spare wheel and tire.
It also includes any equipment that is standard on that model. It
does not include passengers, cargo or optional equipment
installed by factory, dealer, aftermarket supplier or customer.
Payload is the combined, maximum allowable weight of cargo,
occupants and optional equipment that the truck is designed to
carry. It is Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the base curb
weight.
If you add base curb weight and the weight of a load (including
passengers, cargo and optional equipment) being carried at a
particular time, you get the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW).
To avoid overloading a vehicle, the owner should observe the
manufacturer’s specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. The
GVWR is the maximum total weight of base vehicle, passengers,
optional components and cargo that a particular vehicle was
designed to carry.
275
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR30801(ALL)01/93]
*[DR30850(ALL)03/91]
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
*[DR30901(ALL)03/91]
Your Safety Compliance Certification Label not only gives the
GVWR, it also gives the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
which is the carrying capacity for each axle system. For trucks,
the rear axle will be designed to carry more weight than the
front.
*[DR30950(ALL)06/92]
The rating is based on the carrying capacity of the lowest rated
axle and suspension component as well as other factors. This is
why it’s so important to observe vehicle loading ratings.
Overloading a vehicle punishes components and can lead to
shortened service life or outright failure.
*[DR31001(ALL)06/92]
The capacity of the tires is included as part of the axle and
suspension system, which is to be considered when determining
the lowest rated component. Tires are rated to carry a specific
maximum load at a specific maximum tire pressure.
*[DR31050(ALL)06/92]
Passenger car type tires when installed on light trucks and
multipurpose passenger vehicles are rated at 10% lower load
carrying capacity due to the differences in vehicle usages.
*[DR31101(ALL)05/95]
The vehicle must not be loaded to both the front and rear
GAWR because the GVWR will be exceeded. The GAWR of the
front and rear axles exceeds the GVWR when added together to
allow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo.
*[DR31110(ALL)06/92]
With the tires inflated to the specified pressure the total weight
of your vehicle must not exceed the GVWR and GAWR
specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. This
includes full fuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants as
well as the cargo load.
%
We have all seen a car or a truck that is loaded down in the
rear and riding high in the front. This is a dangerous condition
that usually means that the rear suspension components are
under severe strain and that vehicle handling is impaired. There
is more to carrying a load than just payload or GVWR.
276
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR31120(ALL)06/92]
*[DR31130(ALL)06/92]
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)
*[DR31140(ALL)06/92]
*[DR31150(ALL)05/95]
Maximum Trailer Weight Rating
*[DR31160(ALL)06/92]
*[DR31170(ALL)05/95]
Maximum Trailer Weight
*[DR31180(ALL)06/92]
*[DR31190(ALL)06/92]
Trailer Weight Range
*[DR31301(ALL)03/91]
*[DR31350(ALL)03/91]
*[DR31401(ALL)12/91]
Calculating The Load
%
*[DR31450(ALL)07/95]
GCWR is the maximum combined weight of the towing
vehicle (including passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer.
The GCWR is specified by the manufacturer to indicate the
combined maximum loaded weight that the vehicle is designed
to tow.
The maximum trailer weight rating is the maximum weight of a
trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. It is specified by the
manufacturer and is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb
weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required
option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver
from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
The maximum trailer weight is the maximum weight of a trailer
the loaded vehicle is permitted to tow. It is determined by
subtracting the weight of the loaded towing vehicle (including
passengers and cargo) from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
The trailer weight range is a specified range by weight, which
the trailer must fall within, ranging from zero to the maximum
trailer weight rating.
To know how much weight your vehicle can carry:
■ Obtain ratings from your Safety Compliance Certification
Label, and the Trailer towing specifications in the owner
guide (refer to the Index)
— Refer to the following sample illustration to locate the
various ratings on your Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
277
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR31501(ALL)03/91]
— If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, do not include
these ratings into your calculations.
*[DR31550(ALL)08/95]
■ Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle
*[DR31601(ALL)03/91]
■ Subtract the total weight of passengers, driver and optional
(without cargo).
equipment added by the factory, dealer or aftermarket
supplier to determine how much cargo weight you can carry.
[DR31650(ALL)04/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021184-A
*[DR31702(ALL)03/91]
Sample label
If you suspect that your payload is excessive, have your vehicle
weighed at a highway weigh station or appropriate commercial
facility. Weigh the total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), then
separately weigh the vehicle at the front and rear wheels. And
finally, weigh the trailer separately if applicable.
278
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR31751(ALL)03/91]
Use this chart to perform your calculations.
[DR31831( X)03/95]
twenty-six pica
chart:0090123-A
*[DR31851(ALL)03/91]
NOTE: The Truck Safety Compliance Certification Label has
two weight related entries that sometimes cause
confusion.
279
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR31901(ALL)08/95]
Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If this value is
given as 83 pounds (38 kgs) on the label, does this mean that
you are limited to adding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) of
accessories to the front end capacity? Not exactly. This says that
you can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of options on the front axle,
add 150 pound (68 kgs) passengers to all seating positions, and
add evenly distributed cargo in the box without exceeding the
GAWR F.
*[DR31950(ALL)06/92]
It is possible to hang heavier equipment on the front as long as
the vehicle owner/operator compensates. This can be
accomplished, if necessary, by carrying fewer passengers, less
cargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear, which has the
effect of reducing the load on the front. Keep in mind that the
GAWR F, GAWR R, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded.
*[DR32001(ALL)08/95]
Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): If, for
example, this value is given as 112 pounds (51 kgs), does this
mean that you are limited to adding 112 pounds (51 kgs) of
accessories to your vehicle? Not exactly. This is a number that is
related to government crash test standards, and only indirectly
reflects on the amount of accessory weight that can be carried.
*[DR32050(ALL)06/94]
In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112 pounds) (38 and
51 kgs), the important thing to remember is that for safe
operation, an owner/operator should calculate the amount and
the distribution of all weights (passengers, accessory equipment
and cargo). These combined weights should fall below the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
*[DR32201(ALL)01/93]
*[DR32251(ALL)10/94]
Trailers
Towing a trailer safely means having the proper weight on the
tongue (usually 10% of the trailer weight). Load-equalizing
hitches on large rigs may transfer weight to each of the vehicle’s
axles. This weight must be included in capacity calculations
when determining if the vehicle is loaded within safe limits.
280
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR32301(ALL)01/95]
*[DR32350(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo from your
vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle exceeds the GAWR for
either axle, shift the load or remove cargo accordingly.
RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label is exceeded, your vehicle
may be damaged or you may lose control and injure
someone.
*[DR32401(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight could result in engine damage,
transmission/axle damage, structural damage, loss of
control, and personal injury.
*[DR32450(ALL)05/95]
Use the Safety Compliance Certification Label to find the axle
code number and the engine type for your vehicle.
*[DR32500(ALL)03/91]
Use the appropriate Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) chart to find the Maximum GCWR for your type
engine and rear axle ratio.
*[DR32551(ALL)03/91]
Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from the Maximum
GCWR found in the chart. This is the maximum trailer weight
your vehicle can tow and must fall below the maximum shown
under Trailer Weight on the chart.
281
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR34025( X)04/94]
thirty pica
chart:0020645-E
282
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR34060( X)10/94]
ten pica chart:0020641-C
283
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR34080( X)04/89]
Manual Transmissions
[DR34150( X)06/94]
twenty-six pica
chart:0020642-G
284
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR34165( X)10/94]
twenty-eight pica
chart:0020934-E
285
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR34180( X)06/94]
Automatic Transmissions
[DR34250( X)06/95]
thirty pica
chart:0090209-A
286
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
[DR34275( X)10/94]
twenty-eight pica
chart:0020935-E
287
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR34300( X)12/95]
20 pica
chart:0090217-A
*[DR36500(ALL)01/95]
*[DR36550(ALL)01/95]
Preparing to Tow
For your safety and for the good of your vehicle, use the right
equipment for the type of trailer you tow. Also, make sure that
all towing equipment is properly attached to your vehicle. If
you are not certain that you are using the right equipment in
the proper manner, see your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
288
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR36600(ALL)01/93]
*[DR36800(ALL)12/91]
Hitches
*[DR37000(ALL)12/92]
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure
all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to
prevent noxious gases or water from entering.
[DR37100( X)01/95]
Trailer tow/step bumper
[DR37150( X)03/93]
The rear bumper has an integral hitch and only requires a ball
with a 3/4 inch shank diameter. The bumper has a Class II
capability (3500 lb/1590 kg trailer weight and 350 lb/159 kg
tongue weight).
[DR37250( X)01/95]
Use a frame mounted weight distributing hitch for trailers over
3,500 lb. (1590 kg).
*[DR37550(ALL)03/91]
NOTE: The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for
trailer towing with the factory bumper are only valid
when the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into the
ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to
either lower the hitch ball position or extend the hitch
ball rearward will significantly increase the loads on
the bumper and its attachments. This can result in the
failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered
abuse.
*[DR37575(ALL)03/91]
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a
frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
%
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a
hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches
are acceptable if installed properly. Follow towing instructions
of a reputable rental agency.
289
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
%
*[DR37800(ALL)07/95]
Safety Chains
[DR37925( X)03/93]
Located near the step bumper hitch ball position are two holes
in the underside of the hitch plate for a Class II trailer (max).
These holes may be used for safety chain attachment when
towing with the step bumper. Always use safety chains when
towing. Safety chains are used to retain connection between the
towing and towed vehicle in the event of separation of the
trailer coupling or ball. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
and allow slack for turning corners. Connect the chain to the
hitch plate using a positive coupling, such as “Quick Links”,
with a strength rating of at least that of the safety chain rating.
[DR37950( X)12/92]
When using a frame mounted trailer hitch, do not attach the
safety chains to the step bumper. Attach the safety chains to the
frame mounted hitch using the recommendations supplied by
the hitch manufacturer.
*[DR38000(ALL)08/95]
*[DR38100(ALL)03/95]
Trailer Brakes
%
Separate trailer brakes are required on most towed vehicles
weighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg).
*[DR38200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly
to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having
a collision greatly increase.
*[DR38300(ALL)06/95]
*[DR38400(ALL)11/89]
Trailer Lamps
*[DR38425(ALL)03/91]
Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiring provides two
circuits (right hand and left hand) to operate trailer stop/turn
tail lamps. Each stop/turn circuit will operate one combination
stop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357) on the trailer.
Never add more than one trailer light bulb to one circuit.
%
Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federal and local
regulations.
290
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR38450(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
*[DR38500(ALL)06/95]
*[DR38520(ALL)05/95]
%
*[DR38540(ALL)01/95]
Driving while you tow
Be especially careful when driving while you tow a trailer.
Never drive faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) when you tow in
hilly country on hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
If you use the speed control while you are towing on very long,
steep grades, the speed control may shut off.
[DR38600(ALL)12/95]
When towing a trailer in hilly terrain, with a vehicle equipped
with a 4R44E/4R55E/4R70W transmission, you may wish to
operate in O/D OFF (3rd gear) rather than j (Overdrive). This
will eliminate excessive downshifting and upshifting to maintain
speed. Shift back to j (Overdrive) whenever practical for
optimum powertrain cooling and fuel economy. This can be
accomplished by pushing in the transmission control switch
which is located on the end of the gearshift lever.
*[DR38800(ALL)06/95]
When descending a steep grade with a trailer, operate in Drive
rather than Overdrive. If additional braking is needed, shift the
automatic transmission gearshift into 2 (Second) gear or 1 (Low).
291
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
*[DR38925(ALL)08/95]
*[DR38950(ALL)08/93]
Servicing Your Vehicle If You Tow
[DR39000(ALL)08/95]
Trailer towing tips
Before starting on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing
in an area away from heavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of
the vehicle/trailer combination.
Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, with someone outside
at the rear of your trailer to guide you. Place your hand at the
bottom of the steering wheel and move it in the direction you
want the rear of the trailer to swing. Slight movement of the
steering wheel results in a much larger movement of the rear of
the trailer.
Allow more room for stopping with a trailer attached. Trailer
brakes should be applied first, whether manually or
automatically controlled, when approaching a stop.
*
[DR39100(ALL)11/89]
*[DR39200(ALL)05/90]
*[DR39300(ALL)11/89]
*[DR39400(ALL)11/89]
*[DR39500(ALL)05/95]
*[DR39600(ALL)11/89]
[DR39750(ALL)01/95]
If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your vehicle will need
to be serviced more frequently than usual. Refer to the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet for additional
information.
For a good handling truck-trailer combination, the trailer tongue
load should be approximately 10-15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
Make a thorough check of your equipment before starting out
on the road. After you have traveled about 50 miles (80 km)
stop in a protected area and double-check your hitch and
electrical connections. Also check trailer wheel lug nuts for
tightness.
When turning, drive slightly beyond the normal turning point
so the trailer wheels will clear curbs or other obstructions.
When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather,
place the gearshift selector lever in P (Park) to increase the
engine idle speed. This aids in engine cooling and air
conditioner efficiency. If the engine overheats, rotate the
function selector control knob to panel position to stop the
compressor and increase the engine speed for a short time.
292
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
Driving Your Explorer
*[DR39900(ALL)05/90]
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
However, if you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks
under the trailer’s wheels as follows:
*[DR40000(ALL)05/95]
*[DR40100(ALL)11/89]
■ Apply the brake pedal and hold.
*[DR40200(ALL)08/95]
■ With the chocks in place, release the brake pedal, making
*[DR40300(ALL)03/91]
■ For automatic transmissions — apply the parking brake by
[DR40400(ALL)01/95]
■ For manual transmissions — apply the service brake and
■ Have another person place the wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels.
sure the chocks are holding.
pressing the service brake pedal down firmly with your right
foot while applying the parking brake pedal with your left
foot.
shift into N (Neutral) while still maintaining pressure on the
service brake pedal. Set the parking brake fully.
*[DR40500(ALL)12/91]
■ Shift an automatic transmission into Park (P). Put the
*[DR40600(ALL)01/93]
*[DR40700(ALL)05/95]
*[DR40800(ALL)08/95]
*[DR40900(ALL)08/95]
*[DR41000(ALL)08/95]
To start, after being parked on a grade:
*[DR41100(ALL)05/95]
■ Apply the brake pedal and hold while another person
gearshift of a manual transmission in Reverse. If your vehicle
is equipped with four-wheel drive make sure the transfer
case is not in Neutral.
■ Apply the brake pedal and hold.
■ Start the engine.
■ Shift transmission into gear and release the parking brake.
■ Release the brake pedal and move the vehicle uphill to free
the wheel chocks.
retrieves the chocks.
293
File:10undrx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:12:36 1996
[DR41235(ALL)02/92]
Suspension Modifications
[DR41250(ALL)03/91]
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been
designed and tested to provide both safe, predictable
performance (whether loaded or empty) as well as durable load
carrying capability. Any modifications to the suspension or
steering systems can reduce your vehicle’s performance
capability and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Ford
recommends that you DO NOT make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (like lift kits, stabilizer bars or
snowplowing equipment) or by using replacement parts
non-equivalent to the original factory equipment.
*[DR41260(ALL)02/92]
*[DR41275(ALL)01/93]
Snowplowing
%
RWARNING
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
294
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
*[RE00400(ALL)03/95]
*[RE00500(ALL)08/95]
%
*[RE00600(ALL)02/95]
Jump-Starting Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the lights on or any
electrical equipment on after you turn the engine off. If this
happens, you may be able to jump-start your vehicle with a
booster battery.
RWARNING
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to
flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result
in injury or vehicle damage.
*[RE00700(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
To protect yourself when charging a battery, always
shield your face and eyes. Make sure that you can
breathe fresh air.
%
*[RE00800(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a
battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a
carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.
%
*[RE00900(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,
and clothing.
*[RE00910(ALL)07/95]
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,
immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If
someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk
or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable
oil. Call a doctor immediately.
295
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
*[RE00950(ALL)06/95]
RWARNING
Do not push-start your vehicle. You could damage the
catalytic converter. For further information, see Jumper
Cables in the Index.
*[RE01000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid damage or injury, follow these directions in the
order they are given. If in doubt, call for road service.
*[RE01100(ALL)03/95]
*[RE01200(ALL)03/95]
Preparing Your Vehicle
1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so you need to
use a 12-volt jumper system. You will damage your starting
motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts if you
connect them to a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt
batteries in series or a 24-volt generator set).
*[RE01300(ALL)03/95]
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle. You
*[RE01400(ALL)04/95]
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled
*[RE01500(ALL)03/95]
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive
*[RE01600(ALL)02/95]
5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turning on the fan
could damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
vehicle. Make sure the vehicles do not touch each other. Set
the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
corrosion before you attach the jumper cables.
helps protect the electrical system from voltage surges. Turn
off all other switches and lights in both vehicles to prevent
possible damage to either vehicle’s electrical systems.
296
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
*[RE01700(ALL)05/95]
*[RE01800(ALL)03/95]
%
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the discharged battery. (You can connect either
jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you use
the same cable for both positive terminals.) Most jumper
cables have a red cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and the black for
the negative ones.
*[RE01900(ALL)04/95]
2. Connect the other end of the first cable to the positive (+)
*[RE02000(ALL)07/95]
3. Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (s)
*[RE02100(ALL)03/95]
4. Connect the other end of that cable to a good metallic
*[RE02200(ALL)07/95]
terminal of the booster battery.
terminal of the booster battery — NOT to the discharged
battery.
surface on the engine or frame of the disabled vehicle. The
following illustration shows where you can find a metallic
surface.
RWARNING
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (s) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround
the battery.
297
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE02300(ALL)08/94]
10-1/2 pica
Attaching jumper cables
art:0021186-B
*[RE02500(ALL)03/95]
*[RE02600(ALL)03/95]
Jump-Starting
1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in the way of
moving engine parts, then start the booster vehicle. Run the
engine at a moderate speed.
*[RE02700(ALL)03/95]
2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few minutes and then
*[RE02800(ALL)03/95]
3. When both vehicles are running, let them idle for a few
*[RE02900(ALL)03/95]
*[RE03000(ALL)03/95]
%
*[RE03100(ALL)06/95]
*[RE03200(ALL)06/95]
start the disabled vehicle. It may take a couple of tries before
the vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start after several
attempts, there may be a different problem.
minutes to charge the discharged battery.
Removing jumper cables
1. Always remove the jumper cables in the reverse order.
Remove the negative (s) end of the jumper cable from the
metallic surface on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the booster battery.
3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the booster battery.
298
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
*[RE03400(ALL)05/95]
4. Remove the other end of the positive (+) cable from the
discharged battery.
*[RE03500(ALL)1/96]
After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while to let the
engine “relearn” its idle conditions. Drive it around for a while
with all electrical accessories turned off to let the battery
recharge. Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until all drive
modes are “relearned.” You may need to use a battery charger
to fully recharge the battery.
*[RE03525( X)01/95]
If you need to replace your battery, see Battery in the Servicing
Your Explorer chapter.
*[RE03600(ALL)03/95]
*[RE03700(ALL)01/95]
Changing a Tire
%
%
*[RE03800(ALL)03/95]
[RE03915( X)10/94]
*[RE03930(ALL)05/95]
If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do not apply the
brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease the speed. Hold the
steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off the ignition, set
the parking brake, and turn on the hazard flashers.
The Conventional Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a conventional spare tire,
which you can use as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare tire
is identical to the other tires that come with your vehicle,
although the wheel may not match.
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*[RE04000(ALL)03/95]
*[RE04100(ALL)03/95]
%
The Temporary Spare Tire
You may have a high pressure temporary spare tire. This spare
tire is smaller than a regular tire and is designed for emergency
use only. Use it only when you get a flat tire and replace it as
soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with the words
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that you can easily identify it.
299
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE04150(ALL)12/95]
It is not recommended that vehicles equipped with 4WD be
operated in the 4WD modes with a temporary spare. If 4WD
operation is necessary, do not operate at speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km). Extended
operation in 4WD with a temporary spare may result in damage
to powertrain components.
*[RE04200(ALL)01/93]
RWARNING
If you use the temporary spare tire continuously or do
not follow these precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly injuring
yourself or others.
*[RE04275(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*[RE04280(ALL)10/94]
Extended use of other than matching size spare tires on a
Traction-Lok axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal
driving and should not be noticeable to the driver.
*[RE04300(ALL)01/95]
*[RE04400(ALL)01/95]
*[RE04500(ALL)01/95]
When you drive with the temporary spare tire, DO NOT:
*[RE04600(ALL)01/95]
*[RE04700(ALL)01/95]
*[RE04800(ALL)01/95]
■ tow a trailer.
*[RE04900(ALL)01/95]
■ use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.
[RE04950(ALL)10/94]
■ exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any circumstances.
■ load your vehicle so that it is heavier than the maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the tire decal.
■ use tire chains on this tire.
■ try to repair the temporary spare tire or remove it from its
wheel.
■ engage four-wheel drive on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
300
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
*[RE05000(ALL)01/95]
■ drive through an automatic car wash with this tire. Because
*[RE05100(ALL)03/95]
*[RE05250(ALL)06/94]
Spare Tire Location
*[RE05550( X)03/91]
To remove the spare tire:
%
[RE05650( X)10/94]
the temporary spare tire is smaller than a conventional tire,
it reduces the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get caught
in the rails and it could be damaged.
The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed at the rear under the
frame.
1. Open the liftgate. Assemble the jack handle (stowed behind
the rear seats under the carpet) to the lug wrench (stowed in
driver’s side rear quarter trim panel). Insert drive section of
the handle into the actuator hole and turn counterclockwise
until the cable is slack enough to allow the spare tire to be
pulled rearward from under the vehicle.
*[RE05700( X)10/94]
2. Slide the spare tire to the rear and remove the retainer from
*[RE05850( X)10/94]
3. To stow the cable/retainer with spare removed, turn jack
the wheel.
handle wrench clockwise until slack is removed.
[RE05875( X)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021216-A
Assembling the jack handle
301
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE05950( X)02/95]
27-1/2 pica art:0020558-F
The spare tire location and assembly
*[RE06050( X)03/91]
*[RE06150( X)10/94]
To stow spare tire:
1. Insert the jack handle or lug nut wrench into the actuator
hole and turn counterclockwise until the cable/retainer is
extended for insertion into the wheel.
302
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
*[RE06200( X)10/94]
*[RE06250( X)12/91]
*[RE06350( X)10/94]
2. Install the retainer through wheel center with valve stem
facing up.
NOTE: Stow aluminum wheel and tire with valve stem down.
3. Rotate the handle clockwise to secure tire. Continue until the
lift mechanism “slips”.
*[RE06400( X)03/91]
4. Check for proper seating against underbody supports and
[RE06500( X)10/94]
5. To stow the largest flat tire (P255 tire on a 16 inch trispoked
retighten if necessary.
wheel), place inside vehicle and secure with webbing
retainer. Raise spare tire cable until secure.
[RE06600( X)10/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021217-A
Stowing largest flat tire
303
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE14815( X)09/95]
Explorer Limited 4x2/4x4
*[RE15100(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Make sure the spare tire and jacking equipment are
stowed and secured in the proper storage location.
*[RE15200(ALL)03/95]
*[RE15250(ALL)12/91]
%
*[RE15300(ALL)03/91]
*[RE15335(ALL)12/91]
*[RE15390(ALL)05/95]
Preparing to Change the Tire
NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than the front or rear
jacking points, be sure to use only hoist adapters with
a wide contact surface.
1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move or roll. If you
have an automatic transmission, put the gearshift in Park. If
you have a manual transmission, put the gearshift in
Reverse. Set the parking brake and block the wheel that is
diagonally opposite the tire that you are changing.
NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFF position.
When one of the back wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off
the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) or 1 (First). To
prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block the wheel (both
directions) that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire that is being changed.
[RE15400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be
seriously injured.
*[RE15550(ALL)03/95]
[RE16050( X)01/95]
2. Get out the spare tire and jack.
The jack is stowed behind the driver’s side, rear quarter trim
panel. Remove the quarter trim panel cover to get to it. The lug
nut wrench is attached to the inside of the quarter trim panel
cover. Stowed along with the jack is a jacking/tire changing
304
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
instruction sheet and a pair of tire changing gloves. The jack
handle is stowed behind the second row passenger seats under
the carpet. Assemble handle sections and lug wrench together.
[RE16075( X)02/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0021218-A
Assembling the jack handle
[RE16150( X)10/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020559-C
Jack stowage area
305
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE16250( X)01/95]
10-1/2 pica art:0020560-E
Jack handle location and installation (2-door model)
[RE16275( X)01/95]
10-1/2 pica
Jack handle location and installation (4-door model)
art:0021219-B
[RE16800(ALL)07/94]
3. Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel
covers or hubcaps and twist off.
[RE16830(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Use only the lug nut wrench provided to remove wheel
ornaments. Not using the tapered end of the lug nut
wrench at the pry-off notches may result in damage to
the finish of the wheel and ornament.
306
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
[RE16850(ALL)06/94]
RWARNING
Not using the tapered end of the lug nut wrench at the
pry-off notches may result in damage to the finish of the
wheel and ornament.
*[RE16900(ALL)10/89]
4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on the handle of the
*[RE17100(ALL)02/95]
5. Insert the jack handle into the jack and use the handle to
lug nut wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do
not remove the wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the
ground.
slide the jack under the vehicle.
*[RE17175(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*[RE17225(ALL)05/95]
% [RE17300(ALL)06/95]
*
%
Removing and Replacing the Tire
1. Positioning the jack
[RE18175( X)06/94]
a. To raise the front wheel, place the jack on the bracket or
the lower suspension arm.
[RE18251( X)08/91]
b. To raise a rear tire, place the jack under the rear axle
inboard of the spring shackle bolts.
307
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE18350( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Front jacking position
art:0021220-A
c. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is a
maximum of one inch off the ground.
[RE18401(ALL)06/94]
[RE18601( X)06/94]
10-1/2 pica
Rear jacking position
art:0020603-D
[RE18650(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Do not use the differential housing as a lift point.
308
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
[RE21151(ALL)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
art:0021188-A
*[RE21200(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part
of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack.
The jack is only meant for changing the tire.
*[RE21400(ALL)06/95]
*[RE21500(ALL)06/95]
*[RE21700(ALL)06/95]
2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nut wrench.
*[RE22200(ALL)01/95]
5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
*[RE22300(ALL)06/95]
6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order
3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
4. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs with the beveled
face toward the wheel. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the
lug nut snug against the wheel but do not tighten.
counterclockwise.
shown in the following illustration.
309
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE22400(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021189-A
Lug nut tightening sequence
*[RE23400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Use of wheels or lug nuts other than original equipment
could cause damage to the wheel or mounting system
and allow the wheels to come off while the vehicle is in
motion.
*[RE23500(ALL)07/95]
7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hub caps that your
[RE23600(ALL)01/95]
8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. (Make sure jack is
vehicle has. Make sure that they are screwed or snapped into
place.
securely fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.)
*[RE23700(ALL)06/95]
*[RE23800(ALL)06/93]
*[RE24200(ALL)10/89]
9. Unblock the wheels.
Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and at intervals specified in
the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
Also retighten to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) of
operation after any wheel change or any time the lug nuts are
loosened.
*[RE24301(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts at mileages specified
could allow wheels to come off while the vehicle is in
motion.
310
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
[RE24345( X)04/94]
eight pica
chart:0020591-B
[RE24400(ALL)10/94]
The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch
*[RE24500(ALL)07/95]
If the engine cranks but does not start or if you have had a
collision, the fuel pump shut-off switch may have been
triggered. The shut-off switch is a device that stops the fuel
pump when your vehicle has been involved in a substantial jolt.
For information on how to check and reset the fuel pump
shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Index.
*[RE24600(ALL)07/95]
%
*[RE24700(ALL)05/95]
[RE24800(ALL)09/95]
[RE24813( X)12/95]
Towing Your Vehicle
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional
towing service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance
center.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with wheel lift or
flatbed equipment. Do not tow with slingbelt equipment. Ford
Motor Company has not developed or approved a T-hook or
slingbelt towing procedure.
311
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE24827( X)09/95]
three fourths page
art:0090197-B
*[RE24850(ALL)03/95]
When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator what kind of
vehicle you have. A towing manual is available from Ford
Motor Company for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for the proper
hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
312
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
[RE27520( X)06/95]
Neutral Tow Feature
[RE27540( X)06/95]
Neutral tow feature is an option which can be activated at any
dealership that has a Service Bay Diagnostic System (SBDS).
When activated the feature may be enabled by following the
instruction located on the visor or the headliner.
[RE27560( X)12/95]
The feature is available in vehicles with Control Trac and
automatic transmission only. It is not available on vehicles with
All-Wheel Drive.
[RE27580( X)06/95]
There are no wrecker or recreational vehicle towing restrictions
on method or distance if the above feature is activated and
enabled.
[RE27590( X)06/95]
See your dealer for more information.
[RE27600(ALL)12/91]
Recreational Towing — All wheels on the ground
[RE27700(ALL)05/91]
Towing your vehicle can be successfully performed by following
the appropriate guidelines for the type of powertrain on the
vehicle to be towed. The following guidelines, by powertrain
combination, are designed to ensure that the transmission is not
damaged due to insufficient lubrication.
[RE27710( X)12/95]
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with the All Wheel Drive transfer
case cannot be towed with all four wheels on the
ground.
[RE27800(ALL)12/91]
4 x 2 — Automatic transmission
*[RE27900(ALL)03/95]
■ Release the parking brake.
[RE28000(ALL)01/95]
■ Place transmission gearshift in N (neutral).
[RE28100(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
[RE28200(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
[RE28300(ALL)06/94]
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or speed of 35 mph (56 km/h)
will be exceeded, you must:
313
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE28400(ALL)05/91]
■ Disconnect the driveshaft at the rear differential and properly
support it under the vehicle.
[RE28500(ALL)01/95]
■ Mark the driveshaft and axle flanges to ensure proper
position when reconnecting the driveshaft. Refer to service
manual for proper driveshaft fastener torque specification.
(See the Accessories chapter for information on ordering
service manuals.)
[RE28600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
When disconnecting/installing the driveshaft, the parking
brake must be set and the wheels blocked to ensure the
vehicle does not roll.
[RE28700(ALL)06/94]
■ Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h), unlimited distance.
[RE28720(ALL)12/91]
4 x 2 — Manual transmission
*[RE28740(ALL)03/95]
■ Release the parking brake.
[RE28750(ALL)01/95]
■ Place the transmission gearshift in the neutral position.
[RE28770(ALL)12/91]
■ Maximum speed is limited by towing equipment
manufacturer’s recommendation, unlimited distance.
[RE29450( X)10/94]
CONTROL TRAC transfer case
*[RE29500(ALL)03/95]
■ Release the parking brake.
[RE29600(ALL)01/95]
■ Place the transmission gearshift in the neutral position.
[RE29750( X)10/94]
■ Ensure the transfer case is in 2WD.
[RE29800(ALL)10/94]
NOTE: Both the 4WD and 4WD Low indicator lights in the
instrument panel will be off when the 4WD switch is
in 2WD.
[RE29850(ALL)10/92]
For automatic transmissions:
[RE29900(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
[RE30000(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
314
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
Roadside Emergencies
[RE30100(ALL)06/94]
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or speed of 35 mph (56 km/h)
will be exceeded, you must:
[RE30250( X)01/95]
■ Remove the rear driveshaft or have the neutral tow feature
enabled at your dealership.
[RE30300(ALL)06/94]
■ Mark the driveshaft and transfer case/axle flanges to ensure
proper position when installing the driveshaft. Refer to
service manual for proper driveshaft torque specification.
[RE30400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
When disconnecting/installing the driveshaft, the parking
brake must be set and the wheels blocked to ensure the
vehicle does not roll.
[RE30500(ALL)06/94]
■ Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h), unlimited distance.
[RE30525(ALL)10/92]
For manual transmissions:
[RE30550(ALL)06/94]
■ Maximum speed is 55 mph (88 km/h), unlimited distance.
[RE30600(ALL)10/94]
Limited vehicle operation, such as driving the vehicle while at a
campsite, can be accomplished with the rear driveshaft removed
by using the front drive to propel the vehicle. To operate the
vehicle in this condition, you must follow the following
guidelines:
[RE30700(ALL)10/94]
■ Place the transfer case in 4WD by rotating 4WD switch to
4WD HIGH.
[RE30800(ALL)10/94]
■ Drive the vehicle only on good surface roads to avoid
excessive loads on the front-wheel drive system.
[RE30900(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
[RE31000(ALL)10/94]
■ Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km).
[RE31100(ALL)10/94]
■ Avoid quick acceleration and steep grades.
315
File:12unrex.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:14:34 1996
[RE31200(ALL)10/94]
To return the vehicle to a towable condition, you must:
[RE31300(ALL)10/94]
■ Place the transfer case in 2WD by rotating the 4WD switch
to 2WD.
[RE31400(ALL)10/94]
NOTE: Both the 4WD and 4WD Low indicator lights in the
instrument cluster will be off when the transfer case
is in 2WD.
[RE31500(ALL)10/94]
■ After 2WD is selected, the front hubs must be “unlocked” by
moving the vehicle in reverse direction for a minimum of ten
feet.
[RE31600(ALL)10/94]
■ Confirm the front hubs are unlocked by inspecting the front
drive shaft to verify it does not turn when the vehicle is
towed.
[RE31700(ALL)10/94]
In addition to the above guidelines, it is recommended that you
follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
towing apparatus.
316
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
Customer Assistance
*[HS00205(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00210(ALL)10/95]
Roadside Assistance
*[HS00215(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00220(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00225(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00230(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00235(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00240(ALL)06/94]
Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
*[HS00245(ALL)06/94]
*[HS00250(ALL)06/94]
How to use Roadside Assistance
*[HS00255(ALL)04/95]
To receive roadside assistance in the United States call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00260(ALL)04/95]
Should you need to arrange for roadside assistance yourself,
Ford Motor Company will reimburse the reasonable cost. To
obtain information about reimbursement call 1-800-241-FORD (in
Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
%
Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour, seven-day-a-week
hotline with trained operators who put you in touch with the
help you need if you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you throughout your
warranty period of 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km),
whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside Assistance
coverages beyond this period (available through Ford Auto Club
in the United States or Ford and Lincoln-Mercury dealers in
Canada), contact your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Additional Roadside Assistance coverage is unavailable in
Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.
■ Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
■ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
■ Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
■ Bring you fuel if you run out.
■ Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even non-warranty
related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in mud or snow,
are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing
and repossession).
Your Roadside Assistance identification card can be found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in your glove compartment. Complete
the card and place it in your wallet for quick reference.
317
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
*[HS00300(ALL)01/95]
*[HS00400(ALL)01/95]
If You Have a Service Problem
*[HS00525(ALL)02/95]
*[HS00600(ALL)04/95]
Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or Canada)
*[HS00700(ALL)04/95]
If you are not satisfied with the service you received from your
dealership’s service department, talk to the service manager at
the dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to the owner
or general manager of the dealership. In most cases, you will
have your concern resolved at this level.
*[HS01000(ALL)04/95]
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs to be
serviced, or if you need more help than the dealer gave you,
contact the Ford Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help you.
*[HS01010(ALL)04/95]
Please have the following information available when contacting
Ford Customer Assistance:
*[HS01020(ALL)04/95]
*[HS01030(ALL)04/95]
■ your telephone number (both business and home)
*[HS01040(ALL)03/95]
*[HS01050(ALL)03/95]
*[HS01060(ALL)03/95]
% [HS01070(ALL)09/95]
*
■ the year and make of your vehicle
%
Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and Lincoln-Mercury
dealerships that can service your vehicle for you. This chapter
tells you how to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your selling dealer
who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. You may,
however, take your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your dealer will be able
to resolve your concern.
■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is
located
■ the date purchased
■ the current mileage on your vehicle
■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your
owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license
318
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
Customer Assistance
*[HS01105(ALL)03/95]
In the United States, contact:
[HS01120(ALL)01/95]
6 pica art:0050105-A
[HS01130(ALL)03/95]
In Canada, contact:
[HS01135(ALL)05/95]
6 pica art:0040188-B
[HS01160(ALL)03/95]
If you still have a service or product complaint, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. only).
*[HS02300(ALL)02/95]
*[HS02400(ALL)03/95]
The Dispute Settlement Board (U.S. Only)
*[HS02500(ALL)01/95]
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states.
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this
process at any time without notice and without incurring
obligations.
%
The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary, independent
dispute-settlement program available free to owners or lessees
of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles.
319
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
*[HS02600(ALL)01/95]
What Kind of Cases Does the Board Review?
[HS02700(ALL)09/95]
The Board reviews unresolved warranty performance complaints
on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln cars and Ford and Mercury Light
Trucks under warranty that have not been resolved by a dealer
or Ford Motor Company, except those involving:
*[HS02800(ALL)01/95]
*[HS02900(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03100(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03200(ALL)01/95]
■ A non-Ford product
*[HS03300(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03400(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03450(ALL)01/95]
■ Items not covered by your warranty
*[HS03500(ALL)01/95]
*[HS03600(ALL)01/95]
■ Cases currently in litigation
*[HS03650(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on which applicable
express written new vehicle warranties have expired at
receipt of your application are not eligible. Eligibility
may differ according to state law. For example, see the
unique brochure for California purchasers/lessees.
■ A non-Ford dealership
■ A vehicle sales transaction
■ A request for reimbursement of consequential expenses
unless incidental to a service or product complaint being
reviewed
■ Alleged liability claims
■ Property damage where such damage is significant when
compared to the economic loss alleged under the warranty
dispute
■ Vehicles not used primarily for personal, family, or
household purposes
320
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
Customer Assistance
*[HS03700(ALL)04/95]
*[HS03800(ALL)04/95]
*[HS03900(ALL)04/95]
*[HS04000(ALL)04/95]
*[HS04200(ALL)04/95]
How Does the Board Work?
*[HS04300(ALL)04/95]
If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and 36,000 miles of
the date of delivery (warranty start date), you have a right to
make an oral presentation before the Board by indicating your
choice on the application. Also, oral presentations may be
requested by the Board. A decision is made by the Board by
simple majority vote.
*[HS04350(ALL)04/95]
Board members review all the materials related to each
complaint and, based on the available information, arrive at a
fair and impartial decision. Decisions are based on the written
statements and any oral presentations made by each of the
involved parties.
*[HS04400(ALL)04/95]
Because the Board usually meets only once a month, some cases
will take longer than 30 days to be reviewed. The Board will
make every effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it
receives the customer application form.
*[HS04500(ALL)04/95]
After your case has been reviewed, the Board will mail you its
decision in writing. It will also provide you with a form to
indicate your acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The
decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer and Ford, but
customers may have other options available to them under state
or federal law.
*[HS04600(ALL)04/95]
The decisions of the Board, however, may be introduced into
evidence by any party in subsequent legal proceedings that may
be initiated.
The Board has four members:
■ three consumer representatives
■ a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and
trained by an independent consulting firm. Dealers are chosen
because of their business leadership qualities.
321
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
*[HS04700(ALL)01/95]
*[HS04800(ALL)04/95]
How Do You Contact the Board?
Write to the Board at the following address to request a
brochure/application. You will be sent a brochure and a
one-page customer application form. The form should be
completed and mailed to the same address.
*[HS04900(ALL)09/93]
6 pica art:0040272-A
*[HS05100(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05200(ALL)04/95]
What is the Review Process?
*[HS05300(ALL)04/95]
To review your case properly, the Board needs the following
information:
*[HS05400(ALL)04/95]
■ legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair
*[HS05500(ALL)08/95]
■ the year, make, model, and vehicle identification number
*[HS05600(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05700(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05800(ALL)04/95]
*[HS05900(ALL)04/95]
■ the date you bought your vehicle
Your application will be reviewed and if it is determined to be
eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating the file
number assigned to your application and the local Board
address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford Motor
Company representative are asked to submit statements.
orders that relate to the case
(VIN)
■ the date of repair and the mileage at the time of repair
■ the current mileage
■ the name of the dealer who sold you the vehicle or who
serviced your vehicle
322
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
Customer Assistance
*[HS06000(ALL)04/95]
*[HS06100(ALL)05/95]
■ a brief description of your unresolved complaint
*[HS06200(ALL)05/95]
■ the names (if known) of all people you contacted at the
*[HS06300(ALL)04/95]
■ a description of the action you want done to resolve your
*[HS06305(ALL)07/95]
Should your application NOT qualify for review, an explanation
will be mailed to you.
*[HS06307(ALL)04/95]
*[HS06308(ALL)01/95]
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
*[HS06309(ALL)01/95]
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
*[HS06311(ALL)01/95]
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
%
■ a brief summary of actions that were taken with the dealer
and Ford Motor Company
dealership
concern.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
323
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
*[HS06315(ALL)05/95]
*[HS06320(ALL)08/95]
*[HS06325(ALL)03/95]
%
Ford of Canada Customer Assistance
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
If you live in Canada and have any questions or concerns that
the dealership cannot answer, contact the Customer Assistance
Centre.
*[HS06326(ALL)06/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0050104-B
*[HS06327(ALL)04/95]
Please have the following information available when contacting
the Customer Assistance Centre:
*[HS06328(ALL)04/95]
*[HS06329(ALL)04/95]
■ your telephone number (both business and home)
*[HS06330(ALL)03/95]
*[HS06331(ALL)03/95]
*[HS06332(ALL)04/95]
■ the year and make of your vehicle
*[HS06333(ALL)04/95]
■ the current mileage on your vehicle.
■ your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your
owner card and/or your vehicle ownership license.
■ the date purchased
■ the name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is
located
324
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
Customer Assistance
*[HS06335(ALL)09/95]
*[HS06340(ALL)09/95]
*[HS06345(ALL)09/95]
*[HS06350(ALL)09/95]
*[HS06355(ALL)09/95]
*[HS06400(ALL)06/95]
*[HS06500(ALL)06/95]
%
*[HS06600(ALL)06/95]
Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada only)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by
Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively
speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other
efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is
without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for
lengthy and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party Arbitrators
conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an
informal environment. These impartial Arbitrators review the
positions of the parties, make decisions and, where appropriate,
render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast,
fair and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you
and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces,
except Quebec. For more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly
at 1-800-207-0685.
Getting Help Outside the U.S. and Canada
Before you export your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate to make sure local
regulations do not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide whether you
should import your vehicle to that country.
Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you where to get
unleaded fuel. If you cannot get unleaded fuel or can get only
fuel with an anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or owner relations office before you
leave the U.S. or Canada.
325
File:13unhsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:15:36 1996
*[HS06700(ALL)06/95]
Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a proper conversion
may damage the effectiveness of your emissions control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any damage that is
caused by use of improper fuel.
*[HS06800(ALL)06/95]
You may also have difficulty importing your vehicle back into
the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
*[HS06900(ALL)06/95]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or
living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the
Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the
dealership cannot help you, write to:
[HS07000(ALL)05/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040273-C
*[HS07100(ALL)06/95]
If you are in other foreign countries, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, they can direct
you to the appropriate Ford affiliate office.
*[HS07200(ALL)06/95]
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate
outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your Vehicle
Identification Number and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations.
326
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
Accessories
*[AC00400(ALL)03/95]
*[AC00425(ALL)04/95]
Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle
Ford has many fine products available from your dealer to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes. For best results, use the
following, or products of equivalent quality:
*[AC00450(ALL)05/95]
twelve pica
chart:0032382-A
*[AC00500(ALL)04/95]
A wide selection of accessories is available through your local
authorized dealer. These fine accessories have been engineered
specifically to fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom
designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance
of your Ford-built vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made
from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigid
engineering and safety specifications. That is why Ford brand
accessories are warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your dealer for complete
warranty information and accessory availability.
327
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
*[AC00600(ALL)06/95]
Safety, Comfort, and Convenience
[AC01225( X)07/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090144-B
328
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
Accessories
*[AC01900(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment, passengers, and
luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total
weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear
axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label). Consult your dealer
for specific weight information.
*[AC02000(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or
the Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulates the use of mobile communications
systems — such as two-way radios, telephones, and
theft alarms — that are equipped with radio
transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations
and should be installed only by a qualified technician.
*[AC02100(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: Mobile communications systems may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not
properly designed for automotive use or are not
properly installed. For example, when operated, such
systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall. In
addition, such systems may themselves be damaged or
their operation affected by operating your vehicle.
(Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers,
and other transmitters whose power output is 5 watts
or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s
operation.)
*[AC02200(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: Because we have no control over the installation,
design, or manufacture of such systems, Ford cannot
assume responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage that may result if you use this equipment.
329
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
[AC02500( X)05/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090199-A
330
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
Accessories
[AC02600( X)05/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090200-A
331
File:14unacx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:16:06 1996
[AC02700( X)05/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090201-A
332
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV00300(ALL)03/95]
*[SV00400(ALL)01/95]
*[SV00500(ALL)01/95]
%
*[SV00600(ALL)01/95]
Service Made Easy
Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
1. When we can, we design parts that do not need to be
serviced.
2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as easy as possible.
To help you:
*[SV00700(ALL)01/95]
■ We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in the engine
*[SV00800(ALL)01/95]
■ When possible, we design parts — such as the headlamp
*[SV00900(ALL)05/94]
■ We give you a Maintenance Schedule that makes tracking
*[SV01000(ALL)01/95]
This chapter tells you about the basic parts that you need to
check and service regularly.
*[SV01050(ALL)02/95]
If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your dealership can
provide the parts and service required. Check your Warranty
Information Booklet to find out which parts and services are
covered. Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner
Guide.
*[SV01300(ALL)03/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends that the Owner Maintenance
Checks listed in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be
performed for the proper operation of your vehicle. In addition
to the conditions listed in the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be
alert for any unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that
your vehicle may need service. If you do notice something
unusual, see that your vehicle is serviced promptly.
compartment so that you can find them easily.
bulbs — that can be replaced without tools.
routine service for your vehicle easy. The maintenance
schedule is located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
333
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
%
*[SV01400(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a
responsible manner. Follow your community’s
standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out about recycling
automotive fluids.
*[SV01600(ALL)06/95]
*[SV01700(ALL)06/95]
Precautions When Servicing Your Vehicle
*[SV01900(ALL)06/95]
■ If you must work with the engine running, avoid wearing
*[SV02000(ALL)06/95]
■ Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed space with the
*[SV02100(ALL)08/95]
■ Never get under a vehicle while it is supported only by a
*[SV02200(ALL)06/95]
■ Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking materials away
*[SV02500(ALL)03/95]
If you disconnect the battery, the engine must “relearn” its idle
conditions before your vehicle will drive properly. To find out
how the engine does this, see Battery in this chapter.
*[SV02600(ALL)03/95]
*[SV02660(ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine off:
%
Be especially careful when inspecting or servicing your vehicle.
Here are some general precautions for your safety:
loose clothing or jewelry that could get caught in moving
parts. Take appropriate precautions with long hair.
engine running, unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
jack. If you must work under a vehicle, use safety stands.
from the battery and all fuel-related parts.
1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift
is securely latched in P (Park).
*[SV02700(ALL)06/95]
2. Remove the key from the ignition after you turn the engine
*[SV02725(ALL)06/95]
3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from
off.
moving unexpectedly.
334
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV02750(ALL)03/95]
[SV02775(ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine on:
1. Set the parking brake fully, and make sure the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission) and block the wheels.
*[SV02825(ALL)03/95]
2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your vehicle from
moving unexpectedly.
*[SV02900(ALL)02/95]
RWARNING
Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is running.
%
*[SV02950(ALL)03/95]
[SV03035(ALL)12/91]
Opening the Hood
1. Pull the hood release handle, located below the steering
column.
[SV03040(ALL)01/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0020332-B
Hood release handle
*[SV03050( X)12/91]
2. While applying downward pressure on the hood, push the
hood latch handle located behind the grille near the center
front of the vehicle to the left.
335
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV03750( X)02/95]
17-1/2 pica
art:0020555-G
Hood
*[SV03775(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Read and understand Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter before
opening the hood.
[SV03850( X)08/94]
Close the hood with enough force to make it latch. Be sure to
oil the hood latch every six months to maintain smooth
operation.
*[SV03900(ALL)05/90]
Always attempt to lift the hood after closing to be sure it is
securely latched.
%
*[SV04500(ALL)04/95]
Engine Compartment
[SV04875( X)03/95]
Your Explorer has either a 4.0 Liter EFI, V-6 engine or a 5.0
Liter EFI, V-8 engine.
[SV05505( X)10/92]
The following page shows a diagram of the engine and where
to find items that you should regularly service.
336
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV05625(ALL)03/95]
33-1/2 pica
art:0090153-A
Servicing Your Explorer
4.0L engine compartment service points
337
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV05650( X)09/95]
full page art:0090135-C
5.0L engine compartment service
338
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV05660(ALL)04/95]
*[SV05665(ALL)04/95]
Cleaning the Engine
*[SV05670(ALL)07/95]
■ Extreme care must be used if a power washer is used to
*[SV05675(ALL)08/95]
■ In order to avoid possible cracking of the engine block or
[SV05680(ALL)03/95]
■ The alternator, coils and air intake must be covered.
%
A clean engine is more efficient because a buildup of grease and
dirt acts as an insulator, keeping the engine warmer than usual.
clean the engine. The high pressure fluid could penetrate
sealed parts and assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
fuel injection pump, do not spray a hot engine or injection
pump with cold water.
Covering these components will help prevent water damage.
*[SV05685(ALL)04/95]
%
*[SV06100(ALL)03/95]
■ Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running. Water
getting into the engine may cause internal damage.
Filling the Fuel Tank
[SV06375( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Fuel filler door
art:0020556-C
339
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV06550(ALL)02/91]
*[SV06600(ALL)10/94]
Opening the Fuel Filler Door
*[SV06610(ALL)02/95]
*[SV06620(ALL)04/94]
Filling the fuel tank
%
To open the fuel filler door of your vehicle, just insert your
finger in the divot and pull the door open all the way.
RWARNING
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
*[SV06630(ALL)01/95]
*[SV06640(ALL)09/95]
[SV06800(ALL)08/94]
To fill the fuel tank properly:
NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, other smoking materials,
and any open flames before fueling your vehicle.
1. Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure on the plastic lock
bar and rotating the fuel cap counterclockwise.
[SV06850(ALL)08/94]
2. Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until a hissing sound
is heard. Wait until the hissing sound stops and then
continue rotating counterclockwise to remove the fuel cap.
[SV06900(ALL)01/95]
[SV06910(ALL)01/95]
Make sure that you follow the above fuel cap removal
instructions and use caution. Such caution will minimize the
possibility of fuel spraying during removal of the fuel cap.
3. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel and put the nozzle
all the way inside the fuel filler pipe.
[SV06920(ALL)01/95]
If you spill any fuel on the body of your vehicle, clean it off
immediately. The fuel may dull or soften the paint if you do
not wash it off.
*[SV06950(ALL)03/91]
To replace and secure the fuel cap; place it in position and
rotate it clockwise until it clicks (ratchets). Doing so will not
damage or break the fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allows
the fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening.
340
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV06990(ALL)07/95]
%
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with an authorized Motorcraft
or equivalent part.
*[SV07000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If you do not use the proper fuel cap, the pressure in the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system or cause it to work
improperly in a collision.
*[SV07025(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an aftermarket fuel
filler cap, the customer warranty may be void for any
damage to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.
*[SV07050(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
If the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing
sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the
cap.
*[SV07055(ALL)01/95]
You may occasionally hear and/or feel a slight thump occurring
one or two seconds after a gentle stop. This is normal and
generally occurs with the fuel tank 3/4 full. It is caused by the
wave action of the fuel within the tank.
*[SV07060(ALL)11/89]
A venting fuel tank is not an abnormal condition. It may be
caused by:
[SV07061(ALL)07/95]
■ Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions. The service
stations sometimes sell winter grade fuel in the spring.
*[SV07062(ALL)11/89]
*[SV07063(ALL)11/89]
■ Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at high altitudes.
*[SV07064(ALL)11/89]
■ Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extended periods on
■ Extended periods of idling with the engine RPM increased
above the normal idle range.
extremely hot days.
341
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV07500(ALL)06/95]
*[SV07600(ALL)06/95]
Choosing the Right Fuel
*[SV07650(ALL)08/95]
Vehicle inspection programs may detect misfueling. Under these
circumstances, you may be required by law to make costly
repairs at your own expense.
*[SV07700(ALL)05/95]
*[SV07750(ALL)06/95]
Octane Recommendations
%
%
Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle. Using leaded fuel
is prohibited by federal law. Your warranty may not apply if
your vehicle is damaged because you used the wrong fuel.
Your vehicle is designed to use regular fuel with an octane
rating of 87. In most cases it is not necessary to use a fuel with
an octane rating higher than 87. At service stations, the octane
rating is displayed in a label on the pumps.
*[SV07775(ALL)06/95]
one inch art:0060001-C
Typical octane rating label
*[SV07800(ALL)07/95]
In some parts of the country, “regular” grade fuels are sold
with octane ratings of 86 or even less, especially in high altitude
areas. We recommend that you do not use these fuels. Always
use a fuel with an octane rating of 87, even if it is sold as a
“midgrade” or “premium.”
*[SV07850(ALL)04/95]
Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly
when you drive up a hill or when you accelerate. However, if a
fuel with the recommended octane rating knocks heavily under
all driving conditions or knocks lightly driving at cruising speed
on level roads, see your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Persistent, heavy knocking can damage the engine.
342
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV07900(ALL)04/95]
In some parts of the country, “premium” grade fuels are sold
with octane ratings of less than 91, especially in high altitude
areas. It is recommended that you use only those “premium”
fuels with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
*[SV07950(ALL)02/95]
*[SV08000(ALL)06/95]
Fuel Quality
*[SV08050(ALL)09/95]
Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle more responsive
and maintains its good fuel economy and emissions by:
*[SV08100(ALL)04/95]
■ minimizing deposits in fuel injectors, combustion chambers
*[SV08150(ALL)08/95]
*[SV08200(ALL)08/95]
■ assuring quick starting and smooth warm-up.
*[SV08250(ALL)08/95]
*[SV08300(ALL)08/95]
*[SV08350(ALL)06/95]
■ protecting your fuel system from rusting.
*[SV08400(ALL)06/95]
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to
your fuel tank if you continue to use a high-quality fuel.
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation
problems when the engine is cold, it may be caused by fuel
with low volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the
condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician.
and on intake valves.
■ protecting the fuel system from vapor lock in very hot
weather, which causes the engine to hesitate or stall and
makes restarts difficult.
■ preventing the fuel lines from freezing.
■ preventing the fuel system from “gumming up” when your
vehicle is not used for long periods of time.
343
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV08450(ALL)06/95]
%
*[SV08500(ALL)04/95]
Gasolines For Clean Air
Fuels in certain areas of the country are required to contain
oxygenates to improve air quality. Common oxygenates are
ethanol or grain alcohol (blended at no more than 10%),
methanol or wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with
cosolvents and additives) and MTBE or methyl tertiary butyl
ether (blended at no more than 15%).
*[SV08550(ALL)02/95]
Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain areas of the
U.S. These fuels are designed to further reduce emissions from
your vehicle.
*[SV08600(ALL)04/95]
Generally, you should not experience difficulties operating your
vehicle on reformulated gasoline or on fuels containing
oxygenates. We encourage you to use these fuels.
*[SV10185(ALL)06/95]
*[SV10195(ALL)05/95]
Safety Information Relating to Automotive Fuels
%
RWARNING
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
*[SV10200(ALL)08/95]
Gasoline and other automotive fuels are extremely flammable.
Turn your vehicle off and do not smoke while refueling your
vehicle. Keep sparks and other sources of ignition away from
fuels.
*[SV10205(ALL)05/95]
Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Further,
gasoline may be blended with methanol. Even small amounts of
methanol can cause blindness and possibly death when
swallowed. Therefore, never attempt to siphon any fuel by
mouth.
*[SV10210(ALL)08/95]
If any fuel is swallowed, call a physician or poison control
center immediately. Do not delay calling a physician merely
because no adverse effects are noticed at first; the toxic effects
of fuels may not become apparent for many hours.
344
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV10213(ALL)08/95]
If gasoline is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. If a
gasoline-methanol blend is swallowed, induce vomiting under
the direction of a physician or poison control center.
*[SV10215(ALL)03/95]
Gasoline and gasoline-methanol blends may contain small
amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene. Long-term exposure to
unleaded gasoline vapors has caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Further, excessive inhalation of fuel vapors can cause
headache, dizziness, nausea, loss of coordination, and other
symptoms which could interfere with your ability to safely
operate your vehicle. To the extent possible, avoid breathing
vapors while refueling. If fuel vapors are inhaled in excessive
quantities, move the victim to fresh air and seek medical
attention.
*[SV10220(ALL)08/95]
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. When
refueling, be careful not to splash fuel on yourself or your
clothing. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and wash the skin thoroughly with soap
and water.
*[SV10225(ALL)08/95]
Fuels can cause severe eye irritation and possibly eye damage. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn),
flush with large amounts of water for 15 minutes, and seek
medical attention.
*[SV10230(ALL)08/95]
If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism, vapor or skin contact
with a gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same kind of
adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic beverage. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness could result.
Consult a physician promptly if you experience an adverse
reaction.
345
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV11300(ALL)05/95]
*[SV11400(ALL)05/95]
Running Out of Fuel
*[SV11500(ALL)07/95]
You may need to crank the engine several times before the fuel
system starts to pump fuel from the tank to the engine.
*[SV11600(ALL)05/95]
*[SV11700(ALL)07/95]
Fuel Economy
*[SV11800(ALL)05/95]
*[SV11900(ALL)06/95]
To calculate fuel economy:
%
%
If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop on level ground
away from traffic. Add at least two gallons (8 liters) of fuel to
start your vehicle again. If your vehicle is not on level ground,
you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters) of fuel to start
it.
Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of your vehicle
and can be calculated as Miles Per Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per
100 Kilometers (L/100K).
1. Fill the tank completely and record the initial odometer
reading.
*[SV12000(ALL)06/95]
2. Every time you buy fuel record the amount (in gallons or
*[SV12200(ALL)07/95]
3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill the fuel tank and
[SV12210(ALL)09/95]
4. Divide the total number of miles that you have driven by
liters) purchased.
record the final odometer reading.
the total number of gallons that your vehicle has used. In
metric, multiply the number of liters used by 100 and divide
the answer by the number of kilometers traveled. This will
give you the number of liters used per 100 km.
346
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
%
*[SV12300(ALL)08/95]
Comparisons With Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) and Transport Canada (TC) Fuel Economy
Estimates
*[SV12400(ALL)05/95]
EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from laboratory tests
under simulated road conditions and may not reflect the actual
conditions you experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that you will achieve
the fuel economy shown.
*[SV12500(ALL)08/95]
*[SV12625(ALL)05/95]
Improving Fuel Economy
*[SV12650(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12675(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12725(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12750(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12775(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12825(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12850(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12875(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12925(ALL)05/95]
The following decrease fuel economy:
*[SV12950(ALL)05/95]
*[SV12975(ALL)05/95]
*[SV13025(ALL)05/95]
■ Underinflated tires
%
Fuel economy is affected by a number of variables which can
reduce efficiency. You can improve fuel economy by
understanding these variables and minimizing their effect.
■ Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
■ Excessive speed
■ Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
■ Driving with your foot on the brake
■ Sudden stops
■ Extended engine idling
■ Using speed control in hilly terrain
■ Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear window defroster
and other accessories
■ Heavy loads
■ Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or luggage racks, bug
deflectors, etc.
347
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV13600(ALL)02/95]
*[SV13610(ALL)10/95]
%
Engine Oil Recommendations
We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an equivalent oil
meeting Ford Specification WSS-M2C193-F and displaying the
American Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on the
front of the container.
*[SV13650(ALL)05/94]
10-1/2 pica
The API Certification Mark
art:0001314-A
*[SV13670(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13680(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13690(ALL)04/95]
% [SV13700(ALL)01/95]
*
Never use:
■ “Non-Detergent” oils
■ Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
■ Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments
%
*[SV13710(ALL)06/95]
Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are PREFERRED for
your vehicle. They provide the best engine performance, fuel
economy and engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
%
*[SV13725(ALL)03/95]
Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and of the preferred
viscosity may be used in your engine. The engine oil and oil
filter must still be changed according to the maintenance
schedule.
348
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV13775(ALL)01/95]
*[SV13800(ALL)03/95]
Checking and Adding Engine Oil
*[SV13900(ALL)04/95]
*[SV14000(ALL)02/95]
Checking the engine oil level:
%
%
Since the proper amount of engine oil is important for safe
engine operation, check the oil using the dipstick each time you
put fuel in your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off, the
oil must be warm and the vehicle must be parked on level
ground.
1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up and allow a few
minutes for the engine oil to drain back into the oil pan.
*[SV14050(ALL)06/95]
2. Set the parking brake, making sure the gearshift is securely
*[SV14100(ALL)02/95]
*[SV14200(ALL)03/95]
3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
*[SV14300(ALL)01/95]
5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into position, making
latched in P (Park) or 1 (manual transmission).
4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in yellow) and
carefully pull it out of the engine.
sure it is fully seated.
[SV14400(ALL)10/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021256-B
Engine oil dipstick
349
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV14425( X)12/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0090215-B
Engine oil dipstick — 5.0L engine
[SV14500(ALL)10/94]
6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the oil level is below
the “ADD” line, add engine oil as necessary. If the oil level
is beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage or high oil
consumption may occur and some oil must be removed from
the engine.
*[SV14600(ALL)01/95]
*[SV14800(ALL)01/95]
*[SV15000(ALL)03/95]
7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is fully seated.
It may be necessary to add some oil between oil changes. Make
sure you use a CERTIFIED engine oil of the preferred viscosity.
Your vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if engine
damage is caused by the use of improper engine oil.
Add engine oil through the oil filler cap highlighted in yellow.
To add oil, remove the filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil
into the opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine. Recheck
the oil level after you finish adding oil.
350
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
%
*[SV16300(ALL)06/95]
[SV16350(ALL)03/95]
Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter
Change the engine oil and oil filter per the following, whichever
occurs first:
[SV16375(ALL)03/95]
half page art:0090154-A
*[SV16400(ALL)03/95]
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record Booklet for
additional information.
*[SV17150(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: See Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts and Lubrication
Specifications in this chapter for the appropriate oil
filter and engine oil refill quantity.
%
*[SV17250(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a
responsible manner. Follow your community’s
standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out about recycling
automotive fluids.
351
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV17275(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Continuous contact with USED motor oil has caused
cancer in laboratory mice.
*[SV17285(ALL)07/95]
% [SV17300(ALL)03/95]
*
% [SV17400(ALL)09/95]
*
*[SV17500(ALL)09/95]
Protect your skin by washing with soap and water.
Engine Coolant
Checking the engine coolant
NOTE: Be sure to read and understand Precautions When
Servicing Your Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
*[SV17700(ALL)08/95]
Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the engine from
overheating in the summer and from freezing in the winter.
Check the level of the engine coolant at least once a month, but
preferably each time you stop for fuel. Simply look at the
engine coolant recovery reservoir located in the engine
compartment. To locate this reservoir, see the diagram of your
vehicle’s engine under Engine types in this chapter.
*[SV17750(ALL)03/95]
If the engine coolant has not been checked for a long period of
time the engine coolant reservoir may eventually empty. If the
engine coolant reservoir empties, check the engine coolant level
in the radiator. Read the following warnings before removing
the radiator cap. If it is necessary to fill the radiator, refer to the
Engine Coolant Refill Procedure in this chapter for instructions.
*[SV17760(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine
is running or hot.
*[SV17765(ALL)09/95]
1. Before you remove the radiator cap, turn the engine off and
*[SV17770(ALL)09/95]
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap
let it cool. Even when the engine is cool, be careful when
you remove the radiator cap.
and turn it slowly counterclockwise to the first stop.
352
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV17779(ALL)09/95]
*[SV17780(ALL)09/95]
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
*[SV17785(ALL)09/95]
5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hot steam may blow
[SV17950(ALL)09/95]
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,
use the cloth to turn and remove cap.
out or hot engine coolant may even splash out.
Adding engine coolant
[SV18250(ALL)05/95]
10-1/2 pica
Adding engine coolant
art:0090119-B
[SV20075(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Be careful not to add engine coolant to the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield,
engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
[SV20100(ALL)09/95]
When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and water to the engine coolant recovery reservoir — DO NOT
ADD DIRECTLY TO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only
in an emergency, but you should replace it with a 50/50
mixture of coolant and distilled water as soon as possible.
353
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV20125(ALL)09/95]
Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery reservoir the
next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough
of a 50/50 mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquid
level to the fill line on the reservoir.
[SV20150(ALL)09/95]
RWARNING
Never remove the coolant recovery cap while the engine
is running or hot.
[SV20175(ALL)09/95]
[SV20200(ALL)09/95]
If you must remove the coolant recovery cap, follow these steps
to avoid personal injury caused by escaping steam or engine
coolant:
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it
cool.
[SV20225(ALL)09/95]
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap
and turn it slowly, counterclockwise to the first stop.
[SV20250(ALL)09/95]
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
[SV20275(ALL)09/95]
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released,
use the cloth to press the cap down, turn it counterclockwise,
and remove it.
[SV20295(ALL)09/95]
Use Ford Premium Engine Coolant E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada,
Motorcraft CXC-8-B) or an equivalent premium engine coolant
that meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. Ford Premium
Engine Coolant is an optimized formula that will protect all
metals and rubber elastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4
years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km).
[SV20300(ALL)09/95]
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Do not use
supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle. These additives
may harm your engine cooling system. The use of an improper
coolant may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling
system.
354
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV20325(ALL)09/95]
Recycled engine coolant
[SV20350(ALL)09/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends that Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled engine coolant produced
by Ford-approved processes. Not all coolant recycling processes
produce coolant which meets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A,
and use of such coolant may harm engine and cooling system
components.
[SV20375(ALL)09/95]
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
[SV20400(ALL)09/95]
Coolant refill capacity
[SV20425(ALL)09/95]
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can
hold, see Refill capacities for fluids in the Index.
[SV20450(ALL)09/95]
Have your dealer check the engine cooling system for leaks if
you have to add more than a quart (liter) of engine coolant per
month.
[SV20475(ALL)09/95]
Severe winter climate
[SV20490(ALL)09/95]
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than -34˚F [-36˚C]),
it may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above
50%. Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle is such that the coolant
will not freeze at the temperature level in which you drive
during winter months. Never increase the engine coolant
concentration above 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of engine
coolant and water in your vehicle year-round in non-extreme
climates.
*[SV20500(ALL)08/95]
*[SV20600(ALL)10/89]
Checking Hoses
%
Inspect all engine and heater system hoses for deterioration,
leaks and loose clamps before adding or replacing engine
coolant. Make whatever repairs or replacements that are
necessary using Motorcraft parts or their equivalents.
355
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV20700(ALL)08/95]
*[SV20800(ALL)10/89]
*[SV20900(ALL)03/94]
%
Engine Coolant Drain and Flush
To drain your vehicle’s engine coolant:
1. Turn off the engine and let it cool. Fully depressurize the
engine cooling system by covering the radiator cap with a
thick cloth and turning it slowly counterclockwise to the first
stop. Step back while the pressure releases.
*[SV20950(ALL)05/90]
*[SV21000(ALL)05/90]
2. Remove the cap.
*[SV21200(ALL)05/90]
4. Let the engine coolant drain into a suitable container.
3. Attach a small hose to the drain tube at the bottom of the
radiator.
Disconnect the lower radiator hose at the radiator connector
and drain any remaining engine coolant into a container.
*[SV21250(ALL)05/95]
Proper procedures for flushing the cooling system can be found
in the Service Manual.
*[SV21300(ALL)08/95]
*[SV21400(ALL)10/89]
Engine coolant refill procedure
%
[SV21700(ALL)10/89]
After you have drained the engine cooling system:
1. When cold, fill the radiator to a level 1 to 1 1/2 inches
(38 mm) below the filler neck seat.
*[SV21900(ALL)03/94]
2. Replace the radiator cap to its fully installed position, then
*[SV22100(ALL)10/89]
3. Start and idle the engine until the thermostat opens and the
*[SV22200(ALL)05/95]
4. Shut off the engine and allow the engine to cool. Cover the
back off to the first stop. This will prevent high pressure
from building up in the cooling system during this part of
the fill procedure.
radiator upper hose becomes warm.
radiator cap with a thick cloth and cautiously remove it. Step
back while the pressure releases.
356
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV22500(ALL)10/89]
5. Finally, check the radiator and add more engine coolant if
*[SV22525(ALL)05/90]
6. If more engine coolant is necessary, fill the overflow
needed, following the procedures noted above. Reinstall the
radiator cap securely, when finished.
reservoir to the appropriate level marked on the bottle.
*[SV22610( X)08/95]
NOTE: Due to air being trapped in the 4.0L engine cooling
system, it is not unusual to experience a 4 to 7 ounce
(120 to 210 ml) coolant loss up to 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) after initial system fill.
*[SV22620( X)06/95]
In order to bleed the cooling system properly after initial fill
with coolant, it might need up to five cycles of:
*[SV22630( X)06/95]
*[SV22640( X)06/95]
■ heating up the system (thermostat open)
*[SV22650( X)06/95]
■ letting the coolant cool down (engine coolant temperature
*[SV22660( X)06/95]
■ topping off the coolant overflow bottle to the cold fill
*[SV22680( X)06/95]
If coolant loss continues after 7,500 miles (12,000 km), consult
your Ford Dealer.
■ making sure coolant is at least up to the cold fill mark of
overflow bottle
gauge below the N of NORMAL)
mark
357
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV22700(ALL)03/95]
% [SV22800(ALL)03/95]
*
*[SV22900(ALL)01/95]
%
Windshield Washer Fluid and Wipers
Washer Fluid
Check the level of the windshield washer fluid every time you
stop for fuel. The reservoir for washer fluid is located on the
passenger’s side of the engine compartment. Visual inspection
can determine if the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate
the washer when the reservoir is empty.
*[SV23300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not put windshield washer fluid in the container for
the engine coolant.
[SV23550(ALL)09/95]
10-1/2 pica
Adding windshield washer fluid
art:0090119-B
%
*[SV23800(ALL)01/95]
Use specially formulated windshield washer fluid rather than
plain water, because specially formulated washer fluids contain
additives that dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such as methanol
should be used in freezing weather (temperatures below 32˚F
[0˚C]). State or local regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common antifreeze,
methanol. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide cold weather
358
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper
blades, and windshield washer system.
*[SV23900(ALL)10/89]
[SV24000(ALL)05/95]
If you choose to use a windshield washing solution that must
be mixed, follow the manufacturer’s mixing instructions.
Improperly mixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly.
RWARNING
Windshield washer fluid contains methanol and it is
poisonous. Follow all instructions on the bottle of washer
fluid.
*[SV24300( X)03/90]
Checking/adding the washer fluid for the liftgate
[SV24425( X)03/93]
Check the liftgate washer reservoir regularly. This is not the
same reservoir that your front windshield wipers use. The
opening for this reservoir is on the left side of the body above
the tail lamp. A fill cup is located on top of the left hand tail
lamp and is accessible when the liftgate is open. Close the fill
cup cover after filling and before closing the liftgate. Refill this
reservoir with the same solution you use for your windshield.
To find out how much washer fluid the liftgate reservoir holds,
see Refill capacities in the Index.
[SV24460( X)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Liftgate window washer reservoir
art:0020557-C
359
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV24500(ALL)03/95]
*[SV24600(ALL)03/95]
Wiper Blades
*[SV24700(ALL)09/95]
If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield
and the wiper blades. Use undiluted windshield washer solution
or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do not
use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents to clean your
wiper blades. These will damage your blades.
*[SV24800(ALL)03/95]
To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply turn the
ignition to the ACC position and turn your wipers on. Wait for
them to reach a vertical position and turn the ignition to the
OFF position. Do not move the wipers manually. Manually
moving the wipers across the windshield may damage them.
*[SV24900(ALL)03/01]
Wiper blade replacement
[SV25000(ALL)01/95]
If the wipers still do not work properly after you clean them,
you may need to replace the wiper blade assembly or the blade.
When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade refill, or wiper
arm always use a Motorcraft part or equivalent.
*[SV25025(ALL)10/93]
To replace the wiper blades:
%
[SV25030(ALL)10/94]
Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice a year. Also
check them whenever they seem less effective than usual. Such
substances as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
1. Cycle windshield wiper arm and wiper blade to where
removal of blade can be performed without difficulty. Turn
ignition off at desired position.
[SV25075(ALL)10/94]
2. To remove wiper blade assembly from wiper mounting arm,
depress lock tab and push wiper mounting arm away from
wiper blade assembly.
[SV25100(ALL)10/94]
3. To install wiper blade assembly, pull wiper mounting arm
down on wiper blade until lock tab is engaged.
360
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV25125(ALL)10/94]
24 pica art:0021371-A
Replacing the wiper blades
361
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV25200(ALL)03/95]
*[SV25300(ALL)03/95]
Tires
*[SV25400(ALL)03/95]
*[SV25500(ALL)02/95]
■ Keep your tires inflated to the recommended pressures.
*[SV25600(ALL)02/95]
*[SV25700(ALL)10/89]
*[SV25800(ALL)01/95]
■ Make sure the weight of your load is evenly distributed.
*[SV25890(ALL)07/95]
*[SV25900(ALL)05/95]
Ford Motor Company recommends obeying posted speed limits.
%
Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel tank. If one tire
looks lower than the others, check the pressure in all of them.
Always follow these precautions:
■ Stay within the recommended load limits (see Load limits in
the Index).
■ Drive at safe speeds.
If you do not take these precautions, your tires may fail or go
flat.
RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of
loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle
components.
*[SV26100(ALL)11/89]
At least once a month, check the pressure in all your vehicle’s
tires, including the spare. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.
Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, that is, after the
vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been
driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can find the proper cold
pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
*[SV26150(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and
can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
362
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV26200(ALL)08/95]
Tire inspection and maintenance
*[SV26300(ALL)02/95]
Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails, glass or other
objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for
holes or cuts that may permit air to leak from the tire, and
make the necessary repairs.
*[SV26400(ALL)10/89]
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
you suspect internal damage to the tire, have it demounted and
checked. You may need to repair or replace it.
[SV26410(ALL)09/95]
Wheel inspection and maintenance
*[SV26420(ALL)11/89]
Check for damage that would affect the runout of the wheels.
Wobble or shimmy will eventually damage the wheel bearings.
*[SV26430(ALL)06/93]
Front wheel bearings require periodic repacking and adjustment
as specified in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
Loose or worn front wheel bearings tend to let the vehicle
wander or shimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tire
wear.
*[SV26435(ALL)06/95]
Whenever a wheel is removed and then re-installed, always
remove any corrosion that may be present on the mounting
surface of the wheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum or
rotor that contacts the wheel.
*[SV26440(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Installing wheels without a good metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surface can cause the wheel lug nuts
to loosen and could allow the wheel to come off while
the vehicle is in motion.
*[SV26450(ALL)03/95]
*[SV26460(ALL)03/95]
%
Traction-Lok Rear Axle (If equipped)
This axle provides added drive away traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one or more wheels are on a surface
with poor traction.
363
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV26470(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine with one wheel off
the ground, such as when changing a tire.
*[SV26500(ALL)02/95]
*[SV26600(ALL)03/95]
Tire Rotation
*[SV26700(ALL)07/92]
Rotate the tires according to the following diagram. If you
notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. If your
light truck has a temporary spare tire, do not include it in the
tire rotation pattern.
*[SV26750(ALL)03/90]
In situations where the tires differ from front to rear
(snow/traction), simply rotate using a side to side pattern.
%
Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires perform different
jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear
evenly and last longer, rotate them at the mileage shown in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet which came with your
vehicle.
364
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV26850( X)04/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021075-B
Tire rotation pattern
*[SV26900(ALL)10/89]
After each rotation, adjust individual tire pressure as specified
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. Tighten wheel lug
nuts to the required torque specification and retighten again
after 500 miles (800 km).
*[SV27000(ALL)08/95]
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you may demount the full
size, non-temporary spare tire (if so equipped) and remount on
an aluminum wheel to rotate the spare tire into your vehicle’s
rotation pattern. Rebalance the wheel.
[SV27050( X)01/95]
In addition to rotating the tires, the spare tire retention system
should be cycled. Using the jack handle, lower the spare tire to
the ground and then proceed to raise the tire until the
mechanism “slips.” Refer to Spare Tire Location section of the
Roadside Emergencies chapter for the operation of the spare tire
retention system.
365
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV27300(ALL)04/95]
*[SV27400(ALL)05/95]
%
Replacing the Tires
Replace any tires that show wear bands. When your tire shows
a wear band, it has only 1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.
*[SV27500(ALL)11/93]
7-1/2 pica art:0040200-A
A worn-out tire
*[SV27600(ALL)01/95]
Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly, you may need
to replace them before a wear band appears across the entire
tread. Some spots wear more heavily than others.
*[SV27700(ALL)03/90]
Your wheels and tires are match-mounted for improved ride.
Before you begin to repair a tire, mark the wheel and tire so
that they are properly aligned when remounted. This will
ensure that the tires will continue to give you the same ride
level.
*[SV27851(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial,
bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that
are listed on the tire pressure decal. Make sure that all
tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying
capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on
the decal. If you do not follow these precautions, your
vehicle may not drive properly and safely.
366
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV27860(ALL)03/90]
RWARNING
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size,
type, load-carrying capacity, and tread design (e.g. “All
Terrain”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.
[SV27876( X)06/94]
RWARNING
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires,
or larger size tires. Do not use P235/75R15 “All Season”
tires. P235/75R15 “All Terrain” tires are acceptable.
[SV27890( X)10/94]
RWARNING
Do not use P255/70R16 tires on 2 door 4x2 model. The
P255/70R16 “All Terrain” tires are acceptable only on the
2 door 4x4, 4 door 4x2, and 4 door 4x4 models.
*[SV27895(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect
the handling of the vehicle and make it easier to lose
control and roll over.
*[SV27900(ALL)01/95]
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires
may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer.
367
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV28350( X)04/94]
27-1/2 pica
art:0020590-C
Tire identification chart
*[SV28700(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies may damage your
vehicle or cause accidents resulting in serious injuries.
368
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV28800(ALL)04/95]
*[SV28950(ALL)03/95]
Wheel and Tire Matching
*[SV31100(ALL)04/95]
*[SV31200(ALL)01/95]
Snow Tires and Chains
%
%
See an authorized tire dealer for proper servicing procedures.
Wheels and tires must be properly removed, matched and
remounted to maintain the best possible ride.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads that provide
traction in rain or snow. However, during the winter months in
some climates, you may need to use snow tires and occasionally
chains for your tires.
*[SV31300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires
you currently have on your vehicle.
[SV31350( X)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not use chains on P255/70R16 tires on vehicles
equipped with automatic ride control.
*[SV31400(ALL)02/95]
Do not use chains when using a temporary spare. For full size
tires, use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the law
requires them where you live. When you use the tire chains:
*[SV31500(ALL)01/95]
■ Make sure the chains are the right size for your tires. Use
*[SV31525(ALL)08/93]
■ Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminum wheels. IT IS
[SV31550(ALL)01/95]
■ Install tire chains on rear tires; use of chains on front tires is
only SAE Class “S” chains. Other types may damage your
vehicle.
RECOMMENDED THAT TIRE CHAINS ARE INSTALLED
ON STEEL WHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheel
covers (if equipped) from steel rims before using tire chains
to avoid scratches or damage.
not recommended.
369
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV31575(ALL)01/95]
■ Local regulations may prohibit or restrict the use of tire
chains. Investigate the laws and regulations in your area
before installing chains.
*[SV31600(ALL)01/95]
■ Put the chains on tightly with the ends held down securely.
*[SV31700(ALL)01/95]
■ Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub or bang against
*[SV31800(ALL)10/94]
*[SV31850(ALL)11/94]
■ Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.
[SV31900(ALL)03/95]
Remove tire chains at the first opportunity after using them on
snow and ice. Do not use the chains on dry roads.
*[SV31950(ALL)05/91]
■ Make sure your suspension insulation and bumpers are not
*[SV31960(ALL)04/95]
*[SV31970(ALL)05/95]
Cleaning the Wheels
*[SV31975(ALL)09/95]
NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if the brushes are
abrasive.
[SV31980(ALL)03/95]
If you have raised white letter tires that are difficult to clean
with regular detergent, use whitewall tire cleaner. Follow the
directions on the container and rinse the tires with plenty of
clean water.
%
Verify that no chain touches any wiring, brake lines, or fuel
lines. Follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
your vehicle, stop the vehicle and tighten the chains. If you
continue to hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle,
remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
■ Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drive carefully and
avoid hard braking.
missing or worn to avoid damage to your vehicle.
Wash the wheels with the same detergent you use to wash your
vehicle’s body. Do not use acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool,
abrasives, fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil remover to
remove grease and tar.
370
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV32100(ALL)03/95]
*[SV32200(ALL)02/95]
Battery
*[SV32300(ALL)02/95]
If you see any corrosion on the battery cables or terminals,
remove the cables from the terminal and clean them both with a
wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water. Reinstall the cables when you are done
cleaning them, and apply a small quantity of grease to the top
of each battery terminal to help prevent corrosion.
*[SV32400(ALL)07/95]
*[SV32500(ALL)02/95]
Battery replacement
[SV32550(ALL)05/95]
NOTE: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is
re-installed after the battery is replaced.
*[SV32600(ALL)07/95]
Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at least every 12 months
or 12,000 miles (20,000 km), in temperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C)
and more often in temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the
electrolyte in each cell up to the “level” indicator. Do not
overfill the battery cell.
*[SV32700(ALL)02/95]
If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low, you can add
plain tap water to the battery, as long as you don’t use hard
water, or water with a high mineral or alkali content. If
possible, however, try to only fill the battery cell with distilled
water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging
system checked.
%
Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery.
The Motorcraft maintenance-free battery does not require
additional water during its life of service. The vents are part of
the cover and cannot be removed. For longer, trouble-free
operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make
certain the battery cables are tightly fastened to the battery
terminals.
If your original equipment battery requires replacement (under
warranty), it may in some cases be replaced by a Motorcraft
low-maintenance battery. The low-maintenance battery has
removable vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and for
adding water, if needed.
371
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV32725(ALL)03/95]
*[SV32750(ALL)04/95]
%
Help Us Protect Our Environment
Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that used lead-acid
batteries be returned to an authorized recycling facility for
disposal.
*[SV32775(ALL)02/95]
7-1/2 pica art:0040201-A
Battery recycling symbol
%
*[SV33000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV33100(ALL)03/95]
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power
from the battery. If you ever disconnect the battery, install a
new battery, or experience a dead battery, you must allow the
computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before your vehicle will
idle at its best. To let the engine do this, apply the parking
brake, put the gearshift in Park (automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission), turn off all the accessories, and
start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for at least one minute.
If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, the idle quality of
your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle is
relearned. Your vehicle will eventually relearn its idle while you
drive it, but it takes much longer than if you use the previous
procedure.
372
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV33200(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,
sparks or lit tobacco to come near the battery. When
charging or working near a battery, always cover your
face and protect your eyes, and also provide ventilation.
%
*[SV33300(ALL)07/95]
RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns skin, eyes,
and clothing.
*[SV33310(ALL)07/95]
%
*[SV33400(ALL)06/95]
If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or clothing,
immediately flush the area with water for at least 15 minutes. If
someone swallows the acid, have him or her drink lots of milk
or water first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or vegetable
oil. Call a doctor immediately.
RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends when lifting a
battery could cause acid to spill. Lift the battery with a
carrier or with your hands on the opposite corners.
*[SV33500(ALL)01/95]
*[SV33601(ALL)06/95]
Automatic Transmission Fluid
*[SV33701(ALL)05/95]
It is preferable to check the transmission fluid level at normal
operating temperature, after approximately 20 miles (30 km) of
driving. However, if necessary, you can check the fluid level
%
Under normal driving conditions automatic transmission fluid
should be changed every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000
miles (34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions. However, if
the transmission is not working properly, for instance, the
transmission may slip or shift slowly, or you may notice some
sign of fluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked.
373
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
without having to drive 20 miles to obtain a normal operating
temperature if outside temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).
*[SV33801(ALL)01/95]
NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an extended
period at high speeds or in city traffic during hot
weather, or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to
cool before checking.
*[SV33901(ALL)02/95]
*[SV33910(ALL)06/95]
Checking the Automatic Transmission Fluid
%
With the vehicle on a level surface, start the engine and move
the transmission shift selector through all of the gear ranges
allowing sufficient time for each position to engage. Securely
latch the transmission shift selector in the P (Park) position,
fully set the parking brake and leave the engine running.
*[SV33930(ALL)10/89]
RWARNING
Your vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is
below the bottom hole on the dipstick and outside
temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).
*[SV33940(ALL)08/95]
Wipe off the dipstick cap (located on the passenger’s side of the
engine), pull the dipstick out and wipe the indicator end clean.
Put the dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure it is
fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read the fluid level.
*[SV33950(ALL)03/90]
When checking fluid at normal operating temperature, the fluid
level should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick.
When the vehicle has not been driven, and outside temperature
is above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid level should be between the holes
on the dipstick.
374
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV33960(ALL)08/95]
*[SV33970(ALL)03/94]
Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid
*[SV33980(ALL)10/89]
Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through the filler tube
to bring the level to the correct area on the dipstick. If an
overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
%
%
*[SV33990(ALL)09/95]
The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick. Before adding any
fluid, be sure that the correct type will be used.
NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a
responsible manner. Follow your community’s
standards for disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out about recycling
automotive fluids.
[SV34000(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021193-A
Automatic transmission dipstick
375
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
%
*[SV34400(ALL)06/95]
Manual Transmission and Transfer Case
Fluid
*[SV34600(ALL)01/95]
*[SV34700(ALL)12/91]
Checking the Manual Transmission Fluid
*[SV34800(ALL)03/91]
*[SV34900(ALL)01/95]
If additional fluid is required:
*[SV35000(ALL)03/91]
Clean the filler plug on the side of the case. Remove the filler
plug. The fluid level should be up to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
1. Add enough fluid through the filler plug hole to bring the
level up to the bottom of the hole. Use only fluid certified to
meet Ford Motor Company lubricant specification as listed
under Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and Lubricant
Specifications, later in this chapter.
2. Replace the filler plug in its original position, making sure it
is fully seated.
*[SV35100(ALL)02/95]
*[SV35200(ALL)03/91]
The Clutch
*[SV35301(ALL)03/91]
During normal operation the fluid level in the clutch reservoir
will slowly rise. If for any reason the fluid level drops, maintain
the fluid level at the step in the reservoir body.
%
%
*[SV35400(ALL)03/94]
The clutch on your vehicle is automatically self-adjusting and
should not require any routine service.
If it becomes necessary to remove the reservoir cap, thoroughly
clean the reservoir cap before removing it to prevent dirt or
water from entering the reservoir. Remove the internal
diaphragm and then add only a DOT 3 brake fluid such as Ford
High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid, meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A.
376
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV35500(ALL)10/94]
10-1/2 pica art:0020376-E
Clutch fluid reservoir
*[SV35800(ALL)07/95]
*[SV36000(ALL)06/93]
Driveline Universal Joint and Slip Yoke
*[SV36300(ALL)03/95]
*[SV36350(ALL)05/90]
Brake Fluid
*[SV36400(ALL)03/95]
Under normal circumstances, your vehicle should not use up
brake fluid rapidly. However, expect the level of the brake fluid
to slowly fall as you put more mileage on your vehicle and the
brake pads wear.
*[SV36500(ALL)08/95]
Check the brake fluid at least once a year. You can do this by
looking at the fluid level in the plastic brake fluid reservoir on
the master cylinder. The fluid level should be at or near the
MAX mark.
%
%
The universal joints that come standard with your vehicle do
not require lubrication. If your original equipment universal
joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease
fittings, lubrication will be necessary at the intervals shown in
the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid level indicator in
the master cylinder which lights the BRAKE warning light on
the instrument panel when the brake fluid level is low.
377
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV36550(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Brake fluid is toxic.
*[SV36560(ALL)07/95]
If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for
15 minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken
internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical
attention immediately.
*[SV36600(ALL)03/95]
If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove the cap from the
reservoir. Fill the reservoir to the MAX line with Ford High
Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA,
C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A.
*[SV36850(ALL)12/91]
NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on painted surfaces, it must
be flushed and wiped away immediately. Brake fluid
may dissolve the paint finish on your vehicle.
*[SV36900(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will
cause permanent damage to your brakes.
*[SV37000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV37100(ALL)01/95]
Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.
If you find that the fluid level is excessively low — below the
seam or ridge on the outside of the plastic reservoir — have the
brake system inspected.
*[SV37200(ALL)01/95]
RWARNING
Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry.
This may cause the brakes to fail.
378
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV37500(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0020382-C
Brake master cylinder
*[SV37600(ALL)03/95]
*[SV37700(ALL)01/95]
Power Steering Fluid
*[SV37800(ALL)03/95]
*[SV37900(ALL)02/95]
Checking and Adding Power Steering Fluid
%
%
Check the level of the power steering fluid at least twice a
year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
1. Start the engine and let it run until the power steering fluid
reaches normal operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when the engine
coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is near
the center of the NORMAL operating temperature range.
*[SV38000(ALL)01/95]
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel back and
*[SV38100(ALL)05/95]
% [SV38200(ALL)03/94]
*
3. Turn the engine off.
forth several times. Make sure that the cap assembly is
installed at this time.
4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (which is highlighted in
yellow in your vehicle). The fluid level should be between
the arrows in the FULL HOT range, which is marked on the
side of the dipstick, opposite the side marked FULL COLD.
Do not add fluid if the level is within the FULL HOT range.
379
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV38250(ALL)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Power steering dipstick
art:0021195-A
[SV38550(ALL)07/95]
10-1/2 pica
Power steering dipstick location
art:0090155-A
*[SV38800(ALL)07/94]
5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluid in small
*[SV38850(ALL)03/95]
6. When you are finished, put the dipstick back in and make
[SV38900(ALL)05/95]
amounts, continuously checking the level, until you reach the
FULL HOT range. Do not overfill.
sure that it fits snugly.
Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford specification such
as MERCONH Automatic Transmission Fluid (or equivalent).
380
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV39200(ALL)01/95]
If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive your vehicle for
a long period of time before adding fluid. This can damage the
power steering pump.
*[SV39400(ALL)02/95]
If you check the power steering fluid when it is cold, make sure
that the fluid reaches the FULL COLD range on the dipstick.
The reading will only be accurate if the fluid temperature is
approximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).
*[SV39405(ALL)06/93]
NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of your vehicle with
the engine off. It could force power steering fluid out
from the reservoir cap or in extreme cases, it could
unseat the cap.
%
*[SV39495(ALL)03/95]
Fuses
[SV39600(ALL)03/95]
Fuses protect your vehicle’s electrical system from overloading.
If electrical parts in your vehicle are not working, the system
may have been overloaded and blown a fuse. Before you
replace or repair any electrical parts, check the appropriate
fuses.
[SV39700(ALL)07/94]
The following charts tell you which fuses protect each electrical
part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows, all the parts of your
vehicle that use that circuit will not work.
*[SV39800(ALL)05/95]
Once you have determined which fuses to check, follow the
procedures under Checking and replacing fuses later in this
chapter.
381
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV39900(ALL)10/94]
17-1/2 pica
art:0021207-B
Fuse panel (located left side of instrument panel)
382
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV40250( X)10/94]
33-1/2 pica
art:0020562-M
Fuse panel (located under the left hand side of the instrument panel)
383
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV40275( X)03/95]
thirty-four pica
chart:0090139-A
384
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV40279( X)03/95]
thirty-four pica
chart:0090140-A
385
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV41000( X)07/95]
eight pica
chart:0090158-A
*[SV41300(ALL)06/95]
*[SV41400(ALL)10/92]
Power distribution box
*[SV41500(ALL)10/92]
The high current fuses are coded as follows: 30 amp -light
green, 40 amp - orange, 50 amp - red, 60 amp -blue.
%
The high current fuses contained in the Power Distribution Box
protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads;
these fuses provide the connection between the battery and your
vehicle’s electrical systems.
*[SV41600(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
*[SV41610(ALL)07/95]
Ford recommends that high current fuses be replaced by a
qualified technician.
*[SV41700(ALL)03/93]
RWARNING
Always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box
before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
*[SV41800(ALL)04/95]
A blown high current fuse may be replaced but will continue to
blow until the cause of the overload condition is corrected.
386
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV41900(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
[SV42125( X)02/96]
17-1/2 pica
art:0090142-C
Power distribution box
387
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV42200(ALL)06/95]
*[SV42300(ALL)02/95]
%
[SV43000(ALL)01/95]
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:
1. Find the fuse panel, which is located in the left end of the
instrument panel. The power distribution box (described
earlier in this section) is found in the engine compartment,
mounted on a bracket attached to the left fender apron.
[SV43100(ALL)10/94]
To access the fuse panel, remove the fuse panel cover by
inserting your finger in the divot and pulling on the cover.
The underside of the cover contains four spare fuses. A fuse
pulling tool is located in the lower right corner of the fuse
panel in case you need to replace a blown fuse.
*[SV43200(ALL)03/94]
The spare fuses for your vehicle are color coded as follows:
10 amp — red, 15 amp — light blue, 20 amp — natural, 30
amp — light green.
*[SV43300(ALL)06/95]
2. On the fuse panel cover, find the number of the fuse you
*[SV43400(ALL)06/95]
3. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Look through the clear
want to check. The diagram on the cover tells you where to
locate the fuse on the panel.
side of the fuse to see if the metal wire inside is separated. If
it is, the fuse is blown and should be replaced.
[SV43500(ALL)04/94]
7-1/2 pica art:0021196-A
The side view of a fuse
388
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV43600(ALL)06/95]
4. Replace the fuse with one that has the right amperage rating
*[SV43700(ALL)08/95]
RWARNING
(see previous chart).
Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a
fire.
*[SV43800(ALL)06/95]
*[SV44000(ALL)01/95]
%
*[SV44050(ALL)10/94]
[SV44060(ALL)10/94]
5. Put the fuse panel cover back on.
Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to blow if you do
not find what caused the overload. If the fuse continues to
blow, have your electrical system checked.
Relays
Relays are devices which recieve signals from components or
systems. After receiving signals, relays transfer these signals to
activate or deactivate other components or systems.
389
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV44130( X)10/94]
33-1/2 pica
art:0090143-C
Relays and their locations
390
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV44140( X)10/94]
33-1/2 pica
art:0021118-C
Relays and their locations
Servicing Your Explorer
391
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV44600(ALL)03/95]
*[SV44700(ALL)01/95]
Lights and Bulb Replacement
*[SV44800(ALL)01/95]
*[SV44850(ALL)02/95]
*[SV44900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45300(ALL)01/95]
*[SV45350(ALL)02/95]
% [SV45400(ALL)01/95]
*
*[SV45500(ALL)01/95]
■ headlamps
*[SV45600(ALL)01/95]
■ the headlamps do not seem to give you enough light to see
*[SV45700(ALL)01/95]
■ the headlamp beams are pointed substantially away from a
%
It is a good idea to check the operation of the following lights
frequently:
■ high-mount brakelamp
■ tail lamps
■ brakelamps
■ hazard flasher
■ turn signals
■ license plate lamp
■ fog lamps
The alignment of your headlamps should be checked if:
■ oncoming motorists frequently signal you to turn off your
vehicle’s high beams when you do not have the high beams
on
clearly at night
position slightly down and to the right
392
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV45800(ALL)03/95]
*[SV45900(ALL)01/95]
%
Headlamp Bulb
The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable bulbs. When the
lamp burns out, simply replace the bulb, rather than the whole
lamp.
*[SV46000(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out
of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic
base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand
could cause the bulb to break the next time the
headlamps are operated.
*[SV46050(ALL)12/91]
NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, it should be cleaned
with rubbing alcohol before being used.
*[SV46100(ALL)01/95]
Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you can immediately
replace it with a new one. If a bulb is removed for an extended
period of time, contaminants may enter the headlamp housing
and affect its performance.
[SV46200(ALL)04/94]
10-1/2 pica
Parts of a headlamp
art:0021197-A
393
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV46300(ALL)03/95]
*[SV46400(ALL)01/95]
[SV46501( X)05/95]
Removing the headlamp bulb
1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in the OFF position.
2. Lift the hood, open the hinged headlamp cover, and behind
the headlamp remove the electrical connector by grasping
the wires and pulling rearward.
*[SV46700(ALL)04/95]
3. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it 1/8 of a turn to
*[SV46800(ALL)04/95]
4. Carefully remove the bulb assembly from its socket by
*[SV46900(ALL)03/95]
*[SV47000(ALL)02/95]
free it from the socket. Then slide the ring off the plastic
base. Keep the ring. You must use it again to hold the new
bulb in place.
gently pulling it rearward without turning.
Installing the headlamp bulb
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward,
insert the glass end of the bulb into the socket. You may
need to turn the bulb left or right to line up the grooves in
the plastic base with the tabs in the socket. When the
grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the socket until the
plastic base contacts the rear of the socket.
*[SV47100(ALL)08/95]
2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it
*[SV47200(ALL)02/95]
3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of the plastic base
*[SV47300(ALL)02/95]
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure that they work
contacts the rear of the socket. Lock the ring into the socket
by rotating it clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
until it snaps, locking it into position.
properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you
changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again.
394
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV47401( X)02/95]
*[SV47402( X)03/93]
Map Lamp Bulb (Overhead Console)
To remove the lens, pry with a small screwdriver as shown:
[SV47403( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Removing the lens
art:0021199-A
*[SV47404( X)03/93]
To remove the bulbs, use a screwdriver or coin to push up and
rotate counterclockwise 90˚. The bulb and bulb holder will then
drop out from the lamp as shown:
[SV47405( X)10/94]
10-1/2 pica
Removing bulb
art:0021200-A
395
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV47415(ALL)01/95]
Tail Lamp Bulb
[SV47420(ALL)01/95]
Removing the tail lamp bulb
[SV47445( X)10/94]
1. Remove the two (2) screws retaining rear lamp to vehicle.
[SV47450( X)10/94]
2. Remove rear lamp by pulling rearward to disengage two
lower barbed retainers.
[SV47455( X)10/94]
3. Remove socket from lamp.
[SV47460( X)10/94]
4. Remove bulb from socket.
[SV47465(ALL)01/95]
Installing the tail lamp bulb
[SV47490( X)10/94]
1. Install bulb in socket.
[SV47495( X)10/94]
2. Install socket to lamp.
[SV47500( X)10/94]
3. Align lower barbed retainers and install lamp to vehicle.
[SV47505( X)10/95]
4. Install two (2) lamp retaining screws.
396
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV47515( X)10/94]
24 pica art:0021370-A
Replacing the tail lamp bulb
397
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV47625(ALL)03/95]
Bulb Specifications
[SV47825( X)05/95]
thirty-four pica
chart:0090186-A
398
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV47875( X)04/94]
eight pica
chart:0020633-G
*[SV48400(ALL)10/90]
Rear lighting wire functions
[SV48500(ALL)04/94]
eight pica
chart:0021201-A
*[SV48600(ALL)03/95]
*[SV48700(ALL)05/95]
Emission Control System
*[SV48800(ALL)05/95]
To make sure that the catalytic converter and the other emission
control parts continue to work properly:
*[SV48900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV49000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV49100(ALL)01/95]
■ Use only unleaded fuel.
*[SV49200(ALL)03/95]
■ Have the services listed in your Maintenance Schedule and
%
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter which
enables your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission
requirements.
■ Avoid running out of fuel.
■ Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving,
especially at high speeds.
Record booklet performed according to the specified schedule.
399
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV49300(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or
other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
*[SV49400(ALL)05/95]
RWARNING
On vehicles without original equipment floor covering or
insulation, do not let passengers ride in your truck in a
manner that allows contact between skin and the metal
floor.
*[SV49500(ALL)05/95]
Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss of oil pressure,
the charge warning light, the check engine light, or the
temperature warning light. These sometimes indicate that the
emission system is not working properly.
*[SV49600(ALL)01/95]
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or
engine. Changes that cause more unburned fuel to reach the
exhaust system can increase the temperature of the engine or
exhaust system.
*[SV49700(ALL)01/95]
By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases,
trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted
to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it
from working. In some of the United States and in Canada,
vehicle owners may be liable if their emission control device is
removed or is prevented from working.
400
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV49800(ALL)02/92]
Never use a metal exhaust collector when you service your
vehicle. If the metal collector contacts any of your vehicle’s
plastic trim or bumper parts they could melt or deform.
*[SV49900(ALL)01/95]
Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate properly. See
your dealer if the engine runs on for more than five seconds
after you shut it off or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
%
*[SV50000(ALL)05/95]
Information about your vehicle’s emission control system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information decal located on or
near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and
gives some tune-up specifications.
*[SV51475(ALL)07/95]
*[SV51480(ALL)07/95]
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance Testing
*[SV51485(ALL)09/95]
*[SV51490(ALL)06/95]
OBD II Drive Cycle
*[SV51495(ALL)06/95]
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic
conditions and obey all traffic laws.
%
In some localities it may become a legal requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the On-Board Diagnostic
(OBD) II system. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery
has just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to a not ready
for I/M testing condition. To prepare for I/M testing, the law
specifies a “need for additional mixed city and highway driving
to complete the check” of the OBD II system. As soon as all of
the OBD II system checks are successfully completed, the OBD
II system is set to the ready condition. The amount of driving
required to reach the ready condition varies with individual
driving patterns. To complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle defined below.
If the vehicle owner cannot or does not want to do the
additional driving required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of repair work.
The following steps must be run in the order shown. If any
steps are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe
driving mode is acceptable between steps.
401
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV51500(ALL)07/95]
The engine must be warmed up and at operating temperature
before proceeding with the drive modes of the following OBD II
Drive Cycle.
*[SV51505(ALL)06/95]
1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral) the vehicle for 4
[SV51510(ALL)05/95]
2. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for automatic transmissions)
minutes.
for 40 seconds.
[SV51515(ALL)05/95]
3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h) (for manual
transmissions upshift from 1st to 5th gear, but hold in 2nd
for at least 5 seconds) at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.
*[SV51520(ALL)05/95]
4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at 45 mph
*[SV51525(ALL)08/95]
5. Idle the vehicle in drive (neutral for manual transmissions)
*[SV51530(ALL)05/95]
6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at speeds
(72 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th gear) for 30
seconds.
for 40 seconds.
between 25 and 40 mph (40-64 km/h) (manual transmissions
primarily drive vehicles in 3rd and 4th gear when possible)
for 15 minutes. During the 15 minute drive cycle the
following modes must be achieved:
[SV51535(ALL)05/95]
a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10 seconds each.
[SV51540(ALL)05/95]
b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle position, and
[SV51545(ALL)05/95]
c. choose three different speeds to do 1.5 minute steady state
throttle drives.
402
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV51550(ALL)06/95]
7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions upshift to 5th gear).
This should take approximately 8 seconds.
*[SV51555(ALL)05/95]
8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at the selected
*[SV51560(ALL)05/95]
9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying speeds between 45
*[SV51565(ALL)05/95]
10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive (manual
*[SV51570(ALL)07/95]
11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed. Vehicle can be
speed between 45 and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual
transmissions use 5th gear) for approximately 5 minutes.
and 60 mph (72-97 km/h) (manual transmissions use 5th
gear).
transmissions use 5th gear) for 40 seconds.
turned off when convenient.
403
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV51575(ALL)07/95]
Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts, and
Lubricant Specifications
[SV52050( X)12/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090164-C
404
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
%
*[SV52800(ALL)05/95]
Motorcraft Parts
[SV53150( X)06/95]
18 pica chart:0090205-A
405
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
%
*[SV53500(ALL)05/95]
Lubricant Specifications
[SV54250( X)10/95]
thirty-two pica
chart:0090113-B
406
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
[SV54350( X)03/95]
thirty pica
chart:0090114-A
407
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
[SV54425( X)03/95]
twenty pica
chart:0090115-A
*[SV56000(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56150(ALL)01/95]
Vehicle Storage
*[SV56200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56300(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56400(ALL)01/95]
General
%
Maintenance Tips
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of
time (60 days or more), refer to the following maintenance
recommendations to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
■ Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
■ Protect from sunlight, if possible.
408
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
Servicing Your Explorer
*[SV56500(ALL)01/95]
■ If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular
*[SV56600(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56700(ALL)01/95]
Body
*[SV56800(ALL)01/95]
*[SV56900(ALL)01/95]
*[SV57000(ALL)01/95]
■ Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
*[SV57100(ALL)04/95]
■ Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges and latches
*[SV57200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV57300(ALL)01/95]
% [SV57350(ALL)01/95]
*
*[SV57400(ALL)01/95]
■ Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.
*[SV57500(ALL)01/95]
■ With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears
*[SV57600(ALL)01/95]
% [SV57700(ALL)07/94]
*
Fuel system
*[SV57900(ALL)03/95]
NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle storage (60 days or
more), fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in the fuel system
and may also clog small orifices.
%
maintenance to protect against rust and damage.
■ Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or
mud from exterior surfaces, rear wheel housing and
underside of front fenders.
■ Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
■ Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of
auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
the vehicle is washed.
with a light grade oil.
■ Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
■ Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches
normal operating temperature.
while the engine is running.
■ Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel until the first
automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle.
409
File:15unsvx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:34 1996
*[SV58000(ALL)01/95]
Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever actual or
expected storage periods exceed 60 days. Follow the instructions
on the label. The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed
to circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
*[SV58100(ALL)01/95]
A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuel system will
protect the fuel system’s inner surfaces from corrosion. Follow
the instructions packaged with the product.
*[SV58200(ALL)01/95]
*[SV58300(ALL)01/95]
% [SV58400(ALL)01/95]
*
*[SV58500(ALL)01/95]
*[SV58600(ALL)01/95]
Cooling system
*[SV58700(ALL)01/95]
*[SV58800(ALL)01/95]
% [SV58900(ALL)01/95]
*
*[SV59000(ALL)05/95]
*[SV59100(ALL)01/95]
*[SV59200(ALL)01/95]
Brakes
*[SV59300(ALL)03/95]
■ Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to
%
%
■ Protect against freezing temperatures.
Battery
■ Check and recharge as necessary.
■ Keep connections clean and covered with a light coat of
grease.
■ Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
■ Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
■ Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and clevis pins under
vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust.
lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion.
410
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI00010( X)05/95]
full page art:0090184-A
411
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI03100( X)07/95]
full page art:0090212-A
Front exterior view
412
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI03700( X)07/95]
full page art:0090110-B
Rear exterior view
413
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI04300( X)07/95]
full page art:0090112-B
Entrance view
414
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI04900( X)07/95]
full page art:0090213-A
Driver’s door
415
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI05500( X)07/95]
full page art:0090195-B
Instrument panel
416
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI06100( X)07/95]
full page art:0090105-B
Instrument cluster
417
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI06500( X)09/95]
full page art:0090193-A
Rear cargo area
418
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI07700( X)07/95]
full page art:0090151-B
The 4.0L engine compartment
419
File:16unqix.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 10:11:57 1996
[QI07800( X)07/95]
full page art:0090136-A
The 5.0L engine compartment
420
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
A
Accessory position on the ignition. . . . . . .
Accessory power source, power point outlet . .
Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air bag supplemental restraint system
and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .
proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
service and information labels . . . . . . .
tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air cleaner filter
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air suspension, check air ride system warning,
message center . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm, activating remote personal. . . . . . .
All wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambulance packages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna, radio (see Electronic sound system). .
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . .
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . . .
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
see also Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft system
arming the system. . . . . . . . . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disarming an untriggered system . . . . . .
disarming a triggered system. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 67
. . . . . 204
. . . . . 348
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26–27,
. 24,
. . .
. 24,
. . .
. . .
. 26,
. . .
. . .
. 30,
. . .
52
28
32
28
83
28
28
26
28
32
25
. . . . .
. . . . .
336
405
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
100
162
258
5
241
352
352
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
207, 213,
. . . .
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261
263
261
.
.
.
.
167
167
168
168
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
421
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Anti-theft system (continued)
triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . .
Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . .
Audio system (see Electronic sound system)
Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . .
Autolock (see Keyless entry) . . . . . . .
Automatic transaxle, fluid, specification . .
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic overdrive. . . . .
fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid, specification. . . . . . . . . . .
Axle
lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . .
traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
128,
. .
. .
167
88
319
317
207
132
159
406
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
248
375
374
406
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . .
406
. . . . . 269, 363
B
Backing up . . . . . . . . . .
Basic vehicle warranty . . . . .
Battery
acid, treating emergencies . .
battery saver . . . . . . . .
charging system warning light
disconnecting . . . . . . . .
how to service . . . . . . .
jumping a disabled battery. .
maintenance-free . . . . . .
proper disposal, recycling . .
replacement, specifications . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . .
voltage gauge . . . . . . .
when storing your vehicle . .
422
. . . . . . . . . . . .
248
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
295,
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
372–373
.
166
. . 87
.
298
.
371
.
295
.
371
.
372
.
405
.
371
87, 89
.
410
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Brake fluid
brake warning light . . . . . .
checking and adding . . . . .
description . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . .
Brakelamp, high-mount brakelamp
Brakes
adjustment . . . . . . . . . .
anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . .
applying the brakes . . . . . .
brake warning light . . . . . .
fluid, checking and adding . . .
fluid, refill capacities . . . . .
fluid, specifications . . . . . .
front disc . . . . . . . . . . .
if brakes do not grip well . . .
master cylinder . . . . . . . .
new brake linings . . . . . . .
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . .
parking . . . . . . . . . . .
power braking . . . . . . . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . . .
stopping distances. . . . . . .
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . .
when storing your vehicle . . .
Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . .
Break-in period . . . . . . . . .
Brights (high beams) . . . . . . .
Built-in child seat
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, replacing . . . . . . . . .
halogen . . . . . . . . . . .
headlamps . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 81
. 377
. 377
. 406
. 134
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
261
261
265
81
377
377
406
261
264
377
5
261
266
261
377
267
290
410
247
5
136
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 52
. . 34
. 392
. 393
. 393
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
264,
265,
. .
. .
. .
. . .
. 91,
423
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
C
Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . . . .
Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . . .
Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . . .
Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) . .
Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound system)
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging system warning light . . . . . . . . .
Child safety restraints
built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety seats
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . . .
automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . . .
built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . . . .
Chime
headlamps on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit breakers, see also fuses . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning your vehicle
built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . . .
engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . .
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
424
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
214,
.
.
.
. .
. .
324
3
76
52
226
399
369
299
89
87
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
34
65
52
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27,
. .
13,
. .
27,
. .
. .
. .
52
64
52
34
52
52
52
64
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 91
. . 68
. . 82
.
381
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 52
. .
7
.
339
. .
6
.
132
.
186
.
132
.
.
.
.
.
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Cleaning your vehicle (continued)
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .
interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .
leather seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .
rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .
upholstery and interior trim . . . . .
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate control system . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . .
operation while driving . . . . . . .
recommended shift speeds . . . . . .
shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . .
Combination lap and shoulder belts . . .
Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound
Compass, electronic . . . . . . . . . .
Compass/temperature display . . . . .
Controls
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .
mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .
steering column . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
system)
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 109
. 188, 191
. . . 183
. . . 135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 7,
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
219, 229,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
110
186
133
186
191
7
6
126
7
24
132
186
6
6
370
126
110
241
. 376
. 376
. 376
. 251
. 253
. 251
. 406
. . 71
. 9, 11
. 209
. 197
. 197
425
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Convenience kit in cargo area . . .
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
checking and adding . . . . . .
drain and flush . . . . . . . . .
preparing for storage . . . . . .
refill capacities . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . .
temperature gauge . . . . . . .
warnings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crankcase emission filter . . . . . .
Cruise control (see Speed control). .
Customer Assistance Centre, Ford of
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Canada
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
301
.
352
.
356
.
410
.
356
.
406
. . 92
.
352
.
334
.
405
.
141
.
324
D
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) . . .
Daytime running light system . . . .
Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . .
Defrost
rear window . . . . . . . . . . .
windshield . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
automatic transmission fluid . . . .
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
power steering fluid. . . . . . . .
Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . .
Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lubricant specifications. . . . . . .
Driveline universal joint and slip yoke
Driving under special conditions
bad weather . . . . . . . . . . .
heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . .
high speed . . . . . . . . . . . .
high water . . . . . . . . . . . .
slippery roads . . . . . . . . . .
tips for safe driving . . . . . . . .
towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . .
426
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
109
132
323
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
373,
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
126
113
349
375
349
379
311
319
147
406
377
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
269
271
268
270
269
267
272
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
E
Electrical system
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 388
operating when the engine is off . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
power point outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Electronic message center (see Message center) . . . . . . . 96
Electronic sound system
accessory delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
atenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
tuning the radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 223, 238
warranty and service information . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Electronic stereo cassette radio (see Electronic
sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 222
Electronic stereo radio (see Electronic sound system) . 209, 222
Emergencies, roadside
assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 373
fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Emission control system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 399
Engine
check engine warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74
fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 70–71
fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
427
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Engine (continued)
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting after a collision . . . . . . . .
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant
checking and adding . . . . . . . . .
checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . .
preparing for storage . . . . . . . . .
recovery reservoir. . . . . . . . . . .
refill procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature guage:electronic
Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine:idle speed control. . . . . . . . .
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . .
checking and adding . . . . . . . . .
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . .
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . .
viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry system
illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
keyless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
428
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 67, 71
. . . . 74
.
408–409
. . . . 73
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
334,
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 349,
. . . .
. . . .
334, 351,
. . . . .
. . . .
. . 348,
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
351,
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
352
355
375
356
410
336
356
406
92
.
.
.
92
92
92
334
. 72
351
349
349
375
90
405
406
348
5
348
166
156
161
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Exhaust fumes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
F
Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury. . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission . . . . . .
Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foglamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . .
Ford Extended Service Plan. . . . . . . . . . .
Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . . . .
Ford of Canada Customer Assistance Centre . . .
Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving off road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
special notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four-wheeling with Ford supplement . . . . . .
French owner guides, how to obtain. . . . . . .
Fuel
calculating fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .
choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . . . . .
comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates.
filling your vehicle with fuel . . . . . . . . .
filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . . . .
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
improving fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .
octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
safety information relating to automotive fuels .
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 334
. 243
. 139
. 136
. 299
. 131
. 319
. . 4
. 324
. 324
. 325
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 256
. 259
. . 4
. . 4
. . 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
99, 346
. 342
. 347
. 339
. 405
339–340
. . 91
. 347
. 342
. 342
. 346
. 344
. 409
. 344
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
429
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Fuel cap
removing. . . . . . .
replacing . . . . . . .
Fuel filler door
override, manual . . .
remote release . . . .
Fuel filter, specifications .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut-off switch
engine does not start .
starting after a collision
Fuse panels
instrument panel . . .
power distribution box
Fuses
charts . . . . . . . .
checking and replacing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 341
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
340
.
339
.
405
. . 91
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
74
388
386
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 381, 388
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
388
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . .
Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . .
Gasoline (see Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gauges, Electronic
engine coolant temperature gauge
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
odometer. . . . . . . . . . . .
speedometer . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges, Mechanical
battery voltage gauge . . . . . .
charging system gauge . . . . .
engine coolant temperature gauge
engine oil pressure gauge . . . .
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
odometer. . . . . . . . . . . .
speedometer . . . . . . . . . .
tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
trip odometer. . . . . . . . . .
430
. . . . . . . . . .
339
. . . . . . . 99, 342, 346
. . . . . . . . . .
339
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
92
91
94
93
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89
89
92
90
91
94
93
94
94
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating . . . . . . . . . . .
definition . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with a heavy load . . . .
location . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearshift
automatic operation . . . . . . .
column-mounted . . . . . . . .
floor-mounted. . . . . . . . . .
gearshift override . . . . . . . .
locking the gearshift . . . . . . .
positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
shifting the gears . . . . . . . .
shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gearshift:shifting the gears . . . . .
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
calculating . . . . . . . . . . .
definition . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with a heavy load . . . .
location . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 277
. 271, 276
. . . 271
. 271, 276
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . 277
. 271, 275
. . . 271
. . . 276
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
246,
246,
. .
246,
246
246
251
247
67
251
251
247
251
H
Hazard flashers . . . . .
Headlamps
aiming . . . . . . . .
autolamp system . . .
checking alignment . .
cleaning . . . . . . .
daytime running lights.
flashing . . . . . . .
high beam . . . . . .
replacing bulbs . . . .
turning on and off . .
warning chime . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
139
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 392
. 128
. 392
. 132
. 132
. 136
. 136
392–393
. . 127
. . . 91
431
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
High beams
indicator light . . . . . . . . .
operation. . . . . . . . . . . .
High-mount brakelamp, description .
High-mount brakelamp:location . . .
Hitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood
latch location . . . . . . . . . .
lubrication specifications . . . . .
release lever . . . . . . . . . .
working under the hood. . . . .
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
127,
. .
. .
. .
91
136
134
134
289
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
335
406
335
334
140
355
. . . . . . .
318
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . .
Idle
relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition
chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
positions of the ignition . . . . . . . .
removing the key . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . .
Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel
lighting up panel and interior . . . . .
location of components . . . . . . . .
registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integrated child seat (see Built-in child seat)
Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
. . . 298, 334, 372
. . . . . . . . 72
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32,
. .
. .
68
67
68
79
52
79
81
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
132
.
109
.
110
. . 34
.
136
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
J
Jack
operation . . . . . . .
positioning . . . . . .
storage . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables . . . .
disconnecting cables . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 307
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 307
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
297
298
K
Keyless entry system
autolock . . . . . . . . .
locking and unlocking doors
programming entry code. .
Keys
key in ignition chime . . .
positions of the ignition . .
removing from the ignition
stuck in lock position . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
. . . . . . . . . . . 148, 157
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68
67
68
67
L
Lamps
autolamp delay system . . .
checking . . . . . . . . . .
daytime running light system
flashing the lamps. . . . . .
fog lamps . . . . . . . . .
hazard flashers . . . . . . .
headlamps . . . . . . . . .
high beams . . . . . . . . .
high-mount brakelamp. . . .
illuminated entry system . . .
illuminated mirrors . . . . .
instrument panel, dimming. .
128
392
132
136
131
139
127
136
134
166
190
132
433
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Lamps (continued)
interior lamps . . . . . . .
replacing bulbs . . . . . . .
trailer . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane change indicator (see Turn
Lights, warning and indicator
air bag . . . . . . . . . . .
anti-theft . . . . . . . . . .
brake . . . . . . . . . . .
charging system . . . . . .
check engine . . . . . . . .
engine oil pressure . . . . .
hazard warning light . . . .
high beam . . . . . . . . .
low washer fluid . . . . . .
oil pressure. . . . . . . . .
overdrive off . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . .
service engine soon . . . . .
theft system . . . . . . . .
turn signal indicator. . . . .
Load limits
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . .
trailer towing . . . . . . . .
Lubricant specifications . . . .
Lug nuts
standard . . . . . . . . . .
tightening sequence . . . . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
signal)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 127,
. . .
. . .
. . .
132
392
290
135
83
88
81
87
84
90
139
91
104
90
86
82
84
88
135
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
271
271
272
406
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
307
304
.
.
.
.
.
.
M
Maintenance schedule and record (see separate Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission
clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,
fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
434
3
333
376
376
406
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Manual transmission (continued)
shifting gears . . . . . . . . . . .
shift speeds . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master cylinder, brakes. . . . . . . .
Message center
low washer fluid . . . . . . . . .
system check button . . . . . . . .
Methanol in fuel. . . . . . . . . . .
Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . .
Mirrors
automatic dimming rearview mirror
dual electric remote control . . . .
rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .
side view mirrors . . . . . . . . .
side view mirrors (power) . . . . .
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . .
vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motorcraft parts . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
251
253
377
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
99,
104
100
344
346
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
188
191
188
188
191
190
190
192
405
N
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration . . . . . 323
New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
O
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer
description . . . . . . . . . . .
trip odometer . . . . . . . . . .
Off road driving, 4-wheel drive . . .
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . .
Oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . .
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system
. . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
342
. . . 94
. . . 94
. . 259
351, 405
. . 348
. . 348
. . 401
435
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Overdrive . . . . . .
Overhead console
compass/temperature
map lamps . . . . .
storage compartment
Overseas offices . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
display
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
197
200
201
325
. . . . . . . .
162
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
P
Panic alarm feature, remote entry system
Parking brake
operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts). . . . . . .
PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . .
Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . .
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .
Power features
door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . .
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power point electrical outlet . . . . . .
Power steering
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
driving with power steering . . . . .
fluid, checking and adding. . . . . .
fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . .
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
266
. . 81
.
405
.
405
.
386
.
155
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
155
188, 191
. .
192
. .
183
171–172
. .
204
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
379
255
379
406
255
335
. . . . . . . . . .
207
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems)
Rear axle
lubricant specification . . . . . .
traction lok . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . .
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . .
436
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
406
. 269, 363
. . .
188
. . .
171
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Rear window (continued)
defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulations, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration . . . . . . . .
Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote entry system
arming and disarming the anti-theft system
illuminated entry . . . . . . . . . . . .
locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . . .
panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement/additional transmitters . . . .
replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . .
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
126
358
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
323
389
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
162
166
161
162
166
164
323
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 9
. . 32
32, 52
. 317
. 295
. 364
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
fuels .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 267
. . 9
. 290
. 323
. 344
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11, 14,
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
S
Safe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . .
Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . .
Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . .
Safety information relating to automotive
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts . . . . . . .
automatic locking mode . . . . . . .
automatic locking mode (retractor) . .
cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . .
extension assembly . . . . . . . . .
for adults. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for children . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
13
13
24
21
9
32
437
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Safety restraints (continued)
for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . .
lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . . . .
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning light and chime. . . . . . . . .
Safety seats for children
and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
attaching with tether straps . . . . . . .
automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . .
built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . .
in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tether anchorage hardware. . . . . . . .
Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . .
Seats
adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . .
adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . .
child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . .
cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . .
reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
seatback release . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service concerns. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing your vehicle
precautions when servicing . . . . . . .
servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . .
Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . . . .
Shoulder and lap belts (see Safety restraints) .
Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . . .
Side mirrors
adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . .
438
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
32,
.
9,
.
.
22,
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
27, 52–53
. . . 64
. 13, 52
. . . 34
. . . 52
. . . 52
. . . 52
. . . 64
. . .
9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
334
. .
311
. .
247
246, 251
. . 9, 11
. 11, 14
.
.
.
.
52
9
11
22
9
24
82
.
174
.
183
. . 52
.
186
.
174
.
174
.
318
.
318
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
191
192
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Snowplowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare tire
changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
conventional spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
temporary spare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-4WD vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utility-type vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed control
accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tap up/tap down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .
starting your vehicle if the battery is disabled . . .
Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel
horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments, overhead storage compartment
. .
. .
294
369
299,
299,
. .
. .
301,
. .
. .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
304
301
301
301
307
299
405
267
4
4
4
406
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
144
146
144
146
144
291
93
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70
71
74
72
295
255
.
.
.
.
.
. 140
. . 67
. 141
. 140
. 201
.
.
.
.
439
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . .
Sunroof (moon roof) . . . . . . . .
Supplemental air bag readiness light
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
408
.
192
. . 83
. . 24
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mechanical cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tail lamps
bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature control (see Climate control) . . .
Tether anchor installation (see Child restraints).
Tilt steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . . .
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . .
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . .
spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wear bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . . .
Towing your vehicle
using wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . . .
with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
440
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
94
94
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
299,
.
.
.
.
.
.
299
362
370
362
366
364
369
301
410
366
366
366
369
272
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
. 269,
. 269,
. . .
311
311
363
363
272
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
392
.
132
.
110
. . 64
.
140
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Trailer towing
calculating maximum trailer weight . .
safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . .
trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .
trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaxle
automatic operation . . . . . . . . .
lubricant specifications . . . . . . . .
Transaxle control switch . . . . . . . .
Transfer case, fluid checking . . . . . .
Transmission
automatic operation . . . . . . . . .
fluid, checking and adding (automatic)
fluid, checking and adding (manual) .
lubricant specifications . . . . . . . .
Transmission control switch . . . . . .
Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . .
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . .
Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . .
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
277
290
290
290
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
246
406
248
376
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 246
. 374
. 376
. 406
. 248
. 161
. . 94
. 401
. 135
. 135
. 135
U
Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . . . . .
334, 351, 375
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .
VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information) decal
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . .
Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . . . .
understanding loading information . . . . . .
Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
190
136
401
318
272
277
271
408
441
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Ventilating your vehicle (see Climate control) . . . . . .
110
Viscosity (see Engine oil). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
348
Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . . . . . . . . 87, 89
W
Warm engine, starting . . . . . . . .
Warning chimes
headlamps on . . . . . . . . . .
key in ignition . . . . . . . . . .
safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . .
Warranties
basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . .
radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty Information Booklet . . . .
Washer fluid
rear window reservoir . . . . . . .
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . .
warning light . . . . . . . . . . .
windshield . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . .
Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . .
Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications
Wheel bearings lubricant specifications
Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . .
Wheels
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inspection and maintenance . . . .
lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows
manual windows, operating . . . .
one-touch down . . . . . . . . .
power windows, operating. . . . .
rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . .
442
. . . . . . . . . .
72
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
91
68
82
79
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
3
. .
3
.
243
. .
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358
358
104
358
271
369
406
406
311
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
304,
. .
. .
. .
370
307
362
304
369
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
171
. . .
172
.
171–172
. . .
126
.
.
.
.
File:unixx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:21:09 1996
Index
Windshield
defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . .
washing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid . . . . .
checking and replacing wiper blades
liftgate reservoir. . . . . . . . . .
low washer fluid light . . . . . . .
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . .
specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
variable interval wipers . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . .
Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
113
136
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358
360
358
104
136
358
406
136
136
311
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358,
. .
. .
. .
443
File:17ungsx.ex
Update:Thu Feb 29 09:20:59 1996
Service Station Information
[GS00200( X)01/96]
twenty-four pica
chart:0090145-D
444
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement